BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 1
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply of material and Erection, testing and commissioning of new 11 kV lines, New DTs, LT lines for release of BPL beneficiary connections under Rajiv Gandhi Grameen Vidyutikaran Yojana (RGGVY) on turnkey basis in Faridabad District under the jurisdiction of DHBVN.
VOLUME – II
SECTION – VII
BID NO. P&D/TED –151/2012
DAKSHIN HARYANA BIJLI VITRAN NIGAM
HISAR
Jan -2012
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 2
INDEX
VOLUME – II
SECTION DESCRIPTION PAGE NO.
VII A, B & C
Technical
Specifications
VII D
Drawings
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 3
SECTION VII-A 1. Introduction
The scope of this specification covers construction of new 11 kV lines, New
DTs, LT lines for release of BPL beneficiary connections under Rajiv Gandhi
Grameen Vidyutikaran Yojana (RGGVY) on turnkey basis in Faridabad
District under the jurisdiction of DHBVN.
1.1 Scope :
The scope of work shall include complete engineering of the Lines as per design, given in the tender documents, manufacture, testing and supply of all the required material on FOR destination/Site basis including transportation, insurance, storage, erection, dismantlement of HT/LT line and other equipment as per site requirement, testing and commissioning of 11 kV lines, New DTs, LT lines for release of BPL beneficiary connections under Rajiv Gandhi Grameen Vidyutikaran Yojana (RGGVY) on turnkey basis in Faridabad District funded by REC under the jurisdiction of DHBVN on turnkey basis. The supply items shall include 9/11 meter long PCC Poles, Base Plates, ACSR conductor, HT XLPE AB cable, 11 kV Disc Insulators with required fittings, 11 kV Pin Insulators with Pins, Single Tension fittings, Stay rods with Elbow, Stay Wires, Earthing rods, Pipe earthing GI wire, LAs, G.O. Switches, PG Clamps, MS Angle iron, MS channel iron, MS Flat including fabrication of Clamps, Suspension clamp, Dead end clamp, 25/16 KVA Three phase distribution T/F ( Only from DHBVN empanelled firms from P&D wing),LT cables, Energy meters ( Only from DHBVN empanelled firms from MM wing), MCB for energy meters, Insulated conductor, Number plate, Danger plate, Phase plate, Drilling, Cutting providing muffing in marshy land and other items as per Schedule of prices. All the other material / job not specifically mentioned but required to complete the work shall also be in the scope of the contractor. The conductor requiring dismantlement shall be dismantled Section wise i.e. from dead end pole to next dead end pole. Shorter lengths of dismantled ACSR without any valid technical reason shall not be accepted. The contractor will complete all the required work under the scope.
In addition to the above Load losses at 50% and 100% load of all the transformers received by the Nigam against turnkey works shall be checked at Nigam’s works by a committee of three officers, one each from OP. Wing, M&P Wing and TRW Workshop. Out of 100 No. T/Fs supplied by the contractor against individual tender enquiry, one T/F shall be opened at Nigam’s workshop for physical verification of the quality of material used by the manufacturer. This shall be done by the same committee of three officers as mentioned above and lot size of each capacity (in nos.) as provided in the supply order, the entire type test shall be conducted from NABL Lab on 1nos. T/F up to 200 nos. T/F supply order, 2nos. T/F from 201 to 400 nos. T/F supply order, 3 nos. T/F from 401 to 600 nos. T/F supply order and 4nos. T/F
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 4
from 600 nos. & above T/F supply order. For the release of BPL connections , the contractor will obtain the list of the BPL connections from the SDO/Op concerned .The contractor will complete all the required work under the scope (All the meters shall be got tested and sealed by the contractor from the DHBVN labs, at their own cost, before their erection at site). The contractor will intimate the SDO/Operation regarding when he/they are starting the work for the release of the BPL connections. Under no circumstances will the contractor undertake the work of release of BPL connections without the prior intimation to the Nodal officer and the SDO/Op Concerned and subsequent permission.
NOTE: The contractors will obtain the detailed drawings / sketches of the work involved from the GM/Construction Concerned. The contractor will intimate the XEN/Construction prior to start the work.
1.1.1 This specification also includes the supply of the poles, insulators and their
hardware, conductor, earth wire etc. The bidder shall clearly indicate in his
offer the sources from where he proposes to procure the raw material /
completed material and its components.
1.1.2 Any material not specifically mentioned in the contract but required to
complete the job is deemed to be included in the scope of work of the
Contractor.
1.1.3 The entire stringing work of the conductor and earth wire shall be carried out
by standard practice. The bidder shall indicate in his offer the detailed
description of procedure to be deployed for stringing operation.
1.1.4 Location Details: The line shall be laid in the areas covered under DHBVN in
Haryana.
1.2 Details of Line Route and Terrain: The 11 KV Power Lines will be running almost through plain and cultivated
area. Preliminary route alignment maps of Power lines covered under this
package giving the general topography and major crossings like river, power
lines, railway lines and roads are in the bidder’s scope. Wherever, special
river crossings are involved proper strengthening of the normal pole locations
will be done by the Contractor.
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 5
1.3 Access to the Line and Right of Way:
Right of way clearance shall be arranged by employer in accordance with
work schedule. Employer will secure way leave and right of way in the forest
area.
1.4 Detailed Survey of Optimization Pole Location:
1.4.1 The detailed survey for the line route and optimization of the pole location
along with profiling shall be carried out by the successful bidder. The
provisional quantity has been indicated in the Bill of Material for each
package.
1.4.2 (a) The tentative sketches of the lines / works to be carried out are
enclosed with this specification. The detailed survey shall be carried
out by the bidder along the approved alignment. The bidder will
examine the site of works and its surroundings and obtain himself, at
his own responsibility and expenses, all information regarding general
site characteristics, crossings accessibility, infrastructure details etc.
The purchaser will, however, assist the interested bidder to see and
inspect the site of work. For this purpose the bidders are requested to
contact : General Manager, Planning & Design, DHBVN, Vidyut
Sadan, Vidyut Nagar, Hisar or the respective DGM (Operation) /
AGM(OP) of the area as indicated on sketch.
2 Pole & 4 Pole Structure as per site requirements shall be provided
where the situation so demands. Drawings of 2/4 Pole Structure is
provided for guidance.
(b) Additional H Poles required for Pole Mounting Sub-Station under the
existing 11 KV feeders are to be taken care of by the Bidder as per the
requirement of Operation Organization.
1.4.3 The bidder should note that the Employer will not furnish the topographical
map prepared by survey of India but will make available any assistance that
may be required for obtaining topographical map.
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 6
1.4.4 Route Marking :
At the starting point of the commencement of route survey the peg marking
shall be done with iron spikes, driven firmly into the ground. A Benchmark
on top section of the angle iron shall be made to indicate the location of the
survey instrument. Teakwood peg shall be driven at prominent Position at
intervals of not more than 750 meters along the Power line to be surveyed up
to the next angle point. At angle position stone / concrete pillar with DHBVN
marked on it shall be put firmly on the ground for easy identification.
1.4.5 Pole Locations :
With the help of pole spotting data, pole locations shall be marked on the
profiles prepared to check the required ground clearances. While locating the
poles on the profile sheets the following shall be borne in the mind.
a) Extension:
An individual span shall be as near to the normal design span as possible. In
case an individual span becomes too short or long with normal supports on
account of ground profile, one or both supports of the spans may be extended
with standard design or provision of a special structure for the purpose
according to technical specifications. The design of such extension shall be
prepared & supplied by the Contractor and shall be got approved from the
Employer.
b) Road Crossings :
At all the important road crossings, the protective cradle guarding will be
provided and poles shall be fitted with normal tension insulators strings
depending upon the location but the ground clearing at the roads at the
maximum temperature and in the still air shall be such that even with the
conductor broken at adjacent span, the ground clearance of the conductor from
the road surface will not be less than 5.125 meter. For road and lines
crossings 11 meter PCC poles (400 Kg.) shall be provided to achieve required
clearances. H pole structure on 11 meter PCC poles for road crossings and
single 11 meter PCC poles for line crossing shall be provided.
c) Railway Crossings :
The Contractor will make preliminary survey to assess the requirement of
Railway Crossing and take the same into account in his Bid. The work of
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 7
Railway Crossings will be got executed by him as a deposit work with the
Railways or otherwise as per rules of Railway Department. The Employer
will arrange to get the approval from Railway Authorities expedited. The case
for approval will be submitted by the Contractor on the behalf of the Employer
well in time.
d) Power Line Crossings :
Wherever the line is to cross over / below the other line of the same voltage or
higher or low voltage the requisite clearances will be ensured in accordance
with the Indian Electricity Rules. The Contractor shall submit and get
approved from the Employer any special design where required in order to
achieve such clearances.
e) River Crossing:
The route of 11 KV New / Augmented line/LT line if routed through a river
bed / mullah or rivulet must have concrete foundation for erection of poles and
must be supported by a good number of stay-supports capable to withstand
water / wind pressure and must be executed to the entire satisfaction of the
Engineer.
f) In case the 11 KV U/G cable is to be laid along the Municipal Road / High
way, the Contractor will make preliminary survey to assess such requirement
and take into account in his Bid. The employer will arrange to get the
approval from the Civic Authorities. However, the case for approval will be
submitted by the Contractor on behalf of the employer well in time.
1.4.6 Clearance from Ground, Building, Trees etc.:
Clearance from Ground, Building, Trees and Telephone lines shall be
provided in conformity with the Indian Electricity Rules 1956.
1.4.7 The tree cutting shall be the responsibility of the Contractor at the time of
survey as well as during actual execution. However, the Contractor shall
count, mark and put proper Nos. with suitable quality of paint at his own cost
on all the trees that are to be cut by him at the time of actual execution of
work. Contractor may please be note that the Employer shall not pay any
compensation for any loss or damage to the properties or for tree cutting
necessitated due to Contractor’s work.
1.4.8 Any way leave which may be required by the Contractor shall be arranged by
the Employer.
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 8
1.4.9 To evaluate and tabulate the trees and bushes coming 6.096m on either side of
the central alignment of the support, the trees will be numbered and marked
with quality paint serially from angle point 1 onwards and corresponding
number will be painted on the stem of trees at a height of 1m from ground
level. The trees list should contain the following information:
a) Girth (circumference) measured at a height of 1 m from ground level.
b) Approximate height of the tree with an accuracy of +/- 2 mtrs.
c) Name of the type of the species / tree.
1.4.10 The profile sheets duly spotted along with preliminary schedule indicating
position of poles, wind span, weight span, angle of deviation, river or road
crossings and other details shall be submitted for the approval of the
Employer. After approval the, Contractor shall submit six more sets of
approved reports along with one set of reproducible final profile drawings to
the Employer for record purpose.
1.5 Environmental Conditions :
1.6.1 General Climatic Conditions :
The area is in extreme climatic belt. Monsoons are generally active in the area
from the month of July to September. The area is also prone to mild dust
storms during the months of March to May. The maximum temperature shall
be of the order of 50°C and minimum temperature shall be of the order of -
2°C. Normal every day temperature is 32°C.
1.7 Technical Data:
The bidder shall furnish all technical data as per relevant schedules in five
copies.
1.8 Statutory Regulations and Standards :
1.8.1 Statutory Regulations:
The Contractor is required to follow Statutory Regulations stipulated in
Electricity Act 1948 and Indian Electricity Rules 1956 as amended to-date and
other local rules and regulations referred to in this specification.
1.8.2 Reference Standards :
The work shall be carried out in accordance with specifications & construction
standards attached hereto or available with the P&D wing of
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 9
DHBVN/Nigam’s Website. The codes or standards referred to in this
specification shall govern in all cases wherever such references are made. In
case of conflict between such codes or standards and specification, latter shall
govern. Such codes or standards referred to shall mean the latest revision,
amendments / changes adopted and published by relevant agencies. Other
internationally accepted standards, which ensure equivalent or better
performance than those specified shall also be accepted. All tested steel
sections shall be supplied conforming to relevant Indian Standard
Specifications.
1.9 Quality Assurance, Inspection and Testing :
1.9.1 Quality Assurance :
The Contractor shall adopt suitable quality assurance programme to control
each activity. Such programme shall be outlined by the Contractor and shall
be finally accepted by the Employer.
1.9.2 Quality Assurance Document :
The Contractor shall be required to sub it all quality assurance documents as
stipulated in quality plan at the time of Employer’s inspection of material.
The Employer through his duly authorized representative reserves the right to
carry out quality inspection / audit & checks to see the adequacy of the
Contractor’s quality management programme.
1.9.3 Inspection and Testing :
The Employer shall inspect the major material i.e. Poles, Conductors, Earth
wire, Insulators, Pins, Hardware fittings at the works of supplier before
dispatch. The requisite original type test certificates wherever required will be
submitted by the Contractor / Supplier at the time of inspection for verification
/ examination by the Inspector. The material shall not be dispatched without
dispatch authorization by the Employer. Other material shall be inspected by
the Employer before erection at site. The Employer shall have the right to re-
inspect at his expenses any material through previously inspection and
approved by him at the Contractor’s / Supplier’s works, before / after the same
are erected at the site. If following the latter, the material is found defective,
then the Contractor shall bear the cost of this inspection and re-instatement
according to specifications. The Employer shall get the material inspected
from his Engineers or from any other inspection agency at its discretion.
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 10
2.0 Technical Parameters of 11 KV Line : Electrical System Data :
a) Nominal Voltage 11 KV
b) Maximum system voltage 12 KV
c) NIL (Impulse) 75 KV (Peak)
d) Power frequency withstand voltage 28 KV
3. Details of line material for 11 KV Line: 3.1 Particulars of Conductor: Sr. No.
Particulars Conductor
1 Type ACSR 50 mm2 2 Standing and wire diameter in mm 6/3.35(AI)
1/1.35(Steel)6/4.09(AI) 1/ 4.09 (steel)
3 Approximate Mass Kg. Per KM. 214/319 4 Approximate calculated breaking load KN 18.25/26.91 5 Calculated DC resistance at 20o 0.5560 Ohm/0.3736 Ohm C 6 Mass of Zine coating 190 gm.m2 7 Configuration of Conductor Triangular 3.2 Particular of Polymeric Insulator / Disc Insulators: Sr.No. Particulars I-Pole Str. II-Pole Str. 4-Pole Str. 1 No. of Disc Insulators - - - 2 E&M Strength of each Disc
Insulator KN 45 45 45
3 11 KV Polymeric Insulator 3 6 9 3.3 Material for Single / H-Pole/4 Pole Structure 1 PCC Pole 9 Mtr. 1 No. 2 No. 4 No. 2 FRP Cross Arm 1 No. - - 3 M.S.Channel X-Arm (100x50x6-
2200mm) - 1 No. 5 Nos.
4 Pole Top Bracket 1 No. - - 5 Back Clamps 1 No. As required As required 6 11 KV Polymeric Insulator 3 Nos. 6 Nos. 9 Nos. 7 11 KV Disc Insulators - 6 Nos. 6 Nos. 8 Guy Sets with stay wire As required 4 Nos. 8 Nos. 9 Earthing material as per design As required As required As required 10 Nuts & Bolts, Pole Clamps As per design As per design As per design 11 MS Flat, 50x50x6mm, 2200mm for
4-Pole &1400mm for H-Pole - 2 Nos. -
12 MS Bracing 50x50x6mm, 3230mm for 4-Pole &2860mm for H-Pole
- 2 Nos. 8 Nos.
13 Tension fittings suitable for 30 - 6 Nos. 8 Nos.
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 11
sq.mm conductor 14 C-type wedge connector for 50
sq.mm conductor - 6 Nos. 6 Nos.
15 Eye Screw bolts for earth wire 6 Nos 16 M.S.Angle 50x50x6mm (2400mm)
for earth wire. - - 4 Nos.
17 Danger Plate - - 2 Nos. 18 Number Plate 1 No. 1 No. 1 No. 3.4 Tentative Bill of material for each Package is as per Annexure/Schedule of
Prices.
3.5 Meteorological Data is as per Annexure-II.
4. Bolts , Nuts &Washers :
4.1 All Bolts and Nuts shall conform to IS:1363-1967 (amended to-date) or
equivalent to IES Standard. All Bolts and Nuts shall have Hexagonal head
Nuts, the heads being forged out of the solid steel rods and shall be truly pen
centric and square with the shank, which must be perfectly straight. Small
Nuts & Bolts both shall be fully threaded whereas long bolts shall be partially
threaded.
4.2 Steel Items : All steel items shall be conform to IS:2062 Grade-A (amended
to date) or equivalent to IEC Standard.
5. Spares and Clearances:
5.1 Normal Span :
The normal running span of the line shall be approx. 60 Mtrs. For 11 KV Line
with ACSR and 40 Mtrs. With AB Cable and 60 Mtr. of LT line in the Cross
Country.
5.2 Wind Span :
The wind Span is the sum of two half spans adjacent to the support under
consideration. For normal horizontal spans this equals to normal running
span.
5.3 Electrical Clearances:
5.3.1 Ground Clearances:
The minimum ground clearances from the bottom conductor shall not be less
than 5.125 meter at the maximum sag conditions i.e. at maximum
temperature and still air.
Any LT/HT/Telecommunication line falling around of new 11 KV line should
have enough clearances as prescribed in I.E. rules applicable in this respect.
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 12
5.3.2 For river crossing, the minimum electrical clearance including ground
clearance will be the same as for normal poles.
5.4 Conductor and Earth Wire Configuration:
The three phases shall be in triangular formation. The phase to phase spacing
shall not be less than 1.070 Mtr.
6. Drawings:
6.1 The design and drawings submitted by the Contractor shall be
approved/commented by the Employer as the case may be within 20 days of
receipt of design/drawings in the office of the Engineer. If the
design/drawings are commented by the Employer, the Contractor shall submit
revised design/drawings within 15 days of date of issue of comments. The
drawing will also be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer who will
take further necessary action to approve the same or get it approved from the
competent authority.
6.2 The Contractor is required to furnish the progress of submissions and
approvals of design and drawings on 25th day of every month till the
completion of all the design activities.
7. Excavation & Erection of Poles:
7.1 The Pits for the Poles are to be excavated in the direction of the line, as this
will facilitate the erection of pole and given internal stability. The depth of the
foundations to be excavated for the poles shall be approximately 1/6th
7.2 H Poles are to be erected on almost 10
of the
Pole’s length. The alignment of the Poles are to be set right and the earth-
filling will be done after checking the alignment vertically and earth will be
rammed afterwards properly. th location when the line is going
straight and it is also to be provided wherever there is an angle of deviation in
the line. When the angle of deviation is >60°C, 4 pole structures will be
provided. In case of angle H-Pole, the pits are to be excavated along the bi-
section of the angle of deviation. It will be ensured that the poles are held in
vertical position and earth is filled in the pits and proper ramming is done so
that pole remains in proper position. On every H-Pole, 4 stays are to be
provided along the line i.e. 2 on each direction and in addition two more stays
along the bi-section of the angle of deviation are to be provided as required
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 13
depending upon the site conditions as per the drawings attached with the
specifications.
7.3 The stays will be provided at all dead end locations, angle locations and T-Off
points and also on normal locations as wind stays to counter the pressure of
the winds. Normally every fourth pole of the line shall be provided with two
wind stays one on either side of the pole. The angle of the stays will be
generally kept on 30 to 45 degrees depending upon the tension and the
location of the line. Every stay shall be provided with 11 KV Disc Insulators
as per drawing.
7.4 Earthing shall be provided on every 4th
7.5 Number plate shall be provided on each location indicating the No. of
Structure S1, S2 etc. 2 pole and 4 pole structures will be numbered both for
structure Nos. as well as H-Pole /4-pole marking. For example if Ist H-pole
appear at Structure No. 10, plate will be denoted as S-10/H-1. Similarly, if Ist
4-pole appear at structure No. 25, the same will be denoted by S-25/4P-1 & so
on.
pole as per the design attached hereto
in addition to the continuous Earth Wire. H-pole structures will be provided
with 2 No. earthings.
7.6 All unpainted /Un-galvanized iron sections like Channel, Angle/Clamps Stay
sets etc. shall be given 2 coating of Red Oxide before installation to prevent
rusting. To avoid rusting anti-corrosion aluminium paint shall also be
provided.
7.7 One set of 11 KV lightning arrestor shall be provided within 3 KM area. 11
KV G.O. Switch shall be provided on the terminal structure near the grid
S/Station & at the interconnection point with existing feeder to facilitate the
complete isolation of the line.
8. Handling of Conductor and Earth Wire:
8.1 The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for any damage to the poles,
insulators and conductors during transportation & stringing. While running
out the conductors, care shall be taken that the conductors do not touch or rub
against the ground or objects, which could cause scratches or damages to the
strands. The conductors shall be run out of the drums from the top in order to
avoid damage due to chaffing.
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 14
8.2 The stringing blocks shall be suspended in a manner to suit the design of the X
arms. Proper T&P shall also be made available to the Employer by the
Contractor for checking the tensions in the guy wires. The drums shall be
provided with a suitable braking device to avoid damages, loose running out
and kinking of the conductor. The conductor shall be continuously observed
for loose or broken strands or any other damage. When approaching end of a
drum length atleast three coils shall be left when the stringing operations are to
be stopped. These coils are to be removed carefully and if another length is
required to be run, a joint shall be made as per the recommendations of the
manufacturers.
8.3 Repairs to Conductors if necessary shall be carried out during the running out
operations with repair sleeves. Repairing of Conductors surface shall be done
only in case of minor damage scuff marks etc. keeping in view both electrical
and mechanical safe requirements. The final conductors shall be cleaned
smooth and without any projections, sharp points cuts, abrasions.
8.4 Conductors Splices shall be made so that they do not crack or get damaged in
the stringing operations. The Contractor shall use only such
equipment/methods during Conductor stringing which ensures complete
compliance in this regard.
8.5 Derricks shall be used where roads, rivers, channels, telecommunications or
overhead power line, railway lines, fences or walls have to be crossed during
stringing operations. It shall be seen that normal services are not interrupted
or damage caused to property. Shut down shall be obtained when working at
crossing of overhead power lines as per para 8.8. Contractor shall be
responsible for proper handling of the Conductor. Earth wire and accessories
in the field.
8.6 The sequence of stringing of Conductors/Earth wire shall be from top to
downwards i.e. conductors will be run out in succession & earth wire will be
strung in the last.
8.7 The proposed 11 KV power lines may run parallel for certain distance with the
existing power lines, which may remain energized during the stringing period.
As a result there is a possibility of dangerous voltage build up due to
electromagnetic and electrostatic coupling in the pulling wire, conductors and
earth wires which although comparatively small during normal operations can
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 15
be severe during switching. It shall be Contractor’s responsibility to take
adequate safely precautions to protect his employees and others from this
potential danger.
8.8 The Contractor shall inform the Engineer whenever he wants to avail the
‘Permit to Work’ from the local sub-division for erecting the new 11 KV line
or augmenting the existing 11 KV line. A minimum 48 hours advance notice
in writing for availing the shutdown on any live 11 KV feeder/LT lines shall
be given to the Engineer. The 11 KV LT line on which permit is takenshould
be made clear from all the temporary earth, men and material before
cancellation of the ‘Permit to Work’. It is worth mentioning here that the
‘Permit to Work’ on existing line shall be arranged through the Engineer or his
representative and the same shall also be got cancelled through the same
agency only./ No ‘Permit to Work’ shall be issued on any line directly to
Contractor or his staff from any 33 KV or 66 KV Sub-Station.
9. Stringing of Conductor & Earth Wire:
9.1 The stringing of conductor shall be done by standard stringing method.
9.1.1 After being pulled the Conductor/Earth wire shall not be allowed to hang in
the stringing blocks for more than 6 hours before being pulled to the specified
sag.
9.1.1.1 Conductors creep in respect of ACSR 50 mm2 Conductors are to be
compensated by over tensioning the conductor at a temperature of 21°C or
lower during stringing.
9.1.2 The bidder shall give complete details of the stringing method, which he
proposes to follow. Before the commencement of stringing the Contractor
shall submit the stringing charts for the Conductor and Earth wire for various
temperatures and spans along with equivalent spans to the Engineer for the
approval of the Employer.
9.2 Sagging in Operation:
9.2.1 The Conductor shall be pulled up to the desired sag and left in running blocks
for atleast one hours after which the sag shall be re-checked and adjusted if
necessary before transferring the Conductor from the running blocks to the
polymeric insulators. The conductor shall be clamped within 36 hours of
sagging.
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 16
9.2.2 The sag will be checked in the first and the last span of the section in case of
sections upto 8 spans and in one intermediate span also for sections with more
than eight Spans. The sag shall also be checked when the Conductor have
been drawn up and transferred from running clocks to the insulators.
9.2.3 The running blocks when suspended from the structures for sagging shall be
so adjusted that the Conductors on running blocks will be on the same height
as a 11 KV Insulators to which it is to be secured.
At sharp vertical angle, the sag and tensions shall be checked on both sides of
the angle, the conductor wire shall be checked from the running blocks for
equality of tension on both sides.
9.2.4 Tensioning and sagging operations shall be carried out in calm weather when
rapid changes in temperature are not likely to occur.
9.3 Tensioning and Sagging of Conductor and Earth Wire:
The Tensioning and Sagging Operations shall be done in accordance with the
approved stringing chart before the Conductor and Earth wire are finally
attached to the poles through the earth wire clamps and insulators for the
Conductor. The relevant stringing charts for the Conductor and earth wire
should be employed for this purpose.
9.4 Final Checking, Testing and Commissioning:
After completion of the works, final checking of the line and equipment shall
be carried out by the Contractor to ensure that all the foundation works, pole
erection and stringing has been done according to the specifications and as
approved by the Employer. All the works shall be thoroughly inspected
keeping in view the following main points:
a) All the structures are straight & erect and in proper alignment. Sufficient
back filed earth is lying over each pit and it is adequately rammed /
compacted.
b) All bolts are properly tightened and punched / tack welded.
c) The stringing of the Conductors and Earth Wire has been done as per the
approved sag and tension charts and desired clearances are clearly
available.
d) All Conductors and Earth wire accessories are properly installed & fixed.
e) All other requirements to complete the work like fixing of danger plate,
phase plate, number plate, barbed wire etc. are properly installed.
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 17
f) The insulation of line as a whole is tested by the Contractor by providing
his own equipment, labour etc. to the satisfaction of the Employer.
g) The line is tested satisfactorily for commissioning purpose.
h) Earth resistance of every earth wire & P/M S/Stn. will be measured and
result shall be supplied and same will also be checked by the Engineer or
his representative.
10. General Technical Conditions :
10.1 The above provisions shall supplement all the detailed technical specifications
and requirements brought out herein. The Contractor’s proposal shall be
based on the use of materials complying fully with the requirements specified
herein.
10.2 Engineering Data:
10.2.1 The furnishing of engineering data by the Contractor shall be in accordance
with the schedule as specified in the technical specifications. The review of
these data by the Employer will cover only general conformance of the data to
the specifications and not a thorough review of all dimensions quantities and
details of the materials or items indicated or the accuracy of the information
submitted. The review of the Employer shall not be considered by the
Contractor as limiting any of his responsibilities and liabilities for mistakes
and deviations from the requirements specified under these specifications.
10.2.2 All engineering data submitted by the Contractor after review by the Employer
shall form part of contract document.
If errors are discovered any time during the validity of the contract then the
Contractor shall be responsible for their consequences.
10.2.3 The quantities worked out here are only tentative. The Contractor shall work
out actual requirement and get it approved from the Engineer-in-Charge. The
payment shall be made on actual basis.
I) In case of availability of space, in the Control Room, for the
installation of only one 11 KV breaker panel & more than one
feeder are to be emanated from the concerned sub-station, the 11
KV breaker panel incoming type shall be installed which shall cater
to the requirement of one or more than one outdoor type VCBs
(kiosk). The 11 KV HT supply shall be extended through 11 KV
underground cable.
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 18
II) A- Back Filling of Pits
a) All the locations, (with following exceptions), the pits after
erection of poles shall be back filled with excavated or borrowed
earth in layers taking care to ram the earth in one layer at a time to
the satisfaction of site-in-charge.
:
b) For all the failure containment structures, described earlier &
repeated below, the pits shall be hack filled with excavated /
borrowed earth and broken bricks (Jhama) back properly rammed
to the satisfaction of site-in-charge.
i) At some the tapping points & dead end poles
ii) At all the points where DT is to be installed.
iii) At all the points as per REC construction dwg. No. A-10 (
for the diversion angle of 10-60 degree).
iv) At the distance of 1 km max. from the last Jhama filled
pole structure.
v) Both side poles at all the crossing for main road, nallaha
railway crossings etc.
vi) Al DP structures.
Tapping points & roads where the failure containment
structures is to be erected shall be decided during detailed
engineering.
c) The cost of backfilling including all material /borrowed
earth/Jhama etc. is deemed to be included in the quoted price.
The above clauses shall be read in conjunction with
clause given below:
B- Foundation & Pole Erection
a) The foundation of poles shall be of the following types:-
:
i) Foundation back-filled and rammed with excavated soil and
brick batting for 200 Kg. PCC Poles.
ii) Foundation back-filled and rammed with excavated/borrowed
soil.
b) The Type of foundation for individual poles shall be decided
during detailed engineering. The bidder shall quote their rates
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 19
as per the quantity of both types of foundations indicated in the
BPS. The pole erection rate shall include excavation in all
types of soil/rock, back-filling of the foundation pole as
specified, cost of all materials, labour etc.
c) Foundation back-filled and rammed with excavated soil and
brick-batting for 200 Kg, PSC poles - The foundation pit of the
pole should be of size 600 mm x 500 mm x depth. The base of
the foundation shall be either of PCC (1:2:4) of size 400 x 400
x 70 mm or a stone plate of size 400 x 400 x 35 mm duly back-
filled as explained in clause above.
d) Foundation back-filled and rammed with excavated / borrowed
soil and brick batting for 200 Kg. PSC Poles. The foundation
pit of the pole should be of size 600 mm x 400 x depth. The
base of the foundation shall be either of PCC (1:2:4) of size 400
x 400 x 70 mm or a stone plate of size 400 x 400 x 35 mm,
duly back-filled as explained in clause above.
e) It is envisaged that 11 KV line may be traversing marshy & low
laying area for which special type of foundation shall be
required. In such a case, difference in excavation quantity,
concreting & reinforcement between special foundation and
normal foundation shall be part of the package.
f) Erection of Poles: The poles are to be erected in alignment
with utmost care. The poles shall then be lifted to the pit with
the help of wooden supports. The pole shall then be kept in the
vertical position with the help of 25 mm (min.) manila ropes
which shall act as the temporary anchor. The verticality of the
pole shall be checked by spirit level in both longitudinal &
transverse directions. Once, this is done, the back filling /
concreting shall be done in the pit. The temporary anchor shall
be removed only when poles set properly in the foundation.
C- Erection of Stay Sets:
The Contractor shall install the stay set complete in all respect. This
includes excavation of pit size 0.5 m x 0.5 m x 1.6 m in all kinds of
soil including laterite/hard rocks. Stay plate and rod (leaving the top
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 20
10 cm) shall be embedded in the pit with PCC in the ratio 1:2:4 (the
volume of PCC shall be 0.5 m x 0.5 m x 0.8 m ). The rest (upper half)
of the pit shall be filled with excavated soil duly compacted layer by
layer. An angle between 30 to 45 degrees shall be maintained between
stay wire and the pole. The stay wire shall be used with a stay
insulator at a height of 5 m above ground level with G.I. turn buckle.
Stay set shall be grouted as per drawing No. PGCIL/RE/Stay-Set.
Cl 11.0: 1. For the Drawings/GTPs/Standards which are not included in the above tender
documents, latest REC standards are to be followed.
2. The technical specifications as given in the tender documents are covering a
range of items, in that case only the material as per the schedule of prices is to be
considered
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 21
SECTION VII- B
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 22
SECTION – VII-B 1. Drawings: 1.1 All drawings submitted by the Contractor including those submitted at the
time of Bid shall be with sufficient detail to indicate the type, size, arrangement, dimensions, material description, Bill of materials, weight of each component, break-u[p for packing and transportation, fixing arrangement required, the dimensions required for installation and any other information specifically requested in these specifications.
1.2 Each drawing submitted by the Contractor shall be clearly marked with the name of the Employer, the specification title, the specification number and the name of the project. All titles, notings, markings and writings on the drawing shall be in English. All the dimensions should be to the scale and in metric units.
1.3 The Contractor shall submit the necessary detailed route plan or other necessary construction drawings for approval to the Employer within 20 days of Letter of Intent.
1.4 The route plan drawings submitted by the Contractor shall be examined by the Employer as far as practicable within 20 days and shall be modified by the Contractor, if any modifications and/or corrections are required by the Employer. The Contractor shall incorporate such modifications and/or corrections and submit the final drawings for approval. Any delays arising out of failure by the Contractor to rectify the drawings in good time shall not alter the contract completion date.
1.5 The drawings submitted for approval to the Employer shall be in quadruplicate. One print of suet drawings shall be returned to the Contractor by the Employer marked “approved/approved with corrections “. The Contractor shall thereupon furnish the Employer additional prints as may be required along with one reproducible in original of the drawings after incorporating all corrections.
1.6 The work shall be performed by the Contractor strictly in accordance with these drawings and no deviation shall be permitted without the approval of the Employer, if so required.
1.7 All manufacturing, fabrication and erection work under the Scope of Contractor, prior to the approval of the drawings shall be at the Contractor’s risk. The Contractor may make any changes in the design which are necessary to conform to the provisions and intent of the Contract and such changes will again be subject to the approval by the Employer.
1.8 The approval of the documents and drawings by the Employer shall mean that the Employer is satisfied that:
a) The Contractor has completed the part of the Works covered be the subject document (i.e., confirmation of progress of work).
b) The work appears to comply with requirements of specifications.
In no case the approval by the Employer of any document does imply compliance with all technical requirements, nor the absence of errors in such documents.
1.9 The following is the general list of the documents and drawings that are to be approved by the employer:
a) Work Schedule (Master Network) Plan.
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 23
b) Sag tensions calculation and sag template curve drawing. c) Pole spotting data.
d) Detailed survey report and profile drawings showing ground clearance and pole locations.
e) Pole earthing Drawing. f) Pole accessories drawings like danger plate, number plate,
phase plates etc. g) Pert Chart.
1.10 Design Improvements : 1.10.1 The Employer or the Contractor may propose changes in the
specification and if the parties agree upon any such changes and the cost implication, the specification shall be modified accordingly.
1.10.2 If any such agreement affects the price and schedule of completion, the parties shall agree in writing as to the extent of any change in the price and schedule of completion before the Contractor proceeds with the change. Following such agreement, the provision thereof, shall be deemed to have been amended accordingly.
1.11 Design Co-ordination. The contractor shall be responsible for the selection and design of
appropriate material/item to provide the best co-ordinated performance of the entire system. The basic design requirements are detailed out in this specification. The design of various components, sub-assembly and assemblies shall be so done that it facilitates easy field assembly and maintenance.
1.12 Design Review Meetings The contractor will be called upon to attend design review meetings
with the Employer and the consultants of the Employer during the period of contract. The Contractor shall attend such meetings at his own cost at Hisar or at mutually agreed venue as and when required. Such review meeting shall be held as & when required.
2. Packing
All the material shall be suitably protected, coated, covered of boxed and created to prevent or deterioration during transit, handling & storage at site till the time of erection. The Contractor shall be responsible for any loss or damage during transportation, handling and storage due to improper packing. The contractor shall include and provide for securely protecting and packing the materials so as to avoid loss or damage during transport during transport by air, sea, rail and road. All packing shall allow for easy removal and checking at site. Wherever necessary, proper arrangement for attaching slings for lifting shall be provided. All packages shall be clearly marked for with sign showing ‘up’ & ‘down’ on.
3. Progress Report
Appropriate visual charts shall accompany the monthly progress report detailed out the progress achieved on all erection activities as compared to the schedules. The report shall also indicate the reasons
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 24
for variance between the scheduled and actual progress and the action proposed for corrective measures wherever necessary.
4. Manpower Deployment Report The Contractor shall submit to the employer on the first day of every month a manpower deployment schedule for each activity. The Contractor shall also submit to the employer on the first day of every month a manpower deployment report of the previous month detailing the No. of persons scheduled to have been employed and actually employed. Tools, Tackle and Scaffolding
The Contractor shall provide all the construction equipment, tools, tackle and scaffoldings required for construction, erection and commissioning of the power line covered under the contract. He shall submit a list of all such material of the employer before the commencement of work at site. These tools and tackle shall not be removed from the site without the written permission of the Employer.
First Aid and General Hygiene
The Contractor shall provide necessary first aid & reasonable Hygiene facilities for all his employees, representatives and workmen working at the site Enough number of Contractor’s personnel shall be trained in administering the first aid.
Security
The Contractor shall have total responsibility for all requirement and materials in his custody, stored, loose, semi-assembled and or erected by him at site. The Contractor shall make suitable security arrangements including employment of security personnel to ensure the protection of all materials, equipment and works from theft, pilferage and any other damages and loss.
Materials Handling and Storage: All the supplies under the Contract as well as arriving at Site shall be promptly received, unloaded and transported and stored in the stores by the Contraction. Contractor shall be responsible for examining all the shipment and notify the employer immediately of any damage, shortage, discrepancy etc for the purpose of Employer’s information only. The Contactor shall submit to the Employer every week a report detailing all the receipts during the week. However, the Contactor shall be solely responsible for any shortage or damages in transit, handling and/ or in storage and erection at Site. The Contractor shall maintain an accurate and exhaustive record detailing out the list of all items received by him for the purpose of erection and keep such record open for the inspection of the Employer.
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 25
Each package shall be legibly marked by the Contractor/ Supplier at his expenses showing the details such as description and quantity of contents, the name of the consignee and address, the gross and net weight of the package, the name of the Contractor etc.
5. Erection Conditions The following shall supplement the conditions already contained in the other parts of these specifications and documents and shall govern that portion of the work on this Contract to be performed at site. Regulation of local Authorities and Statutes The Contractor shall comply with all the rules and regulations of local authorities during the performance of his field activities. He shall also comply with the Minimum Wages Act, 1948 and the payment of Wages Act (both of the Govt. of India) and the rules made there under in respect of any employee or workman employed or engaged by him or his Sub-Contractor. All registration and statutory inspection fees, if any, in respect of his work pursuant to this Contract shall be to the account of the Contractor. However, any registration, statutory inspection fees lawfully payable under the provisions of the statutory law and its amendments from time to time during erection in respect of the 11 KV line, ultimately to be owned by the Employer, shall be to the account of the Employer. Should any such inspection or registration need to be re-arranged due to the fault of the Contractor or his Sub-Contractor, the additional fees to such inspection and /or registration shall be borne by the Contractor. Contractor’s Field Operation. The Contractor shall keep the Employer informed in advance regarding his field activity plans and schedules for carrying-out each part of the works. Any review of such plan or schedule or method of work by the Employer shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his responsibilities towards the field activities. Such reviews shall also not be considered as an assumption of any risk by the Employer or any of his representatives and no claim of the Contractor will be entertained because of the failure or inefficiency of any such plan or schedule or method of work reviewed. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the safety, adequacy and efficiency of tools and plants and his erection methods. All the materials stored in the open or dusty location must be covered with suitable weather-proof and flameproof covering material as applicable. The Contractor shall be responsible for making suitable indoor storage facilities at various locations to store all items /materials which require indoor storage.
6. Construction Management
Time is the essence of the Contract and the Contractor shall be responsible for performance of his works in accordance with the specified construction schedule. If at any time, the Contractor is falling behind the schedule for reasons attributable to him, he shall take necessary action to make good for such delays by increasing his work force or by working overtime or otherwise to
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 26
accelerate the progress of the work and to comply with schedule and shall communicate such actions in writing to the Employer, satisfying that his action will compensate for the delay. The Contractor shall not be allowed any extra compensation for such action.
7. Field Office Records
The Contractor shall set up his site offices at different locations
to facilitate smooth working. The site offices shall be manned by
his supervisors/ other staff. The Contractor shall maintain at his
Site office up-to-date copies of all drawings, specifications and
other supplementary data complete with all the latest revisions
thereto. The Contractor shall also maintain, in addition, the
continuous record of all changes to the above Contract
Documents, drawings, specifications, supplementary data etc.
effected in the field and on completion of his total assignment
under the Contract shall incorporate data to indicate as installed
conditions of the material supplied and erected under the
contract. Such drawings and engineering data shall be
submitted to the Employer in required number of copies.
8. Protection of Property and Contractor’s Liability: The Contractor will ensure provision of necessary safety equipment
such as barriers, sign-boards, warning lights and alarms etc. to provide
adequate protection to persons and property. The Contractor shall be
responsible to give reasonable notice to the Employers and the
Owners of public or private property and utilities when such property
and utilities are likely to get damaged or injured during the performance
of his works and shall make all necessary arrangements with such
owners, related to removal and/or replacement or protection of such
property and utilities.
9. Insurance: The Contractor shall arrange & keep alive all the required insurance
covers for his Employees/third parties as under:-
9.1 Workmen’s Compensation Insurance:
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 27
This insurance shall protect the Contractor against all claims applicable
under the Workmen’s Compensation Act, 1948 (Government of India).
This policy shall also cover the Contractor against claims for injury,
disability disease or death of his or his Sub-Contractor’s employees,
which for any reason are not covered under the Workmen’s
employees, which for any reason are not covered under the workmen’s
Compensation Act, 1948. The liabilities shall not be less than:
Workmen’s Compensation As per statutory Provisions
Employee’s Liability As per statutory Provisions
9.2 Comprehensive Automobile Insurance
This insurance shall be in such a form to protect the Contractor
against all claims for injuries, disability, disease and death to members
of public including the Employer’s men and damage to the property of
others arising from the use of motor vehicles during on or off the site
operations, irrespective of the ownership of such vehicles. The
minimum liability covered shall be as herein indicated:
Fatal Injury : Rs. 100,000 each person
: Rs. 200,000 each occurrence
Property Damage : Rs. 100,000 each occurrence
In case the employer is made to pay such compensation, the
Contractor will be liable to reimburse the Employer such amount even
in addition to the compensation indicated above.
9.3 Comprehensive General Liability Insurance
9.3.1 The insurance shall protect the Contractor against all claims arising
from injuries, disabilities, disease or death of members of public or
damage to property of others, due to any act or omission on the part of
the Contractor, its agents, its employees, its representatives and Sub-
Contractors or from riots, strikes and civil commotion.
9.3.2 The above are only illustrative list of insurance covers normally
required and it will be the responsibility of the Contractor to maintain all
necessary insurance coverage to the extent both in time and amount to
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 28
take care of all its liabilities either direct of indirect, in pursuance of the
Contact.
10. Protection of Measurements and Reference Points:
The Contractor shall ensure that any finds such as relics, antiques,
coins, fossils, etc. which he may come across during the course of
performance of his works either during excavation or elsewhere, are
properly protect3ed and handed over to the Employees. Similarly, the
Contractor shall ensure that the bench marks, reference points etc.
which are marked either with the help of Employer shall or by the
Employer shall not be disturbed in any way during the performance of
its works. If, any work , is to be performed which disturbs such
reference, the same shall be done only after these are transferred to
other suitable locations under the direction of the Employer. The
Contractor shall provide all necessary materials and assistance to such
relocation of reference points etc.
11. Work and Safety Regulations:
11.1 The Contractor shall ensure safety of all the workmen, materials plant
and equipment belonging to him or to the others, working at the Site.
The Contractor shall also provide for all safety notices and safety
equipment required by the relevant legislations and deemed necessary
by the Employer.
11.2 The Contractor will notify, well in advance to the Employer, its intention
to bring to the site any Container filled with liquid or gaseous fuel or
explosive or petroleum substance or such chemicals which may involve
hazards. The employer shall have the right to prescribe the conditions,
under which such a container is to be stored, handled and used during
the performance of the works and the Contractor shall strictly adhere to
and comply with such instructions. The Employer shall also have the
right, at his sole discretion, to inspect any such container or such
construction plant/equipment for which materials in the container is
required to be used and dif in his opinion, its use is not safe, he may
forbid its use.
No Claim due to such prohibition or towards additional safety
provisions called for by him shall be entertained by the Employer.
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 29
Further, any such decision of the Employer shall not, in any way, absolve the
Contractor of his responsibilities under the Laws of land and in case use of
such a Container or entry there of into the Site area is forbidden by the
Employer, the Contractor shall use alternative methods with the approval of
the Employer without any cost implication to the Employer or extension of
work schedule.
11.3 Where it is necessary to provide and/or store petroleum products or
petroleum mixtures and explosives, the Contractor shall be responsible
for carrying out such provision and/or storage in accordance with the
rules and regulations laid down in Petroleum Act, 1934, Explosives Act,
1948 or any other statuary acts in regard there of and amendments
thereof, and petroleum and carbide of Calcium Manual published by
the Chief Inspector of Explosives of India. All such storage shall have
prior approval of the Employer. In case, any approval is necessary
from the Chief Inspector (Explosives) or any statutory authorities, the
Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the same.
11.4 All equipment used in construction and erection by Contractor shall
meet Indian/International Standards land where such standards do not
exist, the Contractor shall ensure these too be absolutely safe. All
equipment shall be strictly operated and maintained by the Contractor
in accordance with manufacturer’s operation manual and safety
instructions and as per any existing Guidelines/rules in this regard.
11.5 Periodical examinations and all tests for all lifting/hoisting equipment
and tackle shall be carried-out in accordance with the relevant
provisions of Factories Act 1948. Indian Electricity Supply Act and
associated Laws/Rules in force from time to time. A register of such
examinations and tests shall be properly maintained by the Contractor
and will be promptly produced as land when desired by Employer or by
the persons authorized by him.
11.6 The Contractor shall provide suitable safety equipment of prescribed
standard to all employees and workmen according to the need as may
be directed by the Employer who will also have the right to examine
these safety equipment to determine their suitability, reliability,
acceptability and adaptability.
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 30
11.7 The Contractor employing more than 250 workman whether temporary,
casual, probationer, regular or permanent or on contract, shall employ
at least one full time officer exclusively as safety officer to supervises
safety aspects of the equipment and workman.
The name and address of such Safety Officer of the Contractor will be
promptly informed in writing to the Employer with a copy to the Safety
Officer-Incharge before he starts work or immediately after any change
of the incumbent is made during currency of the Contract.
11.8 In case any accident occurs during the construction/erection or other
associated activities undertaken by the Contractor, thereby causing
any minor or major or total injury to his employees due to any reason
whatsoever, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to promptly
inform the same to the Employer and also to all the authorities
envisaged under the applicable laws.
11.9 The Employer shall have the right to stop the work, if in its opinion the
work is being carried out in such a way as may cause accidents and
endanger the safety of the persons and /or property. In such cases, the
Contractor shall be informed in writing about the nature of the hazards
and possible injury /accident and he shall remove shortcomings
promptly. The Contractor – after stopping the specific work, can if felt
necessary, appeal against the order of stoppage of work to the
Employer within 3 days of such stoppage of work and the decision of
the Employer in this respect shall be conclusive.
11.10 The Contractor shall not be entitled for any damages /compensation for
stoppage of work due to safety reasons and the period of such
stoppage of work will not be taken as an extension of time for
completion of work and will not be the ground for waiver of any part of
Contractor’s liability for timely completion of the works.
11.11 The Contractor shall follow and comply with all safety rules, relevant
provisions of applicable laws pertaining to the safety of workman,
employees plant and equipment as may be prescribed from time to
time without any demur, protest or contest or reservation. In case of
any conflict between statutory requirement and safety rules referred
above, the most stringent clause shall be applicable.
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 31
11.12 If the Contractor fails in providing safe working environment as per
Safety Rules or continues the work even after being instructed to stop
work by the Employer, the Contractor shall promptly pay to the
Employer on demand, compensation at the rate of Rs. 5000/- per day
or part thereof till the instructions are complled with and so certified by
the Employer.
11.13 If the Contractor does not take all safety precautions and /or fails to
comply with the safety Rules as prescribed by the Employer or as
prescribed under the applicable law for the safety of the equipment,
plant and personnel and the Contractor does not prevent hazardous
conditions which may cause injury to his own employees or employees
of other Contractors, or Employer or any other person at site or
adjacent thereto, the Contractor shall be responsible for payment of
compensation in the form of first hand relief as per the following
schedule:-
a) Fatal Injury or Rs. 1,00,000/- :
accident causing per person : Applicable
death : for
death/injury
b) Major injuries or Rs. 20,000/- : to any person
accident causing per person : whosoever
25% or more
Permanent disability :
The contractor,however, shall be responsible for full amount of
compensation admissible as per the law of land
Permanent disability shall have the same meaning as indicated
in Workmen’s Compensation Act. The compensation mentioned
above shall be in addition to the compensation payable to the
workmen/ employees under the relevant provisions of the
Workmen’s Compensation Act and rules framed there under or
any other applicable law as applicable from time to time. In case
the Employer is made to pay any such compensation, the
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 32
Contractor will be liable to reimburse the Employer such amount
(s) even in addition to the compensation indicated above.
12. Code Requirements
The erection requirements and procedures to be followed during
the execution of the project shall be in accordance with the
applicable Indian / International standards /regulations, as
indicated in Technical Specifications, good engineering practice,
the Drawings and other applicable Indian codes, laws and
regulations.
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 33
SECTION –VII-C
Technical Specification of Equipments
Sr No Description No. 1 PCC Poles 9M (200 kg WL) CSC-VII/R-1/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 2 ACSR 50 mm2 CSC-X/R-1/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 3 Stay Wire 7/8 SWG(GSS) CSC-VI/R-1/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 4 GI wire(GSL 8 SWG) CSC-XVI/R-1/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 5 MS Nuts and Bolts HSD/S-364/ST-163 6 Porcelain insulators and insulators fittings
for 11 kV overhead power lines CSC-XXIX/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010
7 GO switch CSC-XXVIII/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 with amendment
8 Lightening Arrestor 9 KV Old specification 9 Barbed wire Old Specification 10 11 kV XLPE Aerial Bunched Cable CSC-LV/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 11 Heat shrinkable termination kit for 11 kV
Cables CSC-XXXVI/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010
12 25KVA three phase Alu wound T/F CSC-III/R-1/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 13 16 KVA three phase copper wound T/F CSC-IV/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 14 Single Phase Energy Meter CSC-IIIL/R-1/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 15 Three Phase Energy Meter CSC-IIL/R-1/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 16 MCB For Single Phase Meter CSC-XXXXI/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 17 MCB For Three Phase Meter CSC-XXXXII/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 18 LT XLPE Armoured cable CSC-XI/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 &
CSC-XXXI/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010
Page 1 of 9
Specification No. CSC-VII-R-I/DH/UH/P&D/2009-10
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR
PCC POLES 8/9 METER LONG
(WL-200 K.G. F.O.S-2.5)
Issue of the Month: May 2010 Common Specifications Committee
(CSC Approval date 23.4.2010) UHVN & DHBVN
Page 2 of 9
Technical specification for PCC Poles (F.O.S. –2.5) 8/9 M Length
(Working load 200 kg.)
1. Scope:
This specification covers manufacture, assembly, testing at manufacturer’s
works of PCC Poles with an over all length of 8 M and 9 M and working load of
200 kg. at 0.6 M from the top, suitable for use in overhead L.T. lines.
2. APPLICABLE STANDARDS: Except when they conflict with requirements in this specification, the poles
shall comply with the relevant provisions made in the following Indian Standards
Specification or equivalent IEC.
a. IS: 1678-1960, specification for prestressed concrete pole for overhead
power, traction and telecommunication lines.
b. IS: 2905-1966, Methods of test for concrete poles for overhead power and
telecommunication lines.
c. IS: 7321-1974, code of practice for selection, handling and erection of
concrete poles for overhead power and telecommunication lines.
3. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS:
The equipment/material to be supplied against this specification shall be
suitable for satisfactory operation under the following climatic Conditions
i) Location At various locations in the state of Haryana
ii) Maximum ambient temperature (oC) 60 iii) Minimum ambient air temperature (oC) -5 iv) Maximum average daily ambient
temperature (oC) 40
v) Maximum yearly weighed average ambient temperature (oC)
32
vi) Maximum altitude above mean sea level (m)
1000
vii) Minimum Relative Humidity (%) 26 viii) Maximum Relative Humidity (%) 95 ix) Average no of Rainy days/ year 120 x) Average annual rainfall 900 mm xi) Maximum wind pressure 195 kg/m sq. The equipment shall be for use in moderately hot and humid tropical
climate, conducive to rust and fungus growth.
4. Terminology:
For the purpose of this standard the following definitions shall apply:
4.1 Average permanent load:
That fraction of the working load, which may be considered of long duration
over a period of one year.
Page 3 of 9
4.2 Load factor:
The ratio of ultimate transverse load to the transverse load at first crack
4.3 Transverse: The direction of the line bisecting the angle contained by the conductor at
the pole. In the case of straight run this will be normal to the run of the pole.
4.4 Transverse load at first crack:
For design, the transverse load at first crack shall be taken as not less than
the value of the working load.
4.5 Working load:
The maximum load in the transverse direction that is ever likely to occur,
including the wind pressure on the pole. This load is assumed to act at a point 600
mm below the top with the butt end of the pole planted to the required depth as
intended in the design.
4.6 Ultimate failure:
The conditions existing when the pole ceases to sustain a load increment
owing to either crushing of concrete or snapping of the prestressing tendon or
permanent stretching of the steel in any part of the pole.
4.7 Ultimate transverse load:
The load at which failure occurs, when it is applied at a point 600 mm below
the top and perpendicular to the axis of the pole along the transverse direction with
the butt end of the pole planted to the required depth.
5.0 Materials:
5.1 Cement:
The cement used in the manufacture of prestressed concrete poles shall be
ordinary or rapid hardening Portland cement conforming to IS: 269 –1976
(Specifications for rapid hardening Portland cement).
5.2 Aggregates:
Aggregates used for the manufacture of prestessed concrete poles shall
conform to IS 383-1970 (Specification for coarse and fine aggregates from natural
sources for concrete) the nominal max. size of aggregates shall in no case exceed
12 mm.
5.3 Water:
Water should be free from chlorides, sulphates, other salts and organic
matter. Potable water will be generally suitable.
5.4 Admixtures:
Admixtures should not contain calcium chloride or other chlorides and salts
which are likely to promote corrosion of prestressing steel.
5.5 Pre-stressing Steel:
The pre-stressing steel wires, including those used as untensioned wires,
should conform to IS 1785 (part –I) 1966 (specification for plain hard drawn steel
Page 4 of 9
wire for prestressed concrete part-I cold drawn stress relieved wire) IS:1785 (part
II)-1967 (specification for plain hard drawn steel wire for prestressed concrete part-
II as drawn wire) or IS: 6003-1970 (specification for indented wire for prestressed
concrete).
5.6 Concrete
The concrete mix shall be designed to the requirements laid down for
controlled concrete (also called design mix concrete) in IS: 1343-1960 (code of
practice for prestressed concrete) and IS: 456-1964 (code of practice for plain and
reinforced concrete), subject to the following special conditions.
a) Minimum works cube strength at 28 days should be at least 420 kg/cm2
b) The concrete strength at transfer should be at least 210 kg/cm2
c) The mix should contain at least 380 kg of cement per cubic meter of
concrete.
d) The mix should contain as low water content as is consistent with adequate
workability. If it becomes necessary to add water to increase the workability,
the cement content also should be raised in such a way that the original
value of water cement ratio is maintained.
6. Welding and Lapping of steel:
The high tensile steel wire shall be continuous over the entire length of the
tendon. Welding shall not be allowed in any case. However, Jointing or coupling
may be permitted/provided the strength of the joint or coupling is not less than the
strength of each individual wire.
7.0 Manufacture:
7.1 All prestressing wires and reinforcements shall be accurately fixed as
shown in the drawings and maintained in position during manufacture. The
untensioned reinforcement, as indicated in the drawing, should be held in
position by the use of stirrups, which should go round all the wires.
7.2 All wires shall be accurately stretched with uniform prestress in each wire.
Each wire or group or wires shall be anchored positively during casting.
Care shall be taken to see that the anchorages do no yield before the
concrete attains the necessary strength.
7.3 Covers:
The cover concrete measured from the outside of the prestressing tendon
shall be normally 20 mm.
7.4 Compacting:
The concrete shall be compacted by spinning, vibrating, shocking or other
suitable mechanical means. Hand compaction shall not be permitted.
7.5 Curing:
The concrete shall be covered with a layer of sacking, canvas, hessian or
similar absorbent material and kept constantly wet up to the time when the
Page 5 of 9
strength of concrete is at least equal to the minimum strength of concrete at
transfer of prestess. Thereafter, the pole may be removed from the mould and
watered at intervals to prevent surface cracking of the unit, the interval should
depend on the atmospheric humidity and temperature.
7.6 The prestressing wires shall be detensioned only after the concrete has
attained the specified strength at transfer (i.e. 210Kg./cm2). The cubes cast for the
purpose of determining the strength at transfer should be cured, as far as possible,
under conditions similar to those under which the poles are cured. The transfer
stage shall be determined based on the daily tests carried out on concrete cubes
till the specified strength indicated above is reached. Thereafter, the test on
concrete shall be carried out as detailed in IS 1343-1960 (code of practice for
prestessed concrete). The manufacturer shall supply, when required by the
purchaser or his representative, results of compressive test conducted in
accordance with IS 456-1964 (code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete )
on concrete cubes and from the concrete used for the poles. If the purchaser so
desires, the manufacturer shall supply cubes for test purposes and such cubes
shall be tested in accordance with IS: 456 –1964 (code of practice for pre &
reinforced concrete).
The detensioning shall be done by slowly releasing the wires, without
imparting shock or sudden load to the poles. The rate of detensioning may be
controlled by any suitable means either mechanical (screw type) or hydraulic.
The poles shall not be detensioned or released by cutting the prestessing wires
using flames or bar croppers while the wires are still under tension.
8. Earthing: Earthing shall be provided:
a) By having a length of 8 SWG GI wire embedded in concrete during
manufacture and the ends of the wires left projecting from the pole to a
length of 175 mm, at 250 mm from top and 150 mm below ground level.
b) By providing two holes of suitable dimensions 250 mm from top and
150 mm below ground level to enable the GI wire to be taken from the top
hole to the bottom hole through central hollow.
The earth wire shall not be allowed to come in contact with the prestressing wires. 9. Tests
9.1 Transverse strength tests: 9.1.1 Poles made from ordinary Portland cement shall be tested only on the
completion of 28 days and poles made from rapid hardening cement only on
the completion of 14 days after the day of manufacture.
9.1.2 The pole may be tested in either horizontal or vertical position. If tested in
horizontal position, provisions shall be made to compensate for the
Page 6 of 9
overhanging weight of the pole for this purpose the overhanging portion of
the pole may be supported on a movable trolley or similar device.
9.1.3 The pole shall be rigidly supported at the butt end for a distance equal to the
agreed depth of planting i.e. 1.5m.
9.1.4 Load shall be applied at a point 600 mm from the top of the pole and shall
be steadily and gradually increased to the design value of the transverse
load at first crack. The deflection at this load shall be measured.
A prestressed concrete pole shall be deemed not to have passed the test if
visible cracks appear at a stage prior to the application of the design transverse
load for the first crack.
The load shall then be reduced to zero and increased gradually to a load
equal to the first crack load plus 10% of the minimum ultimate transverse load, and
held up for 2 minutes. This procedure shall be repeated until the load reaches the
value of 80% of the minimum ultimate transverse load and thereafter increased by
5 % of the minimum ultimate transverse load until failure occurs. Each time the
load is applied, it shall be at the point of failure & shall be measured to the nearest
five kilograms.
The pole shall be deemed not to have passed the test if the observed
ultimate transverse load is less than the design.
The pole shall be deemed not to have passed the test if the observed
ultimate transverse load is less than the design ultimate transverse load.
9.2 Measurement of cover: After completion of the transverse strength test, the sample pole shall be
taken and checked for cover. The cover of the pole shall be measured at 3 points,
one within 1.8 meter from the butt end of the pole, the second within 0.6 meter
from the top end the third at an intermediate point and the mean value compared
with the specified value.
The mean value of the measured cover should not differ by more than +/-
1mm from the specified value.
If these requirements are not met, the workmanship with reference to
aligning of the end plates and prestressing wire assembly of mould should be
improved and inspection at production stage tightened suitably.
10 Inspection:
Inspection of material and supervision of tests in accordance with the
relevant ISS is mentioned in column 2 above and supporting drg. and schedules
and approved manufacture specification shall be carried out by the purchaser or
duly authorised representative. The material shall be inspected and tested before
despatch by an authorised representative of the Nigam in respect of quality. The
manufacturer shall provide to the inspecting officer all reasonable facilities without
Page 7 of 9
charge to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance with the
specifications.
The purchaser or his authorised representative shall have access at all
reasonable time to manufacturer’s work to inspect and witness to tests of the
material manufactured.
The purchaser has the right to have the tests carried out at the cost of
supplier by an independent Govt. agency wherever there is dispute regarding the
quality of material supplied.
11. Stacking
The supplies shall stack the poles in such a way that it is possible for the
inspecting officer to select and inspect the poles, as he may choose to inspect. All
such facilities for taking out the selected poles will be extended by the supplier free
of charge
12. Marking: The pole shall be clearly and indelibly marked with following
particulars either during or after manufacture but before testing at a position so as
to be easily read after erection in position.
a) Month and year of manufacture
b) Transverse strength of pole in kg.
c) Maker’s serial no. and mark.
UHBVN and planting depth will hence forth be embossed on each pole.
Firms give month wise schedule of manufacture against PO to facilitate inspection
during manufacturing process.
Whenever poles are tested out of any lot lying in UHBVN stores, cost of the
poles and testing charges will be charged to stock charge.
Checking of cover & steel Out of every 500 poles, one
may be take for climate
strength, testing, cover
checking after crushing and
checking of un-tensioned /
tensioned wire.
13. GUARANTEE / WARRANTEE The supplier shall be responsible to replace, free of cost, with no
transportation or insurance cost to the Purchaser, up to destination, the whole or
any part of the material which in normal and proper use proves the defective in
quality or workmanship, subject to the condition that the defect is noticed within 18
months from the date of receipt of material in stores OR 12 months from the date
of commissioning whichever period may expire earlier. The consignee or any
other officer of Nigam actually using the material will give prompt notice of each
Page 8 of 9
such defect to the supplier. The replacement shall be effected by the supplier
within a reasonable time, but not, in any case, exceeding 45 days. The supplier
shall, also, arrange to remove the defective within a reasonable period, but not
exceeding 45 days from the date of issue of notice in respect thereof, failing which,
the purchaser reserve the right to dispose of defective material in any manner
considered fit by him (Purchaser), at the sole risk and cost of the supplier. Any
sale proceeds of the defective material after meeting the expenses incurred on its
custody, disposal handling etc., shall however be credited to the supplier’s account
and set off against any outstanding dues of the purchaser against the supplier.
The warranty for 12/18 months shall be one time.
14. FAKE INSPECTION CALLS In case the supplier makes a fake inspection call i.e., the material is not
found ready by the Inspecting Officer deputed by the Nigam for inspection, the
supplier shall be liable to pay the expenses incurred by the Nigam on this account
subject to minimum of a fixed penalty of Rs. 20, 000/- for each such fake call made
by him.
15. CHALLENGE CLAUSE
The material offered / received after the inspection by the authorized
inspecting Officer may again be subjected to the test for losses or any other
parameters from any testing house / in house technique of the Nigam having
requisite capabilities and facilities. The results if found deviating / unacceptable or
in non-compliance with approved GTP’s, the lot shall be rejected and bidder shall
arrange to supply the within thirty (30) days of such detection at his cost including
to & fro transportation. In addition to this a penalty @ 10% of cost of the rejected
lost of material shall be imposed
General Manager/P&D Cum-Member Secretary CSC UHBVN, Panchkula.
Page 9 of 9
SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED AND OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR PCC POLES (TO BE SUBMITTED BY THE TENDERER). 1. Over length of pole m
2. Working load at 0.6 Meters from top kg.
3. Factor of safety
4. Bottom depth cm
5. Top depth cm
6. Breath cm.
7. No. of tensioned wires per pole no.
8. No. of untensioned wires per pole no.
9. Length of each untensioned wire
10. Concrete quantity m3/pole
11. Steel quantity kg/pole
12. Cement quantity kg/pole
______________________________________________________________________
Page 1 of 9
Specification No. CSC‐X‐RI/DH/UH/P&D/2010‐2011
TECHNICAL SPECIFCATION
FOR
HARD DRAWN STRANDED STEEL CORED
ALUMUINIUM CODUCTORS (20, 30 & 50 mm2)
Issue Month: May 2010 Common Specifications Committee
(CSC approval date 23.4.2010) UHBVN &DHBVN
______________________________________________________________________
Page 2 of 9
Technical Specification for Hard drawn stranded Steel Cored Aluminium Conductor for overhead low, medium 11 kV transmission lines. (20mm2, 30mm2 & 50mm2
) 1. SCOPE:‐ This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing before dispatch, supply & delivery
FOR destination, of ‘Squirrel‐20 mm2’, weasel ‐ 30 mm2’ & Rabbit‐50mm2’ ACSR conductor for use on 11
kV medium and low‐tension overhead power transmission lines.
2. APPLICABLE STANDARD:‐
Except when they conflict with the specific requirements. In these specifications, the conductors
shall comply in all respects with the latest Indian Standard Specification IS: 398‐(part‐II)‐1996, 4826‐
1976. (Galvanized coaling on round steel wires), IS: 1521‐1972 (Method of lenses Testing), IS: 1980 (Reels
& Drums for bare conductors), or the latest version thereof.
3. MATERIAL:‐
The conductor shall be made from the hard drawn Aluminum and galvanized Aluminium steel
wires having mechanical and electrical properties as per clause 4, 5 & 6.The Aluminum and galvanized
steel wires shall have physical constants conforming to clause 3 & 4 respectively of IS: 398/Part‐II‐
1996 or latest version thereof. The hot dipped or electrolytic process galvanized coating on steel wires
may be applied. The uniformity of galvanizing and weight of coating shall be in accordance with IS:
4826‐1976 or latest version thereof. The Steel wires shall have evenly and uniformly coating with
electrolytic highgrade 99.95% purity Zinc complying with latest issue of IS: 209 for Zinc. The steel strands
shall be hot dip galvanized and shall have a minimum Zinc coating of 250gm/m2 after stranding.
4 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS:
The equipment/material to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory
operation under the following climatic Conditions
i) Location At various locations in the state of
Haryana
ii) Maximum ambient temperature (oC) 60
iii) Minimum ambient air temperature (oC) ‐5
iv) Maximum average daily ambient temperature (oC) 40
v) Maximum yearly weighed average ambient
temperature (oC)
32
vi) Maximum altitude above mean sea level (m) 1000
vii) Minimum Relative Humidity (%) 26
viii) Maximum Relative Humidity (%) 95
ix) Average no of Rainy days/ year 120
x) Average annual rainfall 900 mm
xi) Maximum wind pressure 195 kg/m sq.
The equipment shall be for use in moderately hot and humid tropical climate, conducive to rust
and fungus growth.
______________________________________________________________________
Page 3 of 9
5. SIZES:‐
The sizes and properties for stranded steel cored aluminum conductors shall be as under:‐
STRANDED ALUMINIUM CONDUCTORS GALVANISED REINFORCED
Nominal Aluminium area
Stranding & wire diameter
Sectional area of AI
Total sectional area
Approx. Overall dia.
Approx mass
Calculated Resistance at 20oC Max.
Approx Calculated Breaking Load
Al Steel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 Kg/Km. Ohm/Km KN
20 Squirrel 6/2.11 1/2.11 20.71 24.43 6.33 85 1.374 7.71
30 Weasel 6/2.59 1/2.59 31.21 37 7.77 128 0.9116 11.36
50 Rabbit 6/3.35 1/3.35 52.21 61.90 10.05 214 0.5499 18.60
6. ALUMINIUM WIRES The properties of Aluminum winos to be used in the construction of the stranded wires shall
be as follows:‐
Solid conductors used in the construction of stranded steel reinforce Aluminum Conductors
galvanized
Diameter Cross sectional Nominal Diameter vireo
Mass Resistance at 20oC Max.
Breaking Load before stranding (Max.)
Breaking Load after stranding (Max.)
Nominal Min. Max.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 Kg/Km. Ohm/Km KN
1 2.11 2.09 2.13 3.497 9.45
8.237 0.63 0.60
2 2.59 2.56 2.62 5.269 14.24 5.490 0.89 0.85
3 3.35 3.32 3.38 8.814 23.82 3.265 1.43 1.36
7 STEEL WIRES:‐
The properties of the steel wire to be used in the construction of the stranded Steel Cored
Aluminum Wires be as under:‐
Solid steel wires used in the construction of Aluminium Conductors galvanized, steel
reinforced:‐
Nominal Diameter Cross sectional area or Nominal diameter wire
Mass Breaking load (Min).
Min. Max Before stranding
After stranding
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
mm mm mm mm2 Km/Kg KN KN
2.11 2.07 2.15 3.497 27.27 4.60 4.37
2.59 2.54 2.64 5.269 41.09 6.92 6.57
3.35 3.28 3.42 8.814 68.75 11.58 11.00
8. FREE FROM DEFECTS:‐ The wires shall be smooth and free from inequalities, spills and splits. The finished conductor
shall be smooth, compact, uniform and free from all imperfections including spills & splits, die marks,
scratches, abrasions, scuff marks, kinks, dents, press marks, over‐riding, looseness, pressure and/or
unusual bangle noise, on tapping, material inclusions, white rust, powder formation or black spots,
dirt, grit etc
9. JOINTS IN WIRES AND CONDUCTORS:‐
______________________________________________________________________
Page 4 of 9
Aluminum conductors Steel reinforced:
No joint shall be permitted in the individual Aluminum wires in the outermost layer of the
finished conductor. No two joints shall occur in the aluminum wires closer together than 15 meters of
each other in the complete stranded conductor. During standing no Aluminum wire welds shall be
made for the purpose of achieving the required conductor length.
Steel wires: No joints shall be permitted.
10. STRANDING:‐
i. The wires used in construction of stranded conductor shall before stranding satisfy all the
requirements of this standard for solid wires.
ii) The successive layers shall be stranded in opposite directions. The wires in each layer shall be
evenly and closely stranded round the underlying wire or wires.
iii. Lay ratio: the ratio for aluminum in case of ACSR shall be within limits given below:
No. of Wires Ratio Aluminium wire Lay Ration for Aluminium Wire
Al. Steel Dia of Steel Wire Min Max.
6 1 1.000 10 14
11. TESTS
The sample of individual wires for the tests shall normally be taken before stranding. The
manufacture shall carry out tests on samples taken but at least
from 10% of Aluminum wire spools and 10% of steel wire coils. However,
when desired by the purchaser the test sample should be taken from the
stranded wire. They shall be obtained by cutting 1.2 meters from the outer
ends of the finished conductor form not more than 10% of the finished reels.
The material consumed or destroyed during testing will be to the account of
the supplier. The wires shall comply with the following test as per IS: 398
(Part‐II)‐1996:
Type Tests
i. Measurement of diameters of individual Al. & Steel wiles.
ii. Measurement of Lay‐ratio of each layer.
iii. Breaking load of individual wires.
iv. Ductility test.
v. Wrapping test.
vi. Resistance test.
vii. Galvanizing test.
viii. The type test report(s) submitted by the bidder/ supplier from any NABL accredited laboratory
shall be acceptable for participation of the bidder in the procurement/ empanelment process. In
case NABL accredited laboratory happens to be that of manufacturer itself added precaution
shall be taken to get type test and other tests witnessed in the laboratory by Nigam
representative at the time of acceptance of material.
Acceptance Tests:
i. Visual examination.
ii. Measurement of diameters of individual Al. & Steel wiles.
iii. Measurement of Lay‐ratio of each layer.
iv. Breaking load of individual wires.
______________________________________________________________________
Page 5 of 9
v. Ductility test.
vi. Wrapping test.
vii. Resistance test on Aluminum wires.
viii. Galvanizing test
Routine Tests:
The routine tests shall be done same as acceptance tests and shall be carried out before & after
stranding
12. PACKING & MARKING:‐
The conductor shall be wound in reels on non returnable wooden drums provided with
lagging of adequate strength constructed to protect, the conductor against damage &
displacement during transit, storage and subsequent handing which should be strong enough to
withstand the stresses during handling and transportation.
12.1 PACKING:
The conductor shall be wound in reels on non‐returnable wooden drums, which should be strong
enough to withstand the stresses during handling & transpiration.
12.1.1 The gross mass of various conductors shall not exceed by more than 10% of the values given in
the following table:‐
Conductor size Gross Mass
20mm2Al. Area (7/2.11mm) 1000Kg.
30mm2Al. Area (7/2.59mm) 1000Kg.
50mm2Al. Area (7/3.35mm) 1500Kg.
12.1.2 The nominal wire length shall be 2 KM. but longer lengths shall be acceptable. Short lengths not
less than 1 Km each shall be acceptable to the maximum extent of 10% of the quantity ordered.
12.2 MARKING:
The following information shall be marked on each drum:
a) Manufacturers name.
b) Trade mark if any.
c) Drum or Identification number.
d) Size of conductor.
e) No. of lengths conductor.
f) Gross mass of the packing.
g) Not mass of conductor
h) ISI certification mark, if any.
i) Position of the conductor.
j) Name & Address of the consignee.
k) Month & Year of manufacture.
13 INSPECTION
All tests and inspection shall be made at the place of manufacturer unless otherwise specially
agreed upon by the manufacturer and the purchaser at the time of purchase. The manufacturer shall
afford the inspector representing the purchase all responsible facilities, without charge, to satisfy him
that the material is being furnished in accordance with this specification. The purchaser or his
authorized representative shall have access at all responsible time to manufacture’s works to
______________________________________________________________________
Page 6 of 9
inspect and witness the tests of the conductor being manufactured, As regards correctness of the
length of ACSR Conductor, the same is subject to final checking and measurement by the consignee and
the firm shall be responsible for all the shortages, damages etc. if any. The samples are taken for test
after stranding and if any selected reel fails in the retest, the manufacture may test each and every
reel and submit them for further Inspection. All rejected material should be suitably marked and
segregated.
No material shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture before it has been satisfactorily
inspected and tested unless the Purchaser. In writing waives off the inspection. In the later case also,
the conductor shall be dispatched only after satisfactory testing for all tests specified are completed and
approved by Purchaser. The UHBVN/DHBVN reserves the right to have the tests carried out at the cost of
manufacturer / supplier by an independent agency whenever there is a dispute regarding the quality of
supply.
The acceptance of any quantity of material shall in no way relieve the Supplier of any of his
responsibilies for meeting all requirements of the specifications and shall not prevent subsequent
rejection if such material is later found to be defective
Qty of material out of lot recommended to be physically checked shall be as under:‐
i. For ACSR conductor up to 30mm sq.:
10% subject to a minimum of one drum.
ii. For ACSR conductor above 30mm sq.:
a. The inspecting officer shell select 10% of the drums offered for Inspection at random and
check as under:
i. Gross weight of each drum.
ii. Length of conductor on each drum.
iii. Weight of each empty drum.
iv. The inspecting officer then shall calculate the average weight per KM of the conductor on the
basis of net weight and length of conductor of 10% drums checked as above and shall also
calculate average weight of empty drum.
b. For the balance 90% drums:
i. The inspecting officer shall measure the gross weight of each drum.
ii). After deducting the average weight of one empty drum (a‐iv), the inspecting officer shall find
out the net weight of conductor on each drum.
c. The inspecting officer shall provide his seal on both ends of ACSR
conductor of all the drums offered for inspection as (a) & (b) above.
The inspecting officer shall write in the inspection note the verified
length and weight of conductor of individual drum out of 10% drums as
per ‘a’ above and calculate length and verify gross weight of each drum
as per (b) above. Consignee will take the measurement on the basis of
inspection note received by him.
14 GUARANTED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:‐
GTP’s of the conductor shall be given in the Appendix‐I attached, herewith the specification. Any
other particulars considered necessary by the supplier might also be given in addition those listed in the
appendix.
16. GUARANTEE / WARRANTEE
______________________________________________________________________
Page 7 of 9
The supplier shall be responsible to replace, free of cost, with no transportation or insurance cost
to the Purchaser, up to destination, the whole or any part of the material which in normal and proper use
proves the defective in quality or workmanship, subject to the condition that the defect is noticed within
18 months from the date of receipt of material in stores OR 12 months from the date of commissioning
whichever period may expire earlier. The consignee or any other officer of Nigam actually using the
material will give prompt notice of each such defect to the supplier. The replacement shall be effected by
the supplier within a reasonable time, but not, in any case, exceeding 45 days. The supplier shall, also,
arrange to remove the defective within a reasonable period, but not exceeding 45 days from the date of
issue of notice in respect thereof, failing which, the purchaser reserve the right to dispose of defective
material in any manner considered fit by him (Purchaser), at the sole risk and cost of the supplier. Any
sale proceeds of the defective material after meeting the expenses incurred on its custody, disposal
handling etc., shall however be credited to the supplier’s account and set off against any outstanding dues
of the purchaser against the supplier. The warranty for 12/18 months shall be one time.
17. FAKE INSPECTION CALLS In case the supplier makes a fake inspection call i.e., the material is not found ready by the
Inspecting Officer deputed by the Nigam for inspection, the supplier shall be liable to pay the expenses
incurred by the Nigam on this account subject to minimum of a fixed penalty of Rs. 20, 000/‐ for each
such fake call made by him.
18. CHALLENGE CLAUSE The material offered / received after the inspection by the authorized inspecting Officer may
again be subjected to the test for losses or any other parameters from any testing house / in house
technique of the Nigam having requisite capabilities and facilities. The results if found deviating /
unacceptable or in non‐compliance with approved GTP’s, the lot shall be rejected and bidder shall arrange
to supply the within thirty (30) days of such detection at his cost including to & fro transportation. In
addition to this a penalty @ 10% of cost of the rejected lost of material shall be imposed
General Manager/P&D Cum‐Member Secretary CSC UHBVN Panchkula
______________________________________________________________________
Page 8 of 9
GUARANTED TECTIICAL PARTTCULARS PF CONDUCTOR
1. Code word.
2. Maker’s name, address and country.
a.) Aluminum rods.
b.) Steel wires/reels.
c.) Complete conducer.
3. Stranding and wire diameter.
a) Aluminum.
b) Steel.
4. Nominal equivalent copper area in sq. mm.
5. Nominal equivalent Aluminum area in sq. mm.
6. Gross sectional area in sq. mm of.
a) Aluminum strand.
b) Steel Strand.
c) Conductor strand.
7. Actual Aluminum area in sq. mm.
8. Diameter of complete conductor in mm.
9. Minimum breaking load in KV. Before After
Stranding Stranding
a) Aluminum wire.
b) Steel wire.
10. Minimum breaking load of conductor.
11. Purely of Aluminum rods.
12. Zinc coating.
a) Number of 1 minute dips.
b) Weight of zinc coating.
c) Process of Galvanizing.
d) Quality of Zinc.
13. Maximum working tension of conductor.
14. Mass in Kg per Km
a) Aluminum.
b) Steel.
c) Conductor
15. Resistance in Ohms/Km at 20’C
a) Aluminum.
b) ACSR Conductor. 16. a) Continuous max. cement rating of conductor in still air at 50 C
ambient Temperature‐Amps.
b) Temperature rise for above current in Degree C.
17. Modulo us of elasticity (Practical) of conductor.
18. Co‐efficient of linear expansion.
a) Aluminum.
a) Steel.
b) Conductor. 19. Percentage of carbon in steel wire rods.
______________________________________________________________________
Page 9 of 9
20. Standard length. 21. Tolerance if any in standard length. 22. Initial and final sags and tension and string charts whether furnished. 23. No. of standards length in one reel/drum. 24. Dimension of the reel. 25. Mass of the conductor in one reel/drum in Kg. 26. Mass of the reel drum. 27. Gross mass of reel/drum including wt. of the conductor. 28. Standard according to which the conductor will be manufacture and tested. 29. Other particulars if any. 30. Whether Test Certifiable enclosed. Yes/No 31. Joints in Strands
a) Steel b) Aluminum of.
c) Method of making joints.
d) Ultimate Tensile strength of joint.
Name & Address of Supplier
______________________________________________________________________
Page 1 of 4
Specification No. CSC-VI-R-I/DH/UH/P&D/2010-11
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR
GSS WIRE OF 7/8 SWG (4MM)
Issue of the Month: Common Specifications Committee
(CSC approval date 23.4.2010) UHVN & DHBVN
______________________________________________________________________
Page 2 of 4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR GSS WIRE OF 7/8 SWG 4 mm and 7/14 SWG (2.24mm) 1. SCOPE:
This specification covers the manufacture, testing and inspection of GSS Wire of sizes 7/8
SWG / (4mm) and 7/14 SWG (2.24mm).
2. STANDARDS:
The GSS wires shall conform to IS: 2141-1979, IS-4826 (1979) and 2633 (1964) or the latest
version thereof.
3. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS:
The equipment/material to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for
satisfactory operation under the following climatic Conditions
i) Location At various locations in the state of
Haryana
ii) Maximum ambient temperature (oC) 60
iii) Minimum ambient air temperature (oC) -5
iv) Maximum average daily ambient temperature (oC) 40
v) Maximum yearly weighed average ambient temperature
(oC)
32
vi) Maximum altitude above mean sea level (m) 1000
vii) Minimum Relative Humidity (%) 26
viii) Maximum Relative Humidity (%) 95
ix) Average no of Rainy days/ year 120
x) Average annual rainfall 900 mm
xi) Maximum wind pressure 195 kg/m sq.
The equipment shall be for use in moderately hot and humid tropical climate, conducive to
rust and fungus growth.
TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:
In case where joints are permitted they shall be made by welding or brazing. Joints in the
same wire shall be departed by a length not less then that indicated at point (III) under “ Technical
parameters” (clause 4) and joint in the different wires shall not be less than 15 M apart.
______________________________________________________________________
Page 3 of 4
4. TESTS:
The tests as per IS: 2141-1979 or its latest version including the tests for chemical analysis is
provided therein shall be carried out. The zinc coating of the galvanized wire shall be as specified in IS:
4826/1979 with latest amendments and testing shall be carried out as specified in ISS: 2633/1964 or
the latest amendment thereof.
5. INSPECITON:
The material shall be inspected and tested before dispatch by an authorized representative of
the Nigam in respect of quality. In case the supplier is not in position to get these tests carried out at his
works, such tests may got be carried out by him at any Govt. recognized test agency at his own
expenses.
6. FAKE INSPECTION CALLS In case the supplier makes a fake inspection call i.e., the material is not found ready by the
Inspecting Officer deputed by the Nigam for inspection, the supplier shall be liable to pay the
expenses incurred by the Nigam on this account subject to minimum of a fixed penalty of
Rs. 20, 000/- for each such fake call made by him.
7 . TEST CERTIFICATES:
The supplier shall supply one set of test certificates from a recognized Govt. agency in respect of
quality as per IS: 2141-1979 with latest amendments thereof for approval of the purchaser.
8. MARKING :
Each coil of GSS wire shall be marked legibly with the:
a. Manufacturer’s name or trade mark.
b. Lot number and coil number.
c. A brief description and quality of material.
d. Weight of the coil.
e. ISI certification mark may also be marked.
9. PACKING:
The supplier shall be responsible for proper packing of material so as to avoid any damage
during the transport and storage and to ensure correct dispatch to the destination. The length of strand
shall be as per ISS.
______________________________________________________________________
Page 4 of 4
10. PLACE OF MANUFACTURE:
The name and place of manufacture should be indicated in the tender.
11. CHALLENGE CLAUSE
The material offered / received after the inspection by the authorized inspecting Officer
may again be subjected to the test for losses or any other parameters from any testing house / in
house technique of the Nigam having requisite capabilities and facilities. The results if found
deviating / unacceptable or in non-compliance with approved GTP’s, the lot shall be rejected and
bidder shall arrange to supply the within thirty (30) days of such detection at his cost including to &
fro transportation. In addition to this a penalty @ 10% of cost of the rejected lost of material shall
be imposed
General Manager/P&D Cum-Member Secretary CSC UHBVN Panchkula.
Page 1 of 6
______________________________________________________________________
Specification No. CSC-XVI-R-I/DH/UH/P&D/2010-11
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR
GI WIRE
Issue of the Month: Common Specifications Committee
(CSC approval date 23.4.2010) UHVN & DHBVN
______________________________________________________________________
Page 2 of 6
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR G.I. WIRE
1. SCOPE:
This specification covers the manufacture, testing and inspection of G.I. wires.
2. APPLICABLE STANDARDS:
Except when they conflict with the specific requirements of this specification, the G.I. wires
shall comply with the provisions of IS: 280-1978 and IS: 7887-1975 or the latest version thereof.
3. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS:
The equipment/material to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for
satisfactory operation under the following climatic Conditions
i) Location At various locations in the
state of Haryana
ii) Maximum ambient temperature (oC) 60
iii) Minimum ambient air temperature (oC) -5
iv) Maximum average daily ambient temperature (oC) 40
v) Maximum yearly weighed average ambient
temperature (oC)
32
vi) Maximum altitude above mean sea level (m) 1000
vii) Minimum Relative Humidity (%) 26
viii) Maximum Relative Humidity (%) 95
ix) Average no of Rainy days/ year 120
x) Average annual rainfall 900 mm
xi) Maximum wind pressure 195 kg/m sq.
The equipment shall be for use in moderately hot and humid tropical climate, conducive to
rust and fungus growth.
4. TECHNICAL PARICULARS:
I ) Size of G.I. wire 4mm dia
II ) Tensile strength 56 to 95 kgf per sq.mm
III ) Quality Hard
______________________________________________________________________
Page 3 of 6
5. MATERIAL :
5.1 The wires shall be drawn from the wire rod confirming to IS: 7887-1975 or the latest
version thereof.
5.2 The requirement for chemical composition for the wires shall confirm to IS: 7887.
5.3 The wires shall be sound, free from split surface flaws, rough jagged and imperfect edges
and other detrimental defects on the surface of the wires.
6. GALVANISING:
The wires shall be galvanized with Heavy coating as per IS: 4826-1979 or the latest
version thereof.
7. TOLERANCE IN DIAMETER:
The tolerance on nominal diameter at any section of wire shall not exceed (+) (-) 2.5%.
Further, the maximum difference between the diameter at any two cross- Sections of wires shall
not exceed 2.5%.
8. TESTS :
The following tests shall be carried out in accordance with IS: 280-1978 or the latest
version thereof as per sampling criteria stipulated therein.
1. Dimensional check (dia) refer clause 7 above.
2. Visual inspection regarding freedom from defects-refer clause 5.3 above.
3. Tensile test.
4. Wrapping test.
5. Coating test-refer clause 6 above.
6. Chemical composition.
9. TEST CERTIFICATES:
The supplier shall supply from any Govt. recognized test agency the test certificates for the
material offered as per IS: 280-1978 or the latest version thereof for the approval of purchaser.
If the G.I. wire is bearing ISI marking then the certificate from the approved Govt. agencies will not
be required. It will not however obviate the necessity of inspection /testing by the inspecting officers
of the Nigam.
______________________________________________________________________
Page 4 of 6
10. INSPECITON:
The material shall be inspected and tested before dispatch as IS: 280-1978 or latest
version thereof by an authorized representative of the Nigam. In case the supplier is not in a
position to get these tests carried out at his works such tests may be got carried out by him at any
Govt. recognized tests agency at his own expenses.
11. PACKING :
The wires shall be supplied in 50-70 kg. Coils, each coils having single continuous length.
Each coil of wire shall be suitably bound and fastened compactly and shall be protected by suitable
wrapping.
12. MARKING:
Each coil shall be provided with a label fixed firmly on the inner part of the coil bearing the
following information.
1. Manufacture’s name or trade mark.
2. Lot number and coil number.
3. Size.
4. Grade.
5. Mass.
6. Length.
7. Material may also be marked with ISI certification mark.
13. FAKE INSPECTION CALLS In case the supplier makes a fake inspection call i.e., the material is not found ready by the
Inspecting Officer deputed by the Nigam for inspection, the supplier shall be liable to pay the
expenses incurred by the Nigam on this account subject to minimum of a fixed penalty of
Rs. 20, 000/- for each such fake call made by him.
14. PLACE OF MANUFACTURE :
The name and place of manufacture should be given in the tender.
______________________________________________________________________
Page 5 of 6
15. CHALLENGE CLAUSE
The material offered / received after the inspection by the authorized inspecting Officer
may again be subjected to the test for losses or any other parameters from any testing house / in
house technique of the Nigam having requisite capabilities and facilities. The results if found
deviating / unacceptable or in non-compliance with approved GTP’s, the lot shall be rejected and
bidder shall arrange to supply the within thirty (30) days of such detection at his cost including to &
fro transportation. In addition to this a penalty @ 10% of cost of the rejected lost of material shall
be imposed
General Manager/P&D Cum-Member Secretary CSC UHBVN, Panchkula.
______________________________________________________________________
Page 6 of 6
GUARATEED TECHNICAL DATA:
1. Tensile strength. 2. Quality. 3. Galvanized. 4. Min. weight of one coil.
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 1
SPECIFICATION NO. HSD/S-364/ST-163
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR BLACK
HEXAGONAL M.S. BOLTS AND NUTS. OFFICE OF THE
CHIEF ENGINEER/PLG. & CONST. TRANSMISSION DESIGN DTE., HARYANA STATE ELECY. BOARD,
IDYUT NAGAR, HISAR.
ISSUE OF MONTH :__________
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 2
1.
Technical Specification for Black Hexagonal M.S. Bolts & Nuts.
SCOPE :
This specification covers the manufacture, testing before despatch,
supply and delivery F.O.R. destination of black hexagonal MS Bolts & Nuts
of various sizes.
2.
Unless otherwise modified in this specification, the bolts and nuts shall
comply with Indian Standard Specifications IS: 1363 - 1967 as amended from
time to time.
APPLICABLE STANDARDS :
3.
CLIMATIC CONDITIONS :
All the material is required to work satisfactorily under the following
site conditions :
3.1 Max. temperature 47.50
3.2 Min. temperature -2.
C 50
3.3 Max. relative humidity 100%
C
3.4 Min. relative humidity 26%
3.5 Average No. of rainy days Nearly 120 days.
Per Annum. 3.6 Average annual rain fall 900 mm 3.7 Average number of dust storms days /Annum 35 3.8 Isoceraunic level 45
3.9 Max. wind pressure 195Kg /m2
3.10 Altitude above mean sea Less than 1000 Mtrs. Level. 3.11 Pollution Moderate
4.
Full threaded bolts shall not be used. The bolts and nuts shall have
hexagonal heads which shall be neatly finished concentric and square with the
shank and free from burrs, scale and other defects. Threads in nuts shall not be
torn or ragged and shall be of proper contour. The fits of the nuts shall be
WORKMANSHIP :
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 3
such that there will be no locking of the nuts. Nuts and Bolts of the same size
shall be interchangeable. The thread of nuts & bolts shall have coarse pitch
screw threads as per I.S.S. - 4218-1967 or its latest amendments and shall
meet with all applicable technical supply conditions covered under this
standard.
5.
5.1
PARTICULARS OF MATERIAL :
The mechanical properties of bolts covered in this standard shall
conform to the property clause 4.6 and those for nuts shall conform to the
property clause 4 specified in IS: 1367-1967 or its latest edition.
MECHANICAL PROPERTIES :
6. GRADE :
Bolts & Nuts covered in this specification shall conform to Black
Grade B, specified in IS: 1367-1967.
7.
Black Bolts & Nuts covered in this specification shall be designated as
per table I of IS : 1363-1967.
DESIGNATION :
8.
The dimensions for black bolts & nuts shall be as given in table 2 & 3.
DIMENSIONS :
The bolts and nuts shall have coarse pitch screw threads
conforming to IS : 4218-1967 (ISO Metric Screw Threads).
Preferred length diameter combinations for black hexagonal bolts are
given in table-4 IS : 1363-1967.
9.
9.1 The method of sampling and acceptance criteria of black hexagonal
Bolts and Nuts shall be in accordance with IS: 2614-1964.
REQUIREMENTS :
9.2 The Bolts & Nuts conforming to this standard shall comply with the
requirements of IS: 1367-1967 in regard to requirements not specified in this
standard.
10
All types of tests including routine tests shall be carried out according to IS :
1367-1967 or its latest amendment.
TESTS :
11.
The material shall be inspected and tested before despatch by
authorised representative of the Board in respect of its quality. The
INSPECTION :
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 4
manufacturer shall provide to the inspecting officer, of the purchaser, all
reasonable facilities, without charge, to satisfy him that the material is being
furnished in accordance with the specification. The purchaser or his authorized
representative shall have access at all reasonable times to manufacturer’s
works to inspects and witness the tests of the material manufactured.
The purchaser has the right to have the tests carried out at the cost of
the supplier by an independent Govt, agency, whenever there is dispute
regarding the quality of material supplied.
12.
The tenderer shall state the place of manufacture, testing and name of
the manufacturer of the various items included in his tender.
PLACE OF MANUFACTURE :
13.
The supplier shall be responsible for suitable packing of all the
material and marking on the consignment, so as to avoid any damage during
transport and storage and to ensure correct despatch to the destination. The
packing shall be conforming to the requirement laid down in IS: 3256-1965 or
its latest amendment.
PACKING AND TRANSPORT :
14.
Illustrated and descriptive literature on the material offered must be
submitted along with the tender.
DRAWING AND LITERATURE :
15.
No assistance whatsoever for arranging the raw material for
manufacture of Bolts & Nuts shall be provided by the purchaser. The delivery
shall not be dependent upon availability of raw material.
RAW MATERIAL :
16.
The material shall be marked with the ISI certification mark.
MARKING :
The sealed container of bolts & nuts shall be marked with: a) Manufacturer name & trade mark. b) Place of manufacturers. c) The name & designation of consignee ( to be furnished by the
purchaser). d) Ultimate destination as required by the purchaser. e) The marking shall be stencilled in delible ink on gunny bags. f) Net weight with description of material.
Sd/- Superintending Engineer/Design,
for Chief Engineer/P&C, Transmission, Design Directorate, HSEB, Hisar.
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 5
ANNEXURE ‘A’
Sr. No. Description
Quantity Required
1. Black Hexogonal M.S. Bolts Rs. ________________ 2. Black Hexagonal M.S. Nuts Rs. ________________
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 6
TECHNICALSPECIFICATION FOR
11 KV LIGHTNING ARRESTOR.
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 7
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR 11 KV LIGHTNING
ARRESTER FOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 5 KA, SERIES “B”. 1.
SCOPE :
This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing, inspection at
manufacturer’s works & delivery of 11 KV lightning arrestors.
2.
APPLICABLE STANDARDS :
The material shall conform in all respects to the relevant IEC standards with latest amendments thereof. The bidder shall use ISS where corresponding IEC is not available. However, where both the standards are available, IEC will be used. IEC or other National Standards are permitted where these are equivalent or superior to IEC. In such cases salient points of difference between the standards adopted and the IEC standards shall be clearly brought out in the relevant schedule Four copies of such standards with authentic English translation shall be finished alongwith the offer.
3.
CLIMATIC CONDITIONS :
The equipment is required to operate satisfactorily under the following
site conditions :
TEMPERATURE :
A) Maximum temperature of air 50 Degree C B) Minimum temperature of air -2.5 Degree C.
RELATIVE HUMIDITY :
A) Maximum 100% B) Minimum 26% Isoceraunic Level 45
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 8
Average rainfall per year 900 mm Altitude Below 1000 M. Above sea level. Maximum wind pressure 150 Kg./Sq.m. No. of rainy days per year Nearly 4 months In a year.
4.
TECHNICAL PARTICULARS :
The Lightning Arrestors shall be of Metal Oxide Gapless type suitable
for outdoor installation on 11000 volts, 50 cycles per ;second, 3 phase
A.C. system with neutral solidly grounded. The highest line to line
system voltage should be 12.0 KV (rms) and other particulars are as
under :
A) Voltage rating in KV RMS 9 KV rms.
B) Nominal discharge current rating 5 KVA.
C) Maximum residual test voltage specified 34 KV peak with
8/20 micro second
current waves.
5.
DRAWINGS :
The tendered along with tender, should offer dimensional drawings and
illustrated descriptive literature of the equipment.
6.
TESTS :
The type routine and acceptance as per IS : 3010 (Part-III)/IEC Ch-4
(1991) with latest version thereof shall be carried out.
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 9
7.
INSPECTION :
The material shall be inspected and tested before despatch by an
authorized representative of the Nigam in respect of quality. The
manufacturer shall provide the necessary facilities for such inspection.
In case the supplier is not in a position to get these test carried out at
his works, such tests may be got carried out by him at any Govt.
recognized testing agency at his own expense.
8.
TEST CERTIFICATES :
The supplier shall supply certificates as per IS –3070/99 –4 with latest
amendment thereof from a recognized Government agency for
approval of the purchaser.
9.
MARKING :
Each lightning arrestor shall be provided with a name plate or plae
legibly and indelibly marked with the name or trade mark of the
manufacturer and country of Manufacture rated voltage, nominal
discharge current, type destination and serial number of the Lightning
Arrestor, identification mark on each separately housed unit to enable
it to be replaced in correct position after a multi unit arrestor has been
dismantled should also be marked ISI certification mark may also be
marked.
10.
GUARANTEED & TECHNICAL PARTICULARS :
The ;tenderers shall supply the relevant information and technical
particulars called for in the schedule of guaranteed and technical
particulars as per Annexure –‘A’.
11.
QUALITY ASSURANCE :
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 10
To ensure that the goods/equipment under the scope of this contract
whether manufactured at the bidder’s works or at its sub-contractor’s
premises or at any other place of work are manufactured following
Quality Assurance Program. Such programs shall be outlined by the
bidder and shall be submitted along with the bid. A quality assurance
program of the bidder submitted by the bidder must cover the
following.
11.1 The bidder’s organization structure for the management and
implementation of the proposed quality assurance program.
11.2 Documentation control system.
11.3 Qualification data of key personnel.
11.4 The procedure for purchase of material parts, components and
selection of sub-contractor including vendor analysis, source
inspection, incoming raw materials inspection, verification of materials
purchased etc.
11.5 A quality plan detailing out the specific quality control procedure
adopted or controlling the quality of equipment during manufacturing.
11.6 System of quality audits.
12.
QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM :
The quality assurance program shall be discussed with the successful
bidder after the award of the contract and the final version mutually
agreed between the purchaser and the bidder shall form a part of the
Contract Agreement signed between the purchaser and the bidder.
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 11
ANNEXURE –A
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS.
1. Rated Lightning Arresters Voltage.
2. Rated Lightning Arresters Current.
3. Maximum continuous operating voltage.
4. Maximum residual voltage with 8/20 microsecond wave at
2.5 KA
5.0 KA
10.0 KA
1. High current short duration withstand current ( .4/10 microsecond
wave)
2. Maximum energy discharge capability.
3. Maximum steep current impulse Residual Voltage at 5 KA
discharge current.
4. One minute power frequency withstand voltage for arrester
housing.
a. Dry
b. Wet
5. Total creepage distance of arrester.
6. Temporary over voltage withstand capability.
0.1 second.
1.0 second.
10.0 second.
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 12
SECTION VII-D
DRAWINGS
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 13
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 14
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 15
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 16
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 17
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 18
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 19
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 20
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 21
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 22
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 23
UTTAR & DAKSHIN HARYANA BIJLI VITRAN NIGAM
Specification No. CSC- XXIX/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010
TECHNICALSPECIFICATION
FOR
PORCELAIN INSULATROS AND INSULATORS
FITTINGS FOR 11 KV OVERHEAD POWER LINES
Issue of the Month:
Common Specifications Committee UHBVN & DHBVN
Page 1 of 11
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PORCELAIN INSULATORS AND INSULATORS FITTINGS FOR 11 KV OVERHEAD LINES: 1. SCOPE :
This specification covers the details of the porcelain insulators and insulator fittings for use on 11 KV overhead power lines met with in rural Electric distribution systems.
2. APPLICABLE STANDARDS :
Except when they conflict with the specific requirements of this specification, the insulators shall comply with the Indian Standard Specification IS: 731 – 1971 or the latest version thereof and the insulator fittings shall comply with the Indian Standard Specification IS: 2486 (Part-I), IS – 2486 (Part-II) 1974 & IS: 3188 or the latest version thereof or equivalent international standards.
3. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS :
The equipment is required to operate satisfactory under the following site conditions:
1. Max. ambient air temperature 600C
2. Min. ambient air temperature (-)50C
3. Average Daily Max. ambient temperature 400C
4. Max. yearly weighted average ambient temperature
320C
5. Max. altitude above mean sea level (Meters) 1000
6. Minimum Relative Humidity (%age) 26
7. Max. Relative Humidity (%age) 95
8. Avg. No. of Rainy days/year 120
9. Avg. annual rainfall 900 mm
10. Maximum wind pressure 195 Kg./m Sq. 4. GENERAL REQUIREMENT :
4.1 The porcelain shall be sound free from defects thoroughly vitrified and smoothly glazed.
4.2 Unless otherwise specified, the glaze shall be brown in colours. The
glaze shall cover all the porcelain parts of the insulator except those areas which serve as support during firing or are left unglazed for the purpose of assembly.
4.3 The design of the insulator shall be such that stresses due to
expansion and contraction in any part of the insulator shall not lead to deterioration. The porcelain shall not engage directly with hard metal.
Page 2 of 11
4.4 Cement used in the construction of the insulator shall not cause
fracture kby expansion or loosing by contraction and proper care shall be taken to locate the individual parts correctly during cementing. The cement shall not give rise to chemical reaction with metal fittings and its thickness shall be as uniform as possible.
4.5 The insulators should preferably be manufactured in automatic
temperature controlled kilns to obtain uniform baking and better electrical & mechanical properties.
5. CLASSIFICATION AND DIMENSIONS :
5.1 Both pin & strain insulators shall conform to type B of IS: 731.
5.2 The dimension of pin insulators shall be as shown in the drawings.
5.3 The strain insulators shall be ball & socket type or Tongue & clevis type, as required by the purchaser. The dimensions of these insulators shall be as per IS: 2486 (Part-II).
6. TEST VOLTAGES :
The test voltages of insulators shall be as under:
Highest system voltage
Visible discharge test
Wet power frequency withstand test.
Power frequency puncture withstand test (Pin Insulators)
Power frequency puncture withstand test (Strain Insulators)
Impulse voltage withstand test.
KV (rms)
12
KV (rms) 9 KV (rms) 35
KV (rms) 105
KV (rms) 1.3 times the actual dry flash over voltage of insulator
KV (Peak) 75
7. FAILING LOAD :
7.1 Electro mechanical failing load (for Pin Insulators only). The
insulators shall be suitable for a minimum failing load of 5 KN applied
in transverse direction.
7.2 Electro mechanical failing load (for strain insulators only). The
insulators shall be suitable for a minimum failing load of 45 KN
applied in axially.
Page 3 of 11
8. CREEPAGE DISTANCE :
The maximum creepage distance shall be as under:
Heavily polluted Atmosphere Highest system voltage
Normal & moderately
polluted atmosphere
Pin Insulator strain insulator
12 KV 230 mm 320 mm 400 mm
Higher value of creepage distance has been specified for strain
insulators as these are normally used in horizontal position in 11 KV
lines.
9. TESTS:
The insulators shall comply with the following tests as per IS – 731 or
equivalent international standards.
9.1 TYPE TESTS :
The following shall constitute the type tests:
A) Visual examination.
B) Verification of dimensions.
C) Impulse voltage withstand test.
D) Wet power frequency voltage withstand test.
E) Temperature cycles test.
F) Electro – mechanical failing load test. (for strain insulator only).
G) Mechanical failing load test. (for Pin Insulator only).
H) Puncture test.
I) Porosity test.
J) Galvanizing test.
K) Visible discharge test.
L) 24 hours mechanical strength test. (for strain insulators only).
9.2 ACCEPTANCE TESTS :
The test samples after having withstood the routine test shall be
subjected to the following acceptance tests in the order indicated
below:
Page 4 of 11
A) Verification of dimensions.
B) Temperature cycle tests.
C) Electro mechanical failing load test (for strain insulator only).
D) Puncture test (for strain insulator only).
E) Porosity test and.
F) Galvanizing test.
9.3 ROUTINE TESTS :
The following test shall be carried out as routine tests:
A) Visual examination.
B) Mechanical routine test (for strain insulator only).
C) Electrical routine test. (for strain insulator only).
10. MARKING: 10.1 Each insulator shall be legibly and indelibly marked to show the
following: A) Name or trade mark of the manufacturer. B) Month and year of manufacture. C) Min. failing load in KN. D) ISI certification mark, if any.
10.1.1 Marking on porcelain shall be printed and shall be applied before firing.
11. PACKING :
All insulators (without fittings) shall be packed in wooden crates
suitable for easy and rough handling land acceptable for rail
transport, where more than one insulator is packed in a crate
wooden separators shall be fixed between the insulators to keep
individual insulator in position without movement within the crate.
PART-B INSULATOR FITTINGS :
12. SCOPE :
This specification covers details and test requirements for: 1) Pins for 11 KV Pin Insulators. 2) Fittings for strain insulators.
Page 5 of 11
13. APPLICABLE STANDARD :
Pins shall comply with the requirements of IS: 2486 (Part – I & II)
with latest amendments. Fitting for strain insulator shall comply with
the requirements of IS: 2486, Part-I to IV with latest amendments or
equivalent international standards.
14.1 Pins for Pin Insulators.
14.1.1 General requirements :
The pins shall be a single piece obtained preferably by the process
of forging. They shall not be made by joining, welding, shrink fitting
or any other process from more than one piece of material. They
shall be of good finish, free from flaws and other defects. The finish
of the cellar shall be such that a sharp angle between the cellar and
the shank is avoided.
All ferrous pins, nuts & washer except those made of stainless
steel shall be galvanized. The threads of nuts & tapped holes shall
be cut after galvanizing and shall be well oiled or greased.
14.2 DIMENSIONS :
Pins shall be of small steel head type S-I as per IS : 3486 (Part – II)
having stalk length of 165 mm and shank length of 150mm with
minimum failing load of 5 KN.
14.3 TEST :
Insulator pins shall comply with the following test as per IS: 2486
(Part-I) or equivalent international standards.
14.3.1 ACCEPTANCE TEST :
a) Checking of threads on heads.
b) Galvanizing test.
c) Mechanical test.
14.3.2 ROUTINE TEST :
Visual examination test.
14.3.3 TYPE TEST :
a) Checking of threads on heads.
b) Galvanizing test.
c) Mechanical test.
d) Visual examination test.
Page 6 of 11
15. STRAIN INSULATORS SETS :
15.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS :
All forging and casting shall be of good finish and free from laws and
other defects. All edges on the outside of fittings such as at the eye,
clevis & holes, shall be rounded. All parts of different fittings which
provide for interconnection shall be made such that sufficient
clearance is provided at the connection point to ensure free
movement and suspension of the insulator string assembly. All eye
and clevis connections shall be free but the care shall be taken that
too much clearance between eye & the tongues of the clevis is
avoided.
All ferrous fittings and the parts other than those stain less
steel, shall be galvanized, small fittings like spring washers, nuts etc.
may be electroplated with zinc.
15.1.1 TYPE :
Clevis and tongue type insulator set shall be supplied, the nominal
dimensions of the clevis and tongue type insulator set shall be as
given in IS: 2486.
15.1.2 TESTS :
Strain insulator sets shall comply with the following tests as per IS:
2486 (Part – I).
15.1.2.1 TYPE TESTS :
A) Mechanical test.
B) Electrical resistance test (for tension clamps only).
C) Heating cycles test (for tension clamps only).
15.1.2.2 SAMPLE TEST :
A) Dimensional.
B) Galvanizing check electroplating test.
15.1.2.3 ROUTINE TEST :
A) Visual check.
B) Mechanical test.
15.2 STRAIN CLAMPS :
Suitable aluminum alloys clamps shall be provided alongwith the
fittings to suit ACSR conductors 7/2. 11 mm – 7/3. 35mm. The
ultimate strength of clamps should not be less than 3000 Kgs.
Page 7 of 11
16. MARKING :
16.1 The caps and clamps shall have mark on them with the following
information :
a) Name or trade mark of the manufacture.
b) Country of manufacture.
17. PACKING :
17.1 For packing of GI pins, strain clamps & related hardware, double
gunny bags or wooden cases if deemed necessary shall be
employed. The heads & threads portions of pins & the fittings shall
be properly protected against damage. The gross weight of the
packing shall not normally exceed 50 Kg. Different fittings shall be
packed in different bags or cases and shall be complete with their
minor accessories fitted in place. All nuts shall be hand tightened
over the bolts & screwed up to the farthest point.
17.2 The packages containing fittings may also be marked with the ISI
certification mark.
18. TEST & TEST CERTIFICATES :
The tenderers shall submit Photostat copies of all the tests including
type test as prescribed in the relevant ISS from any accredited
laboratory
19. GUARANTEED & OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS :
These particulars shall be furnished strictly as per Annexure –‘A’ in
duplicate. Any deviation from this specification shall be clearly
brought out separately.
20. PLACE OF MANUFACTURE :
The tender shall state the place of manufacturer, testing and name of
the manufacturer of the various items included in his Tender.
21. INSPECTION :
Inspection of material and supervision of test in accordance with the
relevant standards as mentioned in clause 2 & 13 above and
supporting drawing and schedules, and approved manufacturer
specification shall be carried out by the purchaser or his duly
authorized representative. The material shall be inspected and
tested before dispatch by an authorized representative of the
DHBVN in respect of quality. The manufacturer shall provide to the
Page 8 of 11
inspecting officer all reasonable facilities without charge to satisfy
him that the material is being furnished in accordance with the
specification.
The purchaser or his authorized representative shall have access to
all reasonable time to manufacturer’s works to inspect and witness
the test of the equipment manufactured.
The purchaser has the right to have the tests carried out at the cost
of supplier by an independent Govt. agency wherever there is a
dispute regarding the quality of material supplied.
The manufacturer shall be responsible to pay penalty of Rs
20,000/- for each occasion at which the fake inspection call has
been made or the material is rejected during testing/inspection
by the authorized agency/representative of the Nigam. This
penalty would be in addition to the expenses incurred by the
Nigam in deputing the Inspecting Officer, carrying out such
inspection.
22. Challenge Clause:-
The material offered/received after the inspection by the authorized
inspecting officer may again be subjected to the test for or any
parameter from any testing house/in-house technique of the Nigam &
the results if found deviating un-acceptable or not complying to
approved GTPs the bidder shall arrange to supply the replacement
within thirty (30) days of such detection at his cost including to & fro
transportation. In addition , penalty @10% of cost of the inspected lot
of material shall be imposed.
23. Warranty Period:-
The supplier shall be responsible to replace, free of cost, with no
transportation or insurance cost to the purchaser, up to destination,
the whole or any part to the material which in normal and proper use
proves the defective in quality or workmanship, subject to the
condition that the defect is noticed within 18 months from the date of
receipt of material in stores or 12 months from the date of
commissioning whichever period may expire earlier. The consignee
or nay other officer of Nigam actually using the material will give
Page 9 of 11
prompt notice of each such defect to the supplier. The replacement
shall be effected by the supplier within a reasonable time, but not, in
any case, exceeding 45 days. The supplier shall, also, arrange to
remove the defective within a reasonable period, but not exceeding
45 days from the date of issue of notice in respect thereof, failing
which, the purchaser reserve the right to dispose of defective
material in any manner considered fit by him (purchaser), at the sole
risk and cost of the supplier. Any sale proceeds of the defective
material after meeting the expenses incurred on its custody, disposal
handling etc., shall however be credited to the supplier’s account and
set off against any outstanding dues of the purchaser against the
supplier. The warranty for 12/18 months shall be one time.
Director/Technical-I, UHBNV, Panchkula
Director/Project,DHBVN, Hisar
CGM/PD&C, UHBVN, Panchkula
CGM/P&D, DHBVN, Hisar.
FA & CAO/MM, UHBNV, Panchkula
FA & CAO/MM, DHBVN, Hisar
GM/P&D, UHBNV, Panchkula
GM/P&D, DHBVN, Hisar
Page 10 of 11
ANNEXURE –A
GURANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF PORCELAIN INSULATORS FOR 11 KV OVERHEAD POWER LINE :
1. Maker’s name and country.
2. Nominal voltage.
3. Highest voltage.
4. Dry one minute power frequencies withstand voltage.
5. Wet Dry one minute power frequencies withstand voltage.
6. Power frequencies withstand voltage.
7. Impulse withstand voltage (1/50 second positive waves ).
8. Visible discharge test voltage.
9. Impulse flashover voltage (1/50 micro second positive waves).
10. Impulse flashover voltage (1/50 micro second negative waves).
11. Dry flashover voltage.
12. Wet flashover voltage.
13. Min. failing load.
14. Minimum creepage distance.
15. Weight per unit.
16. Size of insulators.
17. Standard to which the insulator shall be manufactured and tested.
18. Tolerance in dimensions, if any.
Page 11 of 11
UTTAR & DAKSHIN HARYANA BIJLI VITRAN NIGAM
C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Desktop\14-12-09\PDC\CSC-XXV to XXXI\CSC-XXVIII.docPage 1 of 8
Specification No. CSC- /DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
OF
“11 kV 400 A GO SWITCHES”
Issue Month: Common Specifications
Committee UHBVN & DHBVN
UTTAR & DAKSHIN HARYANA BIJLI VITRAN NIGAM
C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Desktop\14-12-09\PDC\CSC-XXV to XXXI\CSC-XXVIII.docPage 2 of 8
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR 11 kV 400 A GANG OPERATED SWITCHES
1. SCOPE This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing at manufacturer’s works of supply & delivery of 11KV 400 A G.O. switches complete with manually operated equipment and accessories required for their satisfactory operation for their use on distribution sub-station and tapping/sectionalizing points of 11 KV lines.
2. APPLICABLE STANDARDS & DESCRIPTION i) All material used for manufacturing 11 KV G.O. Switches i.e. 11 KV Post
Insulators, G.I.Pipe, MS Channel, Brass Male/Female contacts & Arcing Horns shall comply with the Indian Standard Specification IS: 2544, IS: 5340 (Part-III) and IS: 9921 (Part I to V). However, Material manufactured as per any other international standard offering material, quality and workmanship of equivalence or better shall also be acceptable. The detailed description of equipment shall be as under:
ii) 11 KV, 400 Amps, triple pole gang operated, outdoor type, single throw, single
break tilting type manually operated. Air Break Switches, suitable for vertical mounting on structures 6 meters above ground level fitted with 2 no. 11 KV Post Insulators per phase, i.e. 6 no. Post Insulators per switch of standard make conforming to latest versions of IS-2544 & IS-5350 (Part-III) complete with fixed & moving contacts base of gun metal cast/, duly electroplated and jaw (U) fixed with spring able strips. The movable contacts i.e. blades will be made of gunmetal/brass/copper casting, duly electroplated. Multi-bolt type clamps of non-ferrous metal will be provided for incoming and outgoing connections. Fixed and moving contacts complete with G.I. Arcing horns fitted on 11KV Post Insulators will be mounted on suitable MS Channel (Vertical). Phase coupler bar will be of 32mm diameter galvanized iron pipe. Operating rod shall be of 25 mm inner diameter and 32 mm outer diameter G. I. Pipe having free length of 5100 mm excluding the length of handle. The sizes of rods used for arcing horns would be 2 SWG M.S. The complete equipment shall be as per latest version of IS-9921 (Part-I to V). MS Channel, C.I. casting for lever and side plates are to be hot dipped Galvanized as per relevant ISS. All other ferrous parts including nuts, bolts and washers are to be hot dipped galvanized. All Current carrying nuts, bolts and washers are to be hot dipped galvanized. The equipment supplied shall also conform to detailed specification with guaranteed technical particulars and approved drawings attached herewith.
3. PARTICULARS OF SYSTEM. The switches shall be used on three-phase 11 KV 50 Hz A.C. Power system having solidly grounded neutral.
4. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS: The equipment/material to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory operation under the following climatic Conditions
i) Location At various locations in the state of Haryana
ii) Max ambient temperature (deg.c) - 60 iii) Min ambient air temperature (deg. c) -5 iv) Max average daily ambient temperature
(deg. c) 40
UTTAR & DAKSHIN HARYANA BIJLI VITRAN NIGAM
C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Desktop\14-12-09\PDC\CSC-XXV to XXXI\CSC-XXVIII.docPage 3 of 8
v) Max. yearly weighed average ambient temperature (deg. C)
32
vi) Max. altitude above mean sea level (Meters)
1000
vii) Minimum Relative Humidity (%age ) 26 viii) Max. Relative Humidity (%age) 95 ix) Avg. no of Rainy days/ year 120 x) Avg. annual rainfall 900mm xi) Maximum wind pressure 195 Kg./m2
The equipment shall be for use in moderately hot and humid tropical climate, conducive to rust and fungus growth.
5. Rating Nominal system voltage 12 KV Rated voltage 11 KV Rated current 400 Amps. Rated Frequency 50 HZ Peak current in closed position. 46 KA One minute power frequency withstand voltage between
I) Earth & poles 28 KV (rms) ii) Across terminal of open switch. 32 KV (rms)
Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage between
I) Poles & Earth. 75 KV (Peak) ii) Across terminal of open switch. 85 KV (Peak)
Min. short time current 18.42 KA for 1 second.
6. SWITCH INSULATION Insulation to ground, insulation between open contacts and insulation between phases of the completely assembled G.O. Switches shall be capable of withstanding the dielectric test voltages specified in IS-9921-Part-IV. Insulation between open contacts of a pole shall at least be 15 % more than the insulation between the live parts of pole to ground, so that If any flash- over occurs when switch is open, it shall be to the ground. All insulators provided to form a stack shall conform to the relevant Indian Standard Specifications. The porcelain shall be homogeneous and free from all cavities and flaws. Design of insulators shall ensure ample insulation, mechanical strength and rigidity for satisfactory operation under site conditions. The design shall also ensure that the losses caused by capacitive current or conduction through dielectric are minimum and that leakage due to moist and dirty insulators surfaces is least. All metal caps and supports shall be cemented to the porcelain whereas the blades and contact blocks shall be bolted to the metal parts of the insulators thus making the replacement of damaged insulators easy. All ferrous metal parts, flanges, bolts and nuts etc. shall be galvanized. The porcelain post insulators should be from the leading manufacturers like LAMCO, CGL, OBLEM, ELPRO, Raychem RPG, WS, Jayashree, only.
7. G.O. SWITCH OPERATION AND OPERATING MECHANISM The switches shall be suitable for local manual operation. The Operating mechanism shall comprise of operating pipe with intermediate couplings and manual operating handle. Height of operating handle may vary from 1000 to 1300mm. The operating mechanism shall give good mechanical leverage with minimum loose/lost motions. There shall be suitable pad-locking arrangement for both ‘ON and OFF’ positions.
UTTAR & DAKSHIN HARYANA BIJLI VITRAN NIGAM
C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Desktop\14-12-09\PDC\CSC-XXV to XXXI\CSC-XXVIII.docPage 4 of 8
8. BEARING Graded cast rocking type levers supported on side plates/fabricated type as per drawings. Bearing housing shall be weather proof and facilities shall be provided for easy lubrication.
9. PACKING & TRANSPORTATION. The supplier shall be responsible for suitable packing of all the material and marking on the consignment to ensure correct dispatch to the destination. All G.O. Switches shall be packed suitably capable of withstanding rough handling for transportation to the various consignees so as to avoid any shortage and damage occurring during transit. Separators shall be fixed between the post insulators and other breakable parts of GO Switch and also between individual GO Switches so as to prevent relative movement to avoid damage. All the labels used on each packing shall be of tin securely bounded with wire and shall have the descriptive marking stamped thereon. All GO Switches damaged during transportation shall be to the suppliers account.
10. DESIGN FEATURE
10.1 Contact System
The male and female contacts assemblies shall be of sturdy construction and design to ensure
I. Electro dynamic withstand ability during short circuits. II. Thermal withstand-ability during short circuits. III. Constant contact pressure even when the live parts of the insulator stacks are
subject to tensile stresses due to linear expansion of connected bus bar of flexible conductors either because of temperature variation or strong winds.
IV. Self-wiping action during closing and opening. V. Self-alignment assuring closing of the switch without calling for any
adjustment.
10.2 Temperature Rise Maximum temperature attained by any part of the isolating switches when in service at site under continuous and exposed continuously to the direct rays of sun and the air having temperature of 60 degree centigrade shall not exceed the permissible limits fixed by latest edition IS-9921 (Part-I to V). Maximum temperature rise under the above noted condition should not exceed the permissible limits when corrected for the difference between ambient temperature at site and the reference ambient temperature in IS-9921 (Part-I to V).
10.2.1 Arcing horns
A set of adjustable arcing horns made from 2 SWG G. I. Wire shall be mounted on each insulator stack of G.O. Switch. The supplier shall supply a graph showing impulse and power frequency spark over voltage for various gap settings of arcing horns.
11. CURRENT CARRYING PARTS All current carrying parts shall be of non-ferrous metal or alloys and shall be designed to limit sharp points/edges. Design of isolating contacts shall permit easy maintenance and renewal of contacts.
12. NAME PLATES The switches shall be provided with a nameplate, which contains the information in accordance with IS-9921 (part I to V). The name plates will be weather and rust proof.
UTTAR & DAKSHIN HARYANA BIJLI VITRAN NIGAM
C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Desktop\14-12-09\PDC\CSC-XXV to XXXI\CSC-XXVIII.docPage 5 of 8
13. COMPLETENESS OF EQUIPMENT All fittings, accessories or apparatus which may not have been specially mentioned in this specification but which are otherwise necessary for satisfactory working of G.O. switches shall be deemed to have been included in the scope of supply.
14. TYPE TESTS The principle components of G.O switches shall be Type Tested as per relevant clauses of IS-9921 (part-I to V) or latest version there of. Two sets of copies of Type Test certificates carried out only at CPRI, ERDA, NPL or any other Govt. of India approved lab / testing house shall be accepted. Further type tests carried out from the said testing houses on similar equipment, not earlier than 3 years on date of opening of bids shall be acceptable. Bids not accompanied with copies of Type Test certificates from CPRI, ERDA, NPL or any other Govt. of India approved lab / testing house, are liable to be rejected. The firm shall state the testing facilities available at their works.
The following shall comprise type tests. (a) Tests to verify the insulation level, including withstand tests at power-
frequency voltage on auxiliary equipment. (b) Tests to prove that the temperature rise of any part does not exceed the
limits.
(c) Tests to prove the capability of the disconnector or earthing Switch to carry the rated peak withstand current and the rated short-time withstands current.
(d) Tests to prove the short circuit making capacity of earthing switches. (e) Tests to prove satisfactory operation and mechanical endurance.
15. ROUTINE TESTS Routine tests as per latest edition of IS-9921 (part-I to V) shall be carried out at works of the manufacturer.
The following shall comprise Routine tests:- (a) Power frequency voltage dry test. (b) Measurement of the resistance of the main circuit. (c) Operating test.
Copies of Routine test certificates shall be supplied along with the acceptance tests carried out in the presence of purchaser’s authorized representative. All tests reports shall be submitted and shall be got approved by the purchaser or his authorized representative before dispatch.
16. INSPECTION Testing and inspection of material in accordance with the relevant ISS as mentioned in clause ‘Applicable standards’ above and as per drawings approved by the purchaser, shall be carried out by the purchaser or his duly authorised representative at works of the manufacturers. The manufacturer shall provide to the inspecting officer all reasonable facilities without charge to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance with the specification. The purchaser or his authorised representative shall have access at all reasonable times to manufacturer’s works to inspect and witness the tests of the equipment manufactured.
UTTAR & DAKSHIN HARYANA BIJLI VITRAN NIGAM
C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Desktop\14-12-09\PDC\CSC-XXV to XXXI\CSC-XXVIII.docPage 6 of 8
The purchaser has the right to have the tests carried out at the cost of the supplier by an independent Govt. agency, wherever there is a dispute regarding the quality of material supplied.
17. Drawings The bidder shall submit two sets of detailed dimensional drawing indicating there in the material used for various components. Manufacture of material shall not be commenced before receipt of approved drawings from the purchaser. Material not complying with dimensional drawings shall be rejected.
18. Guaranteed Technical Particulars Guaranteed Technical Particulars as detailed in Annexure – I shall be submitted along with the Tender. Tenders with out accompanying GTP’S shall not be accepted.
19. GUARANTEE / WARRANTEE
The supplier shall be responsible to replace, free of cost, with no transportation or insurance cost to the Purchaser, up to destination, the whole or any part of the material which in normal and proper use proves the defective in quality or workmanship, subject to the condition that the defect is noticed within 18 months from the date of receipt of material in stores OR 12 months from the date of commissioning whichever period may expire earlier. The consignee or any other officer of Nigam actually using the material will give prompt notice of each such defect to the supplier. The replacement shall be effected by the supplier within a reasonable time, but not, in any case, exceeding 45 days. The supplier shall, also, arrange to remove the defective within a reasonable period, but not exceeding 45 days from the date of issue of notice in respect thereof, failing which, the purchaser reserve the right to dispose of defective material in any manner considered fit by him (Purchaser), at the sole risk and cost of the supplier. Any sale proceeds of the defective material after meeting the expenses incurred on its custody, disposal handling etc., shall however be credited to the supplier’s account and set off against any outstanding dues of the purchaser against the supplier. The warranty for 12/18 months shall be one time.
20. CHALLENGE CLAUSEThe material offered/received after the inspection by the authorized inspecting officer may again be subjected to the test for losses or any other parameter from any Testing House/in-house technique of the Nigam & the results if found deviating un-acceptable or not complying to approved GTP's the bidder shall arrange to supply the replacement within thirty (30) days of such detection at his cost including to & fro transportation. In addition to this penalty @10% of cost of the inspected lot of material shall be imposed. This issues with the approval of Common Specifications Committee. General Manager/P&D Cum-Member Secretary CSC UHBVN Panchkula
UTTAR & DAKSHIN HARYANA BIJLI VITRAN NIGAM
C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Desktop\14-12-09\PDC\CSC-XXV to XXXI\CSC-XXVIII.docPage 7 of 8
Annexure-I GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 11KV, 400 Amps G.O. SWITCHES
G.O. SWITCHES:-
1. Name of manufacturer
2. No. of breaks per pole.
3. No. of poles
4. Rated voltage
5. Rated frequency
6. Rated current
7. Minimum short time current (KA for 1sec.)
8. Max. temp. rise of contacts
9. Material of moving contact
10. Material of arcing horns
11. Material and size of operation handle & rod
12. Size of base channels
13. Type of bearings.
14. Minimum clearance between phases
15. Minimum clearance between phases & earth.
16. 1.2/50 microsecond Impulse withstand voltage
i) Across isolating distance
ii) Between poles and earth.
17. One minute power frequency withstand voltage
(B) POST INSULATORS
18. Name of manufacturer
19. Type of insulators
20. Height of the insulator:
21. Creepage distance (Min.)
22. Weight of each unit
UTTAR & DAKSHIN HARYANA BIJLI VITRAN NIGAM
C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Desktop\14-12-09\PDC\CSC-XXV to XXXI\CSC-XXVIII.docPage 8 of 8
23. Flash over voltage:
(i) Dry power frequency
(ii) Wet power frequency
(iii) Impulse withstand voltage of 1.2/50 micro seconds(+ve)
(iv) Impulse withstand voltage of 1.2/50 micro seconds(-ve)
24. Withstand voltages
(i) Power frequency one minute dry withstand voltage
(ii) Power frequency one minute impulse wet withstand voltage
(iii) Impulse withstand voltage micro seconds (+ve polarity)
(iv) Impulse withstand voltage of 1.2/50 micro seconds (-ve polarity)
25. Power frequency puncture withstand voltage of unit
26. Cantilever strength upright position
27. Cantilever strength in under hung position
Tensile strength Name of Signatory with stamp
Subject: Amendment in Technical Specification of 11 kV 400 A GANG OPERATED SWITCHES
Sr. No. Clause No. Existing Amended
1. 6. SWITCH
INSULATION
The porcelain post insulators should be from the leading manufacturers like LAMCO, CGL, OBLEM, ELPRO, Raychem RPG, WS, Jayashree, only
The porcelain post insulators should be of any make , however , separate type test for 11 kV post insulator shall have to be supplied by the supplier in addition to the overall type test being submitted for GO switch as a complete unit
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 1
TECHNICALSPECIFICATION FOR
11 KV LIGHTNING ARRESTOR.
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR 11 KV LIGHTNING
ARRESTER FOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 5 KA, SERIES “B”. 1.
SCOPE :
This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing, inspection at
manufacturer’s works & delivery of 11 KV lightning arrestors.
2.
APPLICABLE STANDARDS :
The material shall conform in all respects to the relevant IEC standards with latest amendments thereof. The bidder shall use ISS where corresponding IEC is not available. However, where both the standards are available, IEC will be used. IEC or other National Standards are permitted where these are equivalent or superior to IEC. In such cases salient points of difference between the standards adopted and the IEC standards shall be clearly brought out in the relevant schedule Four copies of such standards with authentic English translation shall be finished alongwith the offer.
3.
CLIMATIC CONDITIONS :
The equipment is required to operate satisfactorily under the following
site conditions :
TEMPERATURE :
A) Maximum temperature of air 50 Degree C B) Minimum temperature of air -2.5 Degree C.
RELATIVE HUMIDITY :
A) Maximum 100% B) Minimum 26% Isoceraunic Level 45
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 3
Average rainfall per year 900 mm Altitude Below 1000 M. Above sea level. Maximum wind pressure 150 Kg./Sq.m. No. of rainy days per year Nearly 4 months In a year.
4.
TECHNICAL PARTICULARS :
The Lightning Arrestors shall be of Metal Oxide Gapless type suitable
for outdoor installation on 11000 volts, 50 cycles per ;second, 3 phase
A.C. system with neutral solidly grounded. The highest line to line
system voltage should be 12.0 KV (rms) and other particulars are as
under :
A) Voltage rating in KV RMS 9 KV rms.
B) Nominal discharge current rating 5 KVA.
C) Maximum residual test voltage specified 34 KV peak with
8/20 micro second
current waves.
5.
DRAWINGS :
The tendered along with tender, should offer dimensional drawings and
illustrated descriptive literature of the equipment.
6.
TESTS :
The type routine and acceptance as per IS : 3010 (Part-III)/IEC Ch-4
(1991) with latest version thereof shall be carried out.
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 4
7.
INSPECTION :
The material shall be inspected and tested before despatch by an
authorized representative of the Nigam in respect of quality. The
manufacturer shall provide the necessary facilities for such inspection.
In case the supplier is not in a position to get these test carried out at
his works, such tests may be got carried out by him at any Govt.
recognized testing agency at his own expense.
8.
TEST CERTIFICATES :
The supplier shall supply certificates as per IS –3070/99 –4 with latest
amendment thereof from a recognized Government agency for
approval of the purchaser.
9.
MARKING :
Each lightning arrestor shall be provided with a name plate or plae
legibly and indelibly marked with the name or trade mark of the
manufacturer and country of Manufacture rated voltage, nominal
discharge current, type destination and serial number of the Lightning
Arrestor, identification mark on each separately housed unit to enable
it to be replaced in correct position after a multi unit arrestor has been
dismantled should also be marked ISI certification mark may also be
marked.
10.
GUARANTEED & TECHNICAL PARTICULARS :
The ;tenderers shall supply the relevant information and technical
particulars called for in the schedule of guaranteed and technical
particulars as per Annexure –‘A’.
11.
QUALITY ASSURANCE :
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 5
To ensure that the goods/equipment under the scope of this contract
whether manufactured at the bidder’s works or at its sub-contractor’s
premises or at any other place of work are manufactured following
Quality Assurance Program. Such programs shall be outlined by the
bidder and shall be submitted along with the bid. A quality assurance
program of the bidder submitted by the bidder must cover the
following.
11.1 The bidder’s organization structure for the management and
implementation of the proposed quality assurance program.
11.2 Documentation control system.
11.3 Qualification data of key personnel.
11.4 The procedure for purchase of material parts, components and
selection of sub-contractor including vendor analysis, source
inspection, incoming raw materials inspection, verification of materials
purchased etc.
11.5 A quality plan detailing out the specific quality control procedure
adopted or controlling the quality of equipment during manufacturing.
11.6 System of quality audits.
12.
QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM :
The quality assurance program shall be discussed with the successful
bidder after the award of the contract and the final version mutually
agreed between the purchaser and the bidder shall form a part of the
Contract Agreement signed between the purchaser and the bidder.
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 6
ANNEXURE –A
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS.
1. Rated Lightning Arresters Voltage.
2. Rated Lightning Arresters Current.
3. Maximum continuous operating voltage.
4. Maximum residual voltage with 8/20 microsecond wave at
2.5 KA
5.0 KA
10.0 KA
1. High current short duration withstand current ( .4/10 microsecond
wave)
2. Maximum energy discharge capability.
3. Maximum steep current impulse Residual Voltage at 5 KA
discharge current.
4. One minute power frequency withstand voltage for arrester
housing.
a. Dry
b. Wet
5. Total creepage distance of arrester.
6. Temporary over voltage withstand capability.
0.1 second.
1.0 second.
10.0 second.
DAKSHIN HARYANA BIJ LI VITRAN NIGAM
Office of the Chief General Manager/P&D, Vidyut Sadan, Vidyut Nagar, His ar-125005
Tel: 01662-221285, 221830 (GM/P&D) Fax: 01662-220481
Technica l Spec ifica tion
For
GALVANISED STEEL BARBED WIRE Chief General Manager / P&D, DHBVN, His ar
Is s ue of the Month: Page 94 of 129
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR GALVANISED STEEL BARBED WIRE
1. SCOPE: This Specification covers the manufacture, testing & inspecting of galvanised steel barbed wire (glidden type) formed with 2 line wires twisted together, one containing the barbs.
2. APPLICABLE STANDARD: Except when they conflict with the specific requirements in this specification, the conductors shall comply in all respect with the Indian standard specification No. IS: 278 (1978) & 4826 (1979) or the latest version thereof.
3. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS: The Barbed wire is required to work satisfactorily under the
following climatic conditions:- 0
3.1 Max. temperature 50 C
3.2 Min. temperature - 2.5 C 3.3 Max. relative humidity 100%
0
3.4 Min. relative humidity 26%
3.5 Average number of rainy days Nearly Nearly 120 days.
3.6 Average annual rain fall 900 mm
3.7 Average number of dust storms days per annum 35
3.8 Isoceraunic level 45
3.9 Max. wind pressure; 195 Kg/ Sq meter.
3.10 Altitude above mean sea level less than Less than 1000 Mtrs.
4. TECHNICAL PARTICULAR: (i) Nominal dia meter of line wire:
(ii) Nominal dia meter of point wire:
(iii) Nominal distane between two barbs:
(iv) Weight of completed barbed wire:
(v) Tensile strength of wire
(vi) Minimum breaking load of completed Barbed wire
2.24 mm + 0.08 mm
2.00 mm + 0.08 mm
75 mm + 12 mm
Max. 106 g/M
Min. 97 g/m
40 to 60 Kg f/mm
300 Kgf.
5. TESTS : The tests as per IS:278/1978 including the tests for chemical analysis provided therein shall be carried out.
The uniformity of zinc coating sPhagell1b19 otfe4s6t6ed as specified in IS: 4826-1979.
6. TEST CERTIFICATE: The supplier shall supply one set of certificates from recognized govt. agency in respect of quality as per IS: 278-1979 with latest amendments for approval of the purchaser.
7. MARKING: Each coil of barbed wire shall be legibly marked with the name of the manufacturer, the type of the barbed wire, the diameter of the line & point wire/barb spacing and length & weight of the coil. Barbed wire may also be marked with IST certification mark.
8. INSPECTION: All tests & inspection shall be made at the place of manufacture unless otherwise especially agreed upon by the manufacturer and the purchaser at the time of purchase. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector /representing of the purchaser all reasonable facilities, without charge, to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance with this specification. The purchaser or his authorised representative shall have access at all reasonable times to manufacturer’s works to inspect & witness tests of the conductor being manufactured. As regards correctness of the length of galvanized steel barbed wire, the same is subject final checking and measurement by the consignee & the firm shall be responsible for all shortages, damages etc, if any.
9. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS : Guaranteed technical particulars of the barbed wire should be given in the Annexure ‘A’ attached herewith the specification. Any other particulars considered necessary by the supplier may also be given in addition to these listed in the Annexure.
10. PACKING & WEIGHT OF COIL: The barbed wire shall be supply in coils weighting 15 Kgs to 30 Kgs.
** Page 120 of 466
Annexure ‘A’
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF GALVANISED STEEL BARBED WIRE
1. Code word.
2. Maker’s name address & country
3. Nominal dia meter of line wire
4. Nominal distance between two barbs:
5. Tensile strength of wire.
6. Minimum breaking load of barbed wire.
7. Weight of complete barbed wire.
8. Nominal dia meter of point wire.
9. Standard length.
10. Tolerance, if any.
11. Standard to which confirm. i)
Galvanising.
ii) Barbed wire.
12. Other particulars, if any.
_______________________________________________________________________
Page 1 of 10
Specification No. CSC- 55/DH/UH/P&D/2010-2011
TEHNCIAL SPECIFICATION
FOR
HT AERIAL BUNCHED CABLE
WITH
XLPE INSULATION
Issue Month: Sep. 2010 Common Specifications Committee
UHBVN &DHBVN
_______________________________________________________________________
Page 2 of 10
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR X-LINKED POLYPTHYLENE INSULATED
AND PVC SHEATHED H.T. AERIAL BUNCHED CABLES.
1. SCOPE:
This specification covers manufacture, testing before dispatch, supply and
delivery of ISI marked, 11 KV grade XLPE insulated screened all Aluminium
conductor and PVC sheathed power cables conforming to IS-7098 (Part-
Ii)/1985 with up to date amendments, suitable for solidly earthed system
manufactured with dry cure technology (Nitrogen gas i.e with inert gas
curing during using CCV system or with STOPLAS).
2. APPLICABLE STANDARDS
The cable covered under this specification shall conform in all respect with
the latest editions of IS-14255: 1995, IS:7098 (Part-II)/1985, IS-398 (part-4)
1979, IS:10810(series)& IS: 8130-1984 or IEC equivalent thereof. The
aluminium conductor complying to IS: 8130-1984 shall be used.
3. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS:
The material to be supplied against this specification shall be
suitable for satisfactory operation under the following climatic Conditions
i) Location At various locations in the state of
Haryana ii) Maximum ambient temperature (oC) 60 iii) Minimum ambient air temperature (oC) -5 iv) Maximum average daily ambient temperature
(oC) 40
v) Maximum yearly weighed average ambient temperature (oC)
32
vi) Maximum altitude above mean sea level (m) 1000 vii) Minimum Relative Humidity (%) 26 viii) Maximum Relative Humidity (%) 95 ix) Average no of Rainy days/ year 120 x) Average annual rainfall 900 mm xi) Maximum wind pressure 195 kg/m sq.
The material shall be for use in moderately hot and humid tropical
climate, conducive to rust and fungus growth
4. CONDUCTORS:
The Aluminium conductors shall comply with the requirements as specified
in IS-8130-1984 with up to date amendments. The stranded conductor
shall be clean and reasonably uniform in size and shape and its surface
shall be free from sharp edges. Not more than two joints shall be allowed in
any of the wires form and every complete length of conductor and no joint
shall be within 300 mm of any other joint in the same layer. Joints shall be
brazed, silver soldered or electric or gas welded. No joint shall be made in
the conductor once, it has been stranded.
_______________________________________________________________________
Page 3 of 10
5. INSULATION:
The insulation shall be chemically cross linked polyethylene conforming to
the physical, electrical and ageing properties as required in the
specification, cross-linking may be done by exposure to organize peroxide
with nitrogen curing CCV line, method with the intention to ensure lowest
free formation. Only natural unfilled compound shall be used for insulation
of cables. The average thickness of insulation when measured in
accordance with relevant clause of the specification shall not be less than
the standard thickness value specified. The smallest of the measured
values of thickness shall not fall below the standard thickness values as
specified in IS:7098 (Part-II) / 1985 by more than 0.1+0.1 standard
thickness in mm.
6. SCREENING:
The screening of insulated cables shall consist of conductor screening and
insulation screening.
i) Screening materials:
Two types of materials may be used for screening of cables non-metallic
and metallic.
ii) Conductor screening:
Conductor screening shall be non-metallic and shall consist of either semi-
conducting compound or a layer of extruded-semi-conducting linked
ploythine compound of thickness not less than 0.5mm.
iii) Insulation screening:
The insulation screening shall consist of non-metallic semi-conducting part
in combination with a metallic part. Non-metallic part shall be applied either
directly over the insulation of each core and shall consist of either a semi-
conducing tape or a layer of extruded semi-conducting compound or a
combination of these materials.
iv) Metallic Screening
The metallic part shall be applied over the individual core. Metallic
screening shall consist of copper tape sheath and shall be non-magnetic
when applied to either in single core or multi-core cables. For single core
cables, armouring shall constitute the metallic part of the screening.
7. OUTER SHEATH:
Over the armouring the cable shall be provided with extruded PVC outer
sheath. The composition of the PVC compound for outer sheath shall be
Pre-Type ST2 of IS-5831-1984. The colour of the outer sheath shall be
black. The average thickness of the sheath shall not be less than the
standard values specified in the IS when measured as laid in IS-7098 (Part-
II) / 1985. The smallest thickness of the measured values of sheath shall
_______________________________________________________________________
Page 4 of 10
not fall below the standard value, (s) specified, by more than 0.2+0.2 (ts)
mm.
8. CORE IDENTIFICATION:
The core identification shall be done by providing coloured strip under
Copper Tape.
9. MESSENGER WIRE:
Messenger wire, shall consist of Aluminium alloy wires. Aluminium alloy
wires, shall be as per IS:398 (Part-IV) / 1978 and wing shall be tested as
per relevant IS.
10. LAYING UP:
Three Power Cores shall be twisted over bare messenger wire with right
hand direction of lay. This will form the Aerial Bunched Cable.
11. TESTS:
11.1 Copies of the type test certificates in respect of all the type-tests as per
IS:7098 (Part-2) / 1985 for similar type of XLPE cables, from any
Government recognized testing labs shall be submitted along with the
tender.
11.1.2 LIST OF TYPE TESTS:
a) TESTS ON CONDUCTOR:
i) Tensile test (for Aluminium)
ii) Wrapping test (for Aluminium)
iii) Resistance test
b) Test for thickness of insulation and sheath.
c) Physical tests for insulation.
i) Tensile strength and elongation at break.
ii) Ageing in air oven.
iii) Hot test.
iv) Shrinkage test.
v) Water absorption (Gravimetric)
d) Physical tests for outer sheath:-
i) Tensile strength and elongation at break.
ii) Ageing in air oven.
iii) Shrinkage test.
iv) Hot deformation.
e) Bleeding and blooming test (for outer sheath).
f) Partial discharge test.
g) Bending test.
h) Dielectric power factor test:
i) As a function of voltage
ii) As a function of temperature
_______________________________________________________________________
Page 5 of 10
i) Insulation resistance (Volume resistivity) test.
j) Heating cycle test.
k) Impulse withstand test.
l) High voltage test.
m) Flammability test
11.2 List of type test for messenger wire: a) Breaking load test on individual Aluminium Alloy wire.
b) Resistance test.
c) Elongation test.
12.2. ACCEPTANCE TESTS:
The following shall be carried out as acceptance tests:
a) Tensile test (for Aluminium)
b) Wrapping test (for Aluminium)
c) Conductor resistance test.
d) Test for thickness of insulation and sheath.
e) Partial discharge test (for screened cables only)
f) High voltage test.
g) Hot set test for insulator.
h) Tensile strength and elongation at break test for insulation and sheath.
i) Insulation resistance (Volume resistively) test
13. ROUTINE TESTS:
The following shall be carried out as routine tests:
a) Conductor resistance test (for Aluminium and copper)
b) Partial discharge test (for screened cables only)
c) High voltage test.
Type test / acceptance test / routine tests and or other test required as per
relevant Indian Standard shall be got conducted.
14. INSPECTION:
An authorized representative of the Nigam shall inspect, examine and test
the equipment/material in respect of quality, size and ratings as per relevant
ISS/IEC with latest amendments at the manufacturers’ works during or after
the manufacture of goods prior to dispatch on receipt of a clear notice of
minimum two weeks in advance to be reckoned from the date of receipt of
the same by the purchaser. No material will be allowed to be dispatched
without prior inspection and approval. The inspecting officer of the
purchaser may also inspect the material during the course of manufacture.
In case, inspection of any consignment is waived off by the purchaser, the
supplier will be required to furnish the requisite test certificates (for
acceptance as well as routine tests) for approval. It will be the responsibility
of the supplier to make adequate arrangements for testing of material at
_______________________________________________________________________
Page 6 of 10
their works without any additional charge to the purchaser. All testing
instruments and appliances will be made available and material
destroyed/consumed during testing will be to the account of the supplier.
The purchase reserves the right to carry out Type Test as per Indian
Standard Specifications with latest version thereof. These tests will be
carried out at an Independent & recognized test house/agency/laboratory.
All expenses whatsoever for carrying out these tests shall be to the
supplier’s account. The purchaser has the right to have the tests carried
out at any Govt./Recognized Test agency in case of dispute in quality, size
and ratings as per relevant ISS.
15 FAKE INSPECTION CALLS
In case the supplier makes a fake inspection call i.e., the material is not
found ready by the Inspecting Officer deputed by the Nigam for inspection,
the supplier shall be liable to pay the expenses incurred by the Nigam on
this account subject to minimum of a fixed penalty of Rs. 20,000/- for each
such fake call made by him.
16. GUARANTEE / WARRANTEE
The supplier shall be responsible to replace, free of cost, with no
transportation or insurance cost to the Purchaser, up to destination, the
whole or any part of the material which in normal and proper use proves the
defective in quality or workmanship, subject to the condition that the defect
is noticed within 78 months from the date of receipt of material in stores or
72 months from the date of commissioning whichever period may expire
earlier. The consignee or any other officer of Nigam actually using the
material will give prompt notice of each such defect to the supplier. The
replacement shall be effected by the supplier within a reasonable time, but
not, in any case, exceeding 45 days. The supplier shall, also, arrange to
remove the defective within a reasonable period, but not exceeding 45 days
from the date of issue of notice in respect thereof, failing which, the
purchaser reserve the right to dispose of defective material in any manner
considered fit by him (Purchaser), at the sole risk and cost of the supplier.
Any sale proceeds of the defective material after meeting the expenses
incurred on its custody, disposal handling etc., shall however be credited to
the supplier’s account and set off against any outstanding dues of the
purchaser against the supplier. The warranty for 72/78 months shall be one
time.
17. SEQUENTIAL MARKING:
Supplier shall provide non erasable sequential marking on one core of AB
Cable at every one metre distance before assembly of different cores to
_______________________________________________________________________
Page 7 of 10
form the cable. However, the length of cable for acceptance shall be based
on length of finished cable and not on the basis of sequential marks.
18. PACKING & MARKING:
The cable shall be supplied in suitable non-returnable wooden drums of
suitable size in standard lengths subject to a tolerance of +/- 5%. The cable
shall be wrapped with polythene under wooden covering. Each meter
length shall be embossed with the trade name of manufacturer and the
work “UHBVN CABLE”.
The ends of the cable shall be sealed by means of non-hygroscopic sealing
material. In addition to this each drum shall carry the following information
either stenciled on flange or label attached to it.
a) Manufacturer’s name.
b) Trade mark, if any.
c) A reference to ISS i.e. IS-7098 (Part-II) / 1985.
d) Length of the cable on the drum.
e) Voltage grade and type of the cable.
f) Colour of outer sheath.
g) Nominal cross-sectional area of the cable conductor.
h) Purchase order No. & Date.
i) Name and address of consignee.
j) Number of cores.
k) Gross weight of packed and net weight of the power cable.
l) Drum No. & its direction of rotation (with an arrow)
m) Year of manufacture.
n). ISI MARK. ISI mark cable shall be preferred.
19 FAKE INSPECTION CALLS
In case the supplier makes a fake inspection call i.e., the material is not
found ready by the Inspecting Officer deputed by the Nigam for inspection,
the supplier shall be liable to pay the expenses incurred by the Nigam on
this account subject to minimum of a fixed penalty of Rs. 20,000/- for each
such fake call made by him.
20. GUARANTEE / WARRANTEE
The supplier shall be responsible to replace, free of cost, with no
transportation or insurance cost to the Purchaser, up to destination, the
whole or any part of the material which in normal and proper use proves the
defective in quality or workmanship, subject to the condition that the defect
is noticed within 78 months from the date of receipt of material in stores or
72 months from the date of commissioning whichever period may expire
earlier. The consignee or any other officer of Nigam actually using the
material will give prompt notice of each such defect to the supplier. The
_______________________________________________________________________
Page 8 of 10
replacement shall be effected by the supplier within a reasonable time, but
not, in any case, exceeding 45 days. The supplier shall, also, arrange to
remove the defective within a reasonable period, but not exceeding 45 days
from the date of issue of notice in respect thereof, failing which, the
purchaser reserve the right to dispose of defective material in any manner
considered fit by him (Purchaser), at the sole risk and cost of the supplier.
Any sale proceeds of the defective material after meeting the expenses
incurred on its custody, disposal handling etc., shall however be credited to
the supplier’s account and set off against any outstanding dues of the
purchaser against the supplier. The warranty for 72/78 months shall be one
time.
21. CHALLENGE CLAUSE
The material offered/received after the inspection by the authorized
inspecting officer may again be subjected to the test for losses or any other
parameter from any Testing House/in-house technique of the Nigam & the
results if found deviating un-acceptable or not complying to approved GTP's
the bidder shall arrange to supply the replacement within thirty (30) days of
such detection at his cost including to & fro transportation. In addition to this
penalty @10% of cost of the inspected lot of material shall be imposed.
22. SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED AND GUIDING TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:-
The tenderers must supply the detailed guaranteed and other technical
particulars as detailed in Appendix-I. For values, use of ‘Dash’ ‘Do’ ‘Blank’ or
‘As per ISS/IEC’ will not be entertained.
General Manager/P&D Cum-Member Secretary CSC
UHBVN Panchkula.
_______________________________________________________________________
Page 9 of 10
APPENDIX-I GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR HT AERIAL BUNCHED CABLE WITH CROSS - LINKED POLYETHYLENE (XLPE) INSULATION & BARE MESSENGER WIRE (FOR NEUTRAL & EARTHING)
S.N. Particulars HT Aerial Bunched Cables
Size-1 Size-2 Size-3 Size…..
so on 1 Maker’s name & address 2 Rated voltage 3 Phase conductor details
i) No. of phase conductors ii) Nominal cross-sectional area of
each conductor-mm²
iii) No. & size of strands (mm) iv) Minimum tensile strength of
each strand-N/mm²
v) Diameter of compacted conductor along with tolerance (mm).
vi) Approximate mass (Kg/Km) vii) Maximum DC resistance at 20o
C (Ohm/Km)
viii) Insulation thickness (mm) ix) Standard to which this material
conforms
4. Messenger (Neutral conductor) i) Nominal sectional area of each
conductor in mm²
ii) No. & size of strands (mm) iii) Diameter of compacted
conductors along with tolerance (in mm)
iv) Approx. mass (Kg/Km) v) Minimum Tensile strength in KN vi) Max. DC resistance at 20o C
(Ohm/Km)
vii) Standard specification to which this material conform
5 Insulation of phase conductor i) Material ii) Whether all properties as
mentioned in the technical Specifications are guaranteed if not indicate deviations in properties
iii) Standard specification to which this material shall conform
6 Finished cable (complete bunched cable)
i) Overall diameter (approx.) in mm
_______________________________________________________________________
Page 10 of 10
ii) Total mass (approx.) in Kg/Km
7. Drum i) Tare weight of drum ii) Whether drum is wheel mounted iii) Standard specification to which
drum shall conform
8 Standard length of each cable and its tolerance
9 i) Total length of cable in a drum and its tolerance
ii) Mass of finished cable in a drum and its tolerance
10. Whether material bears ISI certification mark
11 Serial number of ISI license and its validity
12. Max. Continuous current carrying capacity
13. Max. Continuous conductor temperature due to load
14 Embossing
15 Any other particulars
(Suppliers Name & Address)
UTTAR & DAKSHIN HARYANA BIJLI VITRAN NIGAM
Specification No. CSC-XXXVI/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
OF
HEAT SHRINKABLE / PUSH ON TYPE
TERMINATIONS FOR 11 KV XLPE CABLES
Issue of the Month: Jan. 2010
Common Specifications Committee UHBVN & DHBVN
Page 1 of 10
1. SCOPE :-
This specification covers the design, manufacture, assembly and testing of heat shrinkable/push on type terminations suitable for 11 KV 3-core XLPE insulated, screened, armoured, with aluminium conductor cables suitable for earthed system and confirming to IS:7098(Part-II)-1985 with latest amendment, if any.
2. STANDARD :-
The performance as well as type test requirements of all type of kits referred under scope shall conform to stipulations of IS : 13573/1992 or VDE-0278 with latest amendments, if any.
All the electrical & physical parameters of terminations should also
conform to the corresponding parameters of XLPE cables referred under ‘SCOPE’ of this specification, as per IS: 7098 (Part-II)-1985 (with latest amendments, if any) or equivalent international standards..
3. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS :-
1. Max. ambient air temperature 600C
2. Min. ambient air temperature C -5OC
3. Average Max. Daily ambient temperature 400C
4. Max. yearly weighed average ambient temperature
320C
5. Max. altitude above mean sea level (Meters) 1000
6. Minimum Relative Humidity (%age) 26
7. Max. Relative Humidity (%age) 95
8. Avg. No. of Rainy days/year 120
9. Avg. annual rainfall 900 mm
10. Maximum wind pressure 195 Kg./m Sq.
4. REQUIREMENT :-
The heat shrinkable/push on type terminations offered shall be of proven design and make, which have already been extensively used ;and fully type tested.
5. GENERAL REQUIREMENT :-
The purpose of this specification is to specify the performance requirements of termination kits for the use on 50 C/S 3 phase system with earthed neutral for working voltage of 11 KV. Earthing arrangement shall be as per relevant standard and details of earthing arrangement offered shall be submitted alongwith the tender.
Page 2 of 10
5.1 The material to be used should be inert and capable of resisting
degradation during the service of cable system. The kit shall be provided with protection against rodents and termite attack.
5.2 Heat Shrinkable Type (Terminations) : 5.2.1 The term heat shrinkable refers to extruded or moulded polymeric
materials which are cross-linked to develop elastic memory and supplied in expanded or otherwise deformed size/shape, subsequently heating in a non-constrained state to a temperature above the shrink temperature resulting in the material recovering or shrinking to its original shape.
5.2.2 Since the sealant or adhesives (to be used for environment sealing)
between the ;heat shrinkable materials and XLPE cables shall be exposed to high electrical stresses, they must be track resistant.
5.2.3 The heat shrinkable polymer materials being used for external
leakage insulation between the high voltage of conductors and grounds should be weather resistant.
5.2.4 All cuts/nicks inadvertently occurred to XLPE insulation must be
rendered discharge free by using suitable discharge suppression compound.
5.2.5 The heat shrinkable tubing may be either extruded or moulded
type. 5.2.6 Higher thickness of heat shrinkable sleeves shall be preferable to
counter erosion due to pollution. 5.3 Push on type (Terminations only) : 5.3.1 Rubber components should be made from proven quality of tuber
with tested curing properties. 5.3.2 The semi conducting portion of the stress cone should be
vulcanized with insulation so that both semi conducting and insulation portion becomes an integrated part.
5.3.3 The stress cone must ;be of proven design of stress control. 5.3.4 The moulding of rubber components should be aimed to achieve a
smooth finish on interior and exterior of the components. 5.3.5 The stress cone should probably be reusable type. 5.3.6 In case of outdoor terminations, the suitable provision for covering
the cable cores with re-useable protective system from the crotch seal to the bottom of stress cone should be made.
Page 3 of 10
5.4 Other Requirements : 5.4.1 Proper stress control, stress grading and non tracking arrangement
in the terminations shall be offered by means of proven methods, details of which shall be elaborated in the offer. Detailed sectional view of assemblies shall be submitted alongwith the offer.
5.4.2 The kits offered shall provide the total environment sealing, the
details of which shall be offered alongwith the offer. 5.4.3 Provision for effective screening over each core be made and
bidders shall categorically conform this aspect in their offer. 5.4.4 The material and components not specifically stated in the
specification, but which are essential for satisfactory operation of the equipments shall be included without any extra cost.
5.4.5 The terminations shall be of better tracking resistant properties and
fully reliable earthing system to maintain continuous contact with screening/armouring as the case may be.
5.4.6 The armour earthing arrangement shall form part of the termination. 5.4.7 Terminations shall have provision for shield connections and
earthing. 5.4.8 The kits shall be suitable for storage without deterioration at a
temperature upto 50oC for more than 5 years. 5.4.9 The fault level (as well as duration) withstand capability of
terminations should be strictly matching with these parameters of cables for which the kits are intended to be used.
5.4.10 The words DHBVN/UHBVN alongwith trade name of manufacturer,
month/year of manufacturer, size etc. shall be embossed/engraved or suitably marked with indelible ink/paint for the purpose of identification.
5.4.11 Suitable creepage extension/rain protection sheds for outdoor
termination shall be provided. 5.4.12 The adequate provisions for eliminating the chances of entrapment
of air at the steps formed by semicon screen shall be made. 5.4.13 The gripping tubing (termination boot) for the cable where
trifurcation takes place, shall also be part of kit and covered under scope of this supply of this specification.
5.4.14 Name of sub-supplier for the raw material and standard according
to which their raw material are tested, must be furnished alongwith the offer.
Page 4 of 10
5.4.15 Detailed kit contents, whether manufactured by the bidder or bought from outside (with name of sub vendor) for each component must be indicated in the offer.
5.4.16 The; terminations shall be supplied in kit forms. All insulating and
sealing materials, consumable items, conductor fittings, earthing arrangements and lugs etc. shall be included in the individual kit.
5.4.17 An instruction manual in English, indicating the complete
method/procedure to be adopted for installation of kits, preferably with more and more diagrams/pictorial presentation shall be supplied with each kit. Various items quantity there of against each kit must be indicated in the instruction manual.
6. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS :-
The terminations shall have same electrical and thermal characteristics as those of cables with which these are intended to be used. The tenderers must furnish the guarantee technical particulars for each type/size of kit ;in Annexure-‘A’.
7. CONSUMABLES OR RE-USABLE PUSH ON TYPE KITS :-
The details of consumable viz-a-viz reusable parts for each size of push on type (indoor/outdoor separately) termination must be supplied on a separate sheet. The %age of consumables for reusing these kits must be indicated for each size.
8. DRAWINGS :-
Complete detailed dimensional drawings showing all details of kit contents/bill of material for each size type.
Note : Any tender without complete guaranteed technical particulars and dimensional drawings shall be liable for rejection :
9. TRAINING :-
In case of placement of an order against this tender enquiry, the tenderer shall have to impart free of cost demonstration to selected number of Nigam personnel by installing few kits any where in Haryana, places of Purchaser’s discretion. If required, supplier may have to give free of cost practical training regarding installation of their product in NiIgam training institutes also.
Page 5 of 10
10. TESTS :-
10.1 Type tests :
The termination kits of offered design should have been got tested from NABL accredited laboratory as per relevant standards with latest version.
10.2 Acceptance Tests :
Initially the following tests shall constitute as acceptance tests :- i) Dimensional checking as per approved drawings. ii) Volume resistivity test for various components. iii) AC High voltage test after installation of terminations (as per IS :
13573/1992 or VDE-0278) on appropriate cable. iv) Dielectric strength of major components. v) D.C. High voltage test. vi) Tracking resistance. vii) Ultimatic Elongation.
The scope to include more type tests as acceptance tests shall be decided after processing the offers of various bidders/after knowing the details of testing facilities for type tests available with various tenders.
IMPORTANT : The tenderers must specifically mention in their offer about the details of testing facilities for various type test as per IS : 13573/1992 and or VDE-0278, available at their works, failing to do so, the offer is liable to be rejected on the presumption that adequate testing facilities are not available with them.
ROUTINE TESTS :- The following tests shall constitute routine test : i) Dielectric strength. ii) Density. iii) Heat shock. iv) Shrinkage ratio. The tenderer must specify the details of routine tests (being conducted at their works ) alongwith the standard applicable, in their offer. The routine test certificates shall be furnished alongwith the inspection call for each offered lot.
11. INSPECTION :
The material shall be made, inspected and tested in the presence of the authorized representative of the Nigam at the manufacturer’s/suppliers works at the cost of the suppliers. In case the supplier is not in a position to get these tests carried out at his works,
Page 6 of 10
then the material should be got tested in the presence of authorized inspecting officer of Nigam from any other testing agency or from the Govt. recognized testing agency. All the expenses incurred to this effect shall be borne by the supplier. The purchaser or his authorized representative shall have access at all reasonable times to the manufacturer’s works to inspect and witness the tests. The purchaser have the right to have the tests carried out at the cost of the supplier by an independent agency wherever there is dispute regarding the quality of the material supplied.
The manufacturer shall be responsible to pay penalty of Rs 20,000/- for each occasion at which the fake inspection call has been made or the material is rejected during testing/inspection by the authorized agency/representative of the Nigam. This penalty would be in addition to the expenses incurred by the Nigam in deputing the Inspecting Officer, carrying out such inspection.
12. PACKING AND TRANSPORT :
The supplier shall be responsible for suitable packing of all the kits of material and marking on the consignment, so as to avoid any damage during transport and storage and to ensure correct dispatch to the destination.
13. Challenge Clause:-
The material offered/received after the inspection by the authorized inspecting officer may again be subjected to the test for or any parameter from any testing house/in-house technique of the Nigam & the results if found deviating un-acceptable or not complying to approved GTP’s the bidder shall arrange to supply the replacement within thirty (30) days of such detection at his cost including to & fro transportation. In addition , penalty @10% of cost of the inspected lot of material shall be imposed.
14. Warranty Period:-
The supplier shall be responsible to replace, free of cost, with no transportation or insurance cost to the purchaser, up to destination, the whole or any part to the material which in normal and proper use proves the defective in quality or workmanship, subject to the condition that the defect is noticed within 24 months from the date of receipt of material in stores or 18 months from the date of commissioning whichever period may expire earlier. The consignee or nay other officer of Nigam actually using the material will give prompt notice of each such defect to the supplier. The replacement shall be effected by the supplier within a reasonable time, but not, in any case, exceeding 45 days. The supplier shall, also, arrange to remove the defective within a reasonable period, but not exceeding 45 days from the date of issue of notice in respect thereof, failing which, the purchaser reserve the right to dispose of defective material in any manner considered fit
Page 7 of 10
by him (purchaser), at the sole risk and cost of the supplier. Any sale proceeds of the defective material after meeting the expenses incurred on its custody, disposal handling etc., shall however be credited to the supplier’s account and set off against any outstanding dues of the purchaser against the supplier. The warranty for 18/24 months shall be one time.
Director/Technical-I, UHBNV, Panchkula
Director/Project,DHBVN, Hisar
CGM/PD&C, UHBVN, Panchkula
CGM/P&D, DHBVN, Hisar.
FA & CAO/MM, UHBNV, Panchkula
FA & CAO/MM, DHBVN, Hisar
GM/P&D, UHBNV, Panchkula
GM/P&D, DHBVN, Hisar
Page 8 of 10
ANNEXURE-‘A’ SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR TERMINATIONS OUTDOOR / INDOOR TERMINATION KIT H.S. PUSH ON 1. Manufacturer’s name & Address.
2. Sr. No. & name and country of origin.
3. Voltage grade.
4. Type of kit offered.
5. Applicable standards.
6. Size.
7. Material of tubing/moulded part/self amalgamating tape etc.
8. Insulation time.
9. Curing time.
10. Time required for energisation after completion of termination.
11. Special devices required, if any.
12. Kit storage temperature (Degree centigrade).
13. (a) Shelf life of kit.
(b) Design life of kit.
14. List lof contents of kit (to be furnished separately)
15. Material used for stress control.
16. Dielectric strength of insulation material (KV/mm).
17. Materials used in encapsulating compound and environmental sealing.
18. Class of kit.
19. Whether test reports, drawings land instruction leaf lets are enclosed.
20. Volume resistivity.
i) Stress control tubing.
ii) Non tracking tubing.
21. Relative permitivity.
i) Stress control tubing.
ii) Non tracking tubing.
22. Water absorption.
i) Stress control tubing.
ii) Non tracking tube.
23. Tracking resistance.
Page 9 of 10
i) Stress control tube.
ii) Non tracking tube.
24. Tensile strength.
i) Stress control tube.
ii) Non tracking tube.
25. Ultimate elongation
(a) Stress control tube.
(b) Non tracking tube.
Note : While giving details of technical parameters under Sr. No. 20 to 25 above,
the reference of applicable relevant ISS/international standard must be indicated.
Page 10 of 10
______________________________________________________________________
Page 1 of 26
1
Specification No. CSC-III-R-I/DH/UH/P&D/2010-11
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR
Outdoors types Distribution Transformers of
11 kV/433-250 V Class upto and including 100 kVA
i.e (25 kVA to 100 kVA) with CSP (completely self protected)
features
Issue Month: May, 2010 Common Specification Committee
(CSC Approval date 23.4.2010) UHBVN & DHBVN
______________________________________________________________________
Page 2 of 26
2
OUTDOOR TYPE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS OF 11 kV/433-250 V CLASS UP TO AND INCLUDING 100 kVA i.e (25,63 & 100 kVA) WITH CSP (COMPLETELY SELF PROTECTED) FEATURES
1. Scope:
This specification covers, engineering, manufacture, assembly, stage testing,
inspection and testing before supply, ready to use besides delivery at site of oil immersed,
naturally cooled 3 phase 11 kV/433-250 V completely self protected Distribution
Transformers for outdoor use along with metallic enclosure housing LV bushing & MCCB
(if provided) with sealing facility.
1.1. It is not the intent to specify completely herein all the details of the design and
construction of equipment. However the equipment shall conform in all respects to
high standards of engineering, design and workmanship and shall be capable of
performing in continuous commercial operation upto the Bidder’s guarantee, in
manner acceptable to the purchaser, who will interpret the meanings of drawings
and specification and shall have the power to reject any work or material which, in
his judgment is not in accordance therewith. The offered equipment shall be
complete with all components necessary for their effective and trouble free
operation. Such, components be deemed to be within the scope of Bidder’s supply
interceptive of whether those are specifically brought out in this specification and /
or the commercial order or not.
1.2. Standard Ratings:
The standard Ratings shall be 25, 63 and 100 kVA.
2. STANDARDS:
2.1. The material shall conform in all respects to the relevant Indian /International
standard Specification, with latest amendments thereof some of them are listed below:
Title India standard
International& Internationally recognized standard
Specification for power Transformer outdoor distribution Transformer upto including 100 KVA
ISS-2026/1977 ISS-1180
IEC 76
Specification for Copper wire rod IS-12444 ASTM B-49
Specification porcelain Transformer bushing
ISS-3347/1967 DIN 42531, 23,3
Specification for Transformer oil ISS-335/1983 BS 148, D-1473, D-1533-1934 IEC Pub 296-1969
Specification for colors for ready mixed paints porcelain bushings
ISS-5/1961
Specification for High voltage porcelain bushings
ISS-2099/1973 IEC Pub 296-1969
Specification for Low voltage bushings ISS-7421/1974 Specification for outdoor Bushings ISS-3347 DIN 42531 to 33 Specification for Al wire rods ISS-5484 ASTM B-233
Insulating Kraft Paper ISS-9335 IEC 554
Specification for Insulating press Board ISS-1576 IEC 641
Guide for loading of Oil immersed T/Fs ISS- 6600/1972 IEC-76
______________________________________________________________________
Page 3 of 26
3
The bidder shall use ISS, however, where this standard is not available
corresponding IEC may be followed.
Material conforming to ISS or the internationally accepted standards, which
ensure equal or higher quality than the standards mentioned above, would also be
acceptable. In case the Bidders who wish to offer material conforming to the standards,
salient points of difference between the standards adopted and the specific standards
shall be clearly brought out in relevant schedule. Four copies of such standards with
authentic English translations shall be furnished along with the other.
3. SERVICE CONDITIONS:-
The Distribution Transformers & other equipment/material to be supplied against
this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory operation under the following climatic
Conditions as per IS-2026 (Part-I) latest revision
i) Location At various locations in the state of Haryana
ii) Maximum ambient temperature (oC) 60 iii) Minimum ambient air temperature (oC) -5 iv) Maximum average daily ambient temperature
(oC) 40
v) Maximum yearly weighed average ambient temperature (oC)
32
vi) Maximum altitude above mean sea level (m) 1000 vii) Minimum Relative Humidity (%) 26 viii) Maximum Relative Humidity (%) 95 ix) Average no of Rainy days/ year 120 x) Average annual rainfall 900 mm xi) Maximum wind pressure 195 kg/m sq.
The equipment shall be for safe operation in moderately hot and humid tropical
climate, conducive to rust and fungus growth.
4. PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS:-
The transformers shall be suitable for outdoor installation with three phase
50 Hz, 11 KV system in which the neutral is effectively earthed and they should be suitable
for service under fluctuations in supply voltage upto plus 10 to minus 15%.
Sr. No. Item 1 Continuous rated
capacity 25 KVA 63 KVA 100 KVA
2 System voltage (max.)
12.5 KV 12.5 KV 12.5 KV
3 Rated voltage HV 11 KV 11 KV 11 KV 4 Rated voltage LV 433-250 V 433-250 V 433-250 V 5 Line current HV 1.31 A 3.306 A 5.25 A 6 Line current LV 33.33 A 84.0 A 133.0 A 7 Frequency 50c/s +5% 50c/s +5% 50c/s +5% 8 No. of phases Three Three Three 9 Connection HV Delta Delta Delta 10 Connection LV Star
(Neutral Brought
out)
Star (Neutral Brought
out)
Star (Neutral Brought
out) 11 Vector group Dyn-II Dyn-II Dyn-II 12 Type of cooling ONAN ONAN ONAN 13 changing
arrangement Not
applicable Not
applicable Not
Applicable
______________________________________________________________________
Page 4 of 26
4
14 Noise level at rated voltage and frequency
45 db 45 db 45 db
Permissible temperature rise over ambient i) if top oil measured by thermometer
35 Deg. C 35 Deg. C 35 Deg. C
ii) if winding measured by resistance
40 Deg.C 40 Deg.C 40 Deg.C
15
Maximum clearances i) HV phase to phase (phase to earth (mm) ii) LV phase to phase (phase to earth
-----AS per IS-1180 Latest-----
-----255 140---
---------75 40----
5. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS:
5.1. MATERIAL – CRGO METAL
5.1.1. The core shall be stack / wound type generally of high grade rolled grain
annealed steel lamination having low loss and good grain properties, coated
with hot oil proof insulation, bolted together and to the frames firmly to
prevent vibration or noise. The complete design of core must ensure
permanency of the core losses with continuous working of the transformers.
The value of the maximum flux density allowed in the design and grade of
lamination used be clearly stated in the offer.
The bidder should offer the core for inspection and approval by the purchaser
during manufacturing stage. Bidder’s shall give notice for inspection with the
following documents as applicable as a proof towards use of prime core material.
5.1.1.1. Invoice of the supplier
5.1.1.2. Mills Test Certificate
5.1.1.3. Packing List
5.1.1.4. Bill of Loading
5.1.1.5. Bill of entry certificate to customs
5.1.2. Core clamping for CRGO Stacked core.
5.1.2.1. MS channel shall be used on top and bottom
5.1.2.2. Core channel on LV side to be reinforced at equidistance, if
holes/cutting is done for LT lead in order to a avoid bending of
channel.
5.1.2.3. MS channel shall be painted with varnish or oil resistant paint
5.1.2.4. Clamping & Tie-rods shall be made of HT steel and shall be
parkarised.
______________________________________________________________________
Page 5 of 26
5
5.1.3. Core clamping for CRGO wound core.
5.1.3.1. Core clamping shall be with top and bottom U-shaped core clamps
made of sheet steel clamped HT steel tie rods for efficient clamping
5.1.3.2. MS core clamps shall be painted with varnish or oil-resistant paint.
5.1.3.3. Suitable provision shall be made in the bottom core clamp/ bottom
plate of the transformer to arrest movement or the active part.
5.1.4. The transformers core shall be suitable for over fluxing (due to
combined effect of voltage and frequency) upto 12.5% without
injurious heating at full load conditions and shall not get saturated.
The Bidder shall furnish necessary design data in support of this
situation.
5.1.5. No load current shall not exceed 2% of full load current and will be
measured by energizing the transformer at 433 volts, 50c/s on the
Secondary. Increase of voltage of 433 volts by 12.5% shall not
increase the no load current disproportionately high. Test for
magnetic balance by connecting the LV phase by phase to rated
phase voltage and measurement of an, bn, cn voltage will be carried
out.
5.1.6. ‘’The core material should be imported directly from the reputed
manufacture. Core material shall be processed by slitting only. Core
cutting/slitting be done in front of inspecting officers deputed by
UHBVN”. Details of the core shall be filled & supplied as per
Annexure-II.
5.2. AMORPHOUS METAL.
5.2.1. The core shall be high quality Amorphous ribbons having very low
loss formed into wound cores of rectangular shape, bolted together to
the frames firmly to prevent vibration or noise. The complete
design of core must ensure permanency of the core loss with
continuous working of the transformers. The value of the flux density
allowed in the design shall be clearly stated in the offer. Curve
showing the properties of the metal shall be attached with the offer.
5.2.2. Core Clamping for Amorphous metal Transformers.
5.2.2.1. Core clamping shall be with top and bottom U-shaped core clamps
made of sheet steel clamped HT steel tie rods for efficient clamping.
5.2.2.2. MS core clamps shall be painted with varnish or oil-resistant paint.
5.2.2.3. Suitable provision shall be made in the bottom core clamp/ bottom
plate of the transformer to arrest movement of the active part.
5.2.3. The transformers core shall be suitable for over fluxing (due to
combined effect of voltage and frequency) upto 12.5% without
injurious heating at full load conditions and shall not get saturated.
______________________________________________________________________
Page 6 of 26
6
The Bidder shall furnish necessary design data in support of this
situation.
5.2.4. No load current shall not exceed 2% of full load current and will be
measured by energizing the transformer at 433 volts, 50c/s on the
Secondary. Increase of voltage of 433 volts by 12.5% shall not
increase the no load current disproportionately high. Test for
magnetic balance by connecting the LV phase by phase to rated
phase voltage and measurement of an, bn, cn voltage will be carried
out.
NOTE:
I) Wherever variable prices are provided IEEMA formula should be applicable
in such a way that indices applicable for CRGO are used for amorphous
material also since the indices for latter are not declared by IEEMA.
II) The value of maximum flux density allowed shall be 1.6 T.
5.3. WINDINGS:-
5.3.1. Material: Double paper covered insulated electrolytic Aluminium
Conductor for windings and electrolytic copper for leads.
5.3.2. LV winding shall be in even layers so that the neutral formation will
be at top.
5.3.3. The winding construction of single HV coil wound over LV coil is
preferable.
5.3.4. Inter layer insulation shall be Epoxy dotted Kraft paper.
5.3.5. Proper bonding of inter layer insulation with the conductor shall be
ensured. Test for Bonding Strength to be conducted.
5.3.6. Dimensions of winding coils are very critical. Dimensional tolerances
for winding coils shall be with in limits as specified in GTP.
5.3.7. Vertical ducts and spacers shall be provided within each coils for H.V
and L.V winding.
5.3.8. Current density for HV and LV coils. This should not be more than 1.5
A/sq. mm. for windings & 0.8 A/sq. mm for leads.
5.4. Oil: - The insulating oil shall comply with the requirements of relevant
standards IS 335/1993 or BS: 148.
5.5. Losses: The total losses (includes no-load & load losses) at 50% and
100% loading equivalent to BEE 4-Star rating shall not exceed the values
given below:
Voltage Ratio kVA Rating Max. losses at 50% (Watts)
Max. losses at 100% (Watts)
11000/433 25 190 635 11000/433 63 340 1140 11000/433 100 475 1650
______________________________________________________________________
Page 7 of 26
7
The above losses are maximum allowable and here would not be any
positive tolerance. Bids with higher losses than the above specified values would be
treated as non-responsive.
Bidders are requested to quote the price as FOR destination on standard
losses. The Bid will be evaluated on the basis of standard losses instead of Equated
capitalized cost. No benefit of low losses to the bidder in case the losses are less than
standards losses at any time.
5.5.1. Percentage Impedance:
The value of Impedance of transformer at 75 Deg. C shall be 4.5% subject to the
tolerance specified in the standard IS: 2026-1977.
5.5.2. Temperature rise
The temperature rise over ambient shall not exceed the limits described below:
i) Top oil temperature rise measured by thermometer: 35 deg. C
ii) Winding temperature rise measure by resistance: 40 deg. C
Bids not meeting the above limits of temperature rise will be treated as non-responsive.
5.6. PENALTY FOR NON PERFORMANCE:
5.6.1. Purchaser reserves the right to reject any transformer during the test at
supplier’s works, if it is found that actual measured losses are more than the
values quoted by the bidder
5.6.2. Transformer with temperature rise and impedance beyond the Guaranteed
values.
5.6.2.1. Purchaser reserves the right to reject any transformer during the test at
supplier’s works, if the temperature rise exceeds the guaranteed values.
5.6.2.2. Purchaser reserves the right to reject any transformer during the test at
supplier’s works, if the impedance values differ from the guaranteed values including
tolerance.
5.6.2.3. Purchaser also reserves the right to retain the rejected transformer and take it
into service until the Bidder replaces it with a new transformer at no extra cost.
The delivery as per contract will be counted when the new transformer as per
specification is provided by the manufacture.
5.7. INSULATION MATERIAL:-
5.7.1. Material:-Electrical grade insulation Kraft papers and press Boards of standard
should be used. For the use standard material the names of following firms have been
approved.
Sr. No. Name of insulating material
Name of the firms
1 Press board a. Senapathy whitely b. Raman Board
2 Craft paper a. Ballarpur b. Padamjee c. Triveni d. M/s Skytouch Tapes Ltd., Mumbai. e. M/s KLIM Enterprises, Mumbai. f. M/s Vijaya Mercantile Ltd. New Delhi. g. M/s Badri Enterprises, New Delhi.
______________________________________________________________________
Page 8 of 26
8
3 Press pahn paper Senapathy whitely 4 Gaskets a. New cork
b. Talbros c. M/s Skytouch Tapes Ltd., Mumbai. d. M/s KLIM Enterprises, Mumbai. e. M/s Vijaya Mercantile Ltd. New Delhi. f. M/s Badri Enterprises, New Delhi.
5.7.2 All spacers, axial wedges / runners used in windings shall be made of
pre-compressed pressboard-solid, conforming to type B 3.1 of IEC 641-3-2.
In case of cross-over coil winding of HV all spacers shall be properly
sheared and dovetail punched to ensure proper locking. All axial wedges/
runners shall be properly milled to dovetail shape so that they pass through
the designed spacers freely. Insulation shearing, cutting, milling and
punching operations shall be carried out in such out in such a way, that
there should not be any burr and dimensional variations.
5.8. TANK:- The rectangular transformer tank can be with radiator
fins/rounded or elliptical cooling tubes. The main tank of the
transformers shall be made of good quality steel having a minimum
thickness of sides of the tanks 3.15 mm and a minimum thickness of
5.0 mm for top and bottom plates. The tank shall be capable of
withstanding a pressure up to 0.8 kg/cm2 and (-) 0.3 kg/cm2 for 30
minutes and 10 minutes respectfully. The word “UHBVNL
PROPERTY” shall be engraved on the top cover plate and side of the
tank body. No negative tolerance shall be allowed.
5.8.1. For Rectangular plain tank:-
5.8.1.1. The transformer tank shall be of robust construction rectangular in
shape and shall be built up of tested MS sheets.
5.8.1.2. The internal clearance of tank shall be such that, it shall facilitate easy
lifting of core with coils from the tank without dismantling L.V bushings.
5.8.1.3. All joints of tank and fittings shall be oil tight and no bulging should
occur during service. The tank design shall be such that the core and
windings can be lifted freely. The tank plate shall be of such strength
that the complete transformers when filled with oil may be lifted bodily
by means of lifting lugs. Inside of tank shall be painted with varnish/
Hot oil.
5.8.1.4. Manufacturer should carry out all welding operations as per relevant
ASME standards and submit a copy of the welding procedure
qualifications and welder performance qualification certificates to the
customer.
5.8.1.5. The four walls of the tank shall be made of Two ‘’L’’ shaped sheets
(without joints) fully welded at the corners from inside so that the joint is
______________________________________________________________________
Page 9 of 26
9
stronger due to V-shape welding fillet and also outside of the tank for
withstanding a pressure of 0.8 kg/cm2 for 10 minutes.
5.8.1.6. The tank shall be reinforced by welded angle on all the outside walls
on the edge of the tank to form two equal compartments. Permanent
deflection when the tank without oil is subject to a vacuum of 525 mm
of mercury for rectangular tank and 760 mm of mercury for round tank,
shall not be more than 4 mm in accordance with clause 22.5 of IS:1180
(Part-I/1989) upto 750 mm length and 6mm upto 1250 mm length. The
tank shall further be capable of withstanding a pressure of 0.8 kg/cm2
(g) and a vacuum of 0.3 kg/cm2 (g) without any deformation.
5.8.1.7. The radiators can be of tube type or fin or pressed type steel type to
achieve the desired cooling to limit the specified temperature rise. The
transformer shall be capable of giving continuous rated output without
exceeding the specified temperature rise Bidder shall submit the calculation
sheet.
5.8.1.8. Lifting lugs: 4 Nos. welded heavy duty lifting lugs of MS flat 8 mm thick
(min) suitably reinforced by vertical supporting flat welded edgewise below
the jug on the side wall.
5.8.1.9. Pulling lugs: 4 Nos. of welded heavy duty pulling lugs of MS plate 8
mm thick (mm) shall be provided to pull the transformer horizontally.
5.8.1.10. Top cover fixing bolts of G.I adequately spaced and 6mm Neoprene
bonded cork gaskets conforming to IS 42332 part-II shall be placed
between tank and cover. The bolts outside tank shall have 2 flat washers &
one spring washer.
5.8.1.11. Pressure release value as standard fitment shall be provided on the top
of tank of transformer which should operate at a pressure of 0.3 to 0.5 kg/cm2.
5.8.2. CONSERVATOR: -
On Transformers of ratings upto 100 KVA with rectangular plain tank
the provision of conservators is optional with the clarification that:-
the transformer with conservator shall comply with IS: 1180 Part-I (Non
sealed type)
the transformers without conservator shall comply with IS:1180 Part-II
(Sealed type)
When a conservator is provided oil gauge and the plain or
dehydrating breathing devise shall be fixed to the conservator which shall also be
provided with a drain plug and a filling hole (1¼”) normal size thread) with cover.
The capacity of a conservator tank shall be designed keeping in view the total
quantity of oil and its contraction and expansion due to temperature variations, In
addition the cover of main tank shall be provided with an air release plug to enable
______________________________________________________________________
Page 10 of 26
10
air trapped within to be released, unless the conservator is so located as to
eliminate the possibility of air being trapped within the main tank.
The inside diameter of the pipe connecting the conservator to the
main tank should be within 20 to 50 mm and it should be projected into the
conservator so that its end is approximately 20 mm above the bottom of the
conservator so as to create a sump for collection of impurities. The minimum oil
level (corresponding to -5 deg C) should be above the sump level.
5.9. SURFACE PREPARATION & PAINTING.
5.9.1. General
5.9.1.1. All paints shall be applied in accordance with the paint manufacturer’s
recommendations. Particular attention shall be paid to the following:
5.9.1.1.1. Proper storage to avoid exposure as well as extremes of
temperature.
5.9.1.1.2. Surface preparation prior to painting.
5.9.1.1.3. Mixing and thinning.
5.9.1.1.4. Application of paints and the recommended limit of time intervals
between coats.
5.9.1.1.5. Shelf life for storage.
5.9.1.2. All paints when applied in a normal full coat, shall be free from runs,
sags, wrinkles, patchiness, brush marks or other defects.
5.9.1.3. All primers shall be well marked into the surface, particularly in areas
where painting is evident, and the first priming coat shall be applied as
soon as possible after cleaning. The paint shall be applied by airless
spray according to manufacture’s recommendations. However,
whenever airless spray is not possible, conventional spray be used with
prior approval of purchaser.
5.9.1.4. The supplier shall prior to painting nameplates, lettering gauges sight
glasses, light fittings and similar such items.
5.9.2. Cleaning and Surface preparation
5.9.2.1. After all machining, forming and welding shall been completed, all steel
work surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of rust, scale, welding slag or
spatter and other contamination prior to any painting.
5.9.2.2. Steel surfaces shall prepared by Short blast cleaning or Chemical by
Seven Tank process including Phosphating to the appropriate quality.
5.9.2.3. The pressure and volume of the compressed air supply for blast cleaning
shall meet the work requirement and shall be sufficiently free from all water
contamination to ensure that the cleaning process is not impaired.
5.9.2.4. Chipping, scraping and steel wire brushing using manual or power driven
tools cannot remove firmly adherent mill-scale shall only be used where
______________________________________________________________________
Page 11 of 26
11
blast cleaning is impractical. Manufacture to explain such areas in his
technical offer clearly.
5.9.3. Protective Coating:
5.9.3.1. As soon as all items have been cleaned and within four hours of the
subsequent drying. They shall be given suitable anti-corrosion protection.
5.9.4. Paint Material.
Followings are the types of paint that may be suitably used for the items to
be painted at shop and supply of matching paint to site:
5.9.4.1. Heat resistant paint (Hot oil Proof) for inside surface.
5.9.4.2. For external surfaces one coat of Thermo Setting powder paint or 1 coats
of Zinc chromate primer followed by 2 coats of Synthetic Enamel
/Polyurethane base paint. These paints can be either air-drying or stoving.
The coating of inside surfaces shall be made with heat resistant paint
5.9.4.3. The colour of the finishing coats shall be dark admiral gray conforming to
No. 632 of ISS-5 of 1961
5.9.5. Painting procedure
5.9.5.1. All painting shall be carried out in conformity with both Specification and
with the paint manufacture’s recommendation. All paints in anyone
particular system, whether shop or site applied, shall originate from one
paint manufacture.
5.9.5.2. Particular attention shall be paid to the manufacturer’s instructions on
storage, mixing, thinning and pot life. The paint shall only be applied in the
manner detailed by the manufacture’s e.g. brush, roller, conventional or
airless spray and shall be applied under the manufacture’s recommended
condition Minimum and maximum time intervals between coating shall be
closely followed.
5.9.5.3. All prepared steel surfaces should be primed before visible re-rusting
occurs or within 4 hours whichever is sooner.
5.9.5.4. Chemical treated steel surface shall be primed as soon as the surface is
dry and while the surface is still warm.
5.9.5.5. Where the quality of film is impaired by excess film thickness (wrinkling,
mud cracking or general softness) the Supplier shall remove the
unsatisfactory paint coating and apply another. As a general rule, dry film
thickness should not exceed the specified minimum dry film thickness by
more than 25%. In all instances where two or more coats of the same paint
are specified, such coating may or may not be of contrasting colours.
5.9.5.6. Paint applied to items that are not be painted shall be removed at
Supplier’s expense, leaving the surface clean, unstained and undamaged.
______________________________________________________________________
Page 12 of 26
12
5.9.6. Damaged Paintwork
5.9.6.1. Any damage occurring to any part of a painting scheme shall be made
good to the same standard of corrosion protection and appearance as that
originally employed.
5.9.7. Any damage paint work shall be made good as follows:
5.9.7.1. The damaged area, together with an area extending 25 mm around its
boundary, shall be cleaned down to bare metal.
5.9.7.2. A priming coat shall be immediately applied, followed by a full paint finish
equal to that originally applied and extending 50 mm around the perimeter
of the original damage.
5.9.7.3. The repainted surface shall present a smooth surface. This shall be
obtained by carefully chamfering the paint edges before and after priming.
5.9.8. Dry Film Thickness
5.9.8.1. To the maximum extent practicable the coats shall be applied as a
continuous film of uniform thickness and free of pores. Overspray, skips,
runs, sags and drips should be avoided. The different coats may or may not
be of the same colour.
5.9.8.2. Each coat of paint shall be allowed to harden before the next is applied as
per manufacturer’s recommendation.
5.9.8.3. Particular attention must be paid to full film thickness at edges.
5.9.8.4. The requirements for the dry film thickness (DFT) of paint and the
materials to be used shall be as given below.
Sr. No.
Paint Type Area to be painted
No. of coats Total Dry film thickness (mm)
1 Thermo setting paint Inside
Inside outside
01 01
20 microns 60 microns
2 Liquid paint a) Zinc chromate (primer) b) Synthetic Enamel/ Poly Urethene (Finish coat) c) Hot oil paint
Outside Outside inside
01 02 01
30 microns 25 microns each 35/ 10 microns
5.10. BUSHINGS:
5.10.1. The bushings shall conform to the relevant standards specified and shall be
outdoor. The bushing rods and nuts shall be made of brass material 12 mm
diameter for both HT & LT. The HT bushings shall be fixed to the transformers on
side with straight pockets and in the same plane or the top cover but LT bushing
shall be provided on the side of the tank. The tests as per latest IS 2099 and
IS7421 shall be conducted on the transformer bushings.
______________________________________________________________________
Page 13 of 26
13
5.10.2. For 11 KV, 17.5 KV class bushings shall be used and for 0.433 KV, 1.1KV
class bushings shall be used. Bushings of plain shades as per IS-3347 shall
be mounted on the side of the Tank and not on top cover.
5.10.3. Dimensions of the bushings of the voltage class shall conform to the
Standards specified.
5.10.4. A minimum phase to phase clearance of 75 mm for LV (upto 1.1 KV
bushings) and 255 mm for HV bushings shall be obtained with the bushing
mounted on the transformer.
5.10.5. The bushings shall be fixed on sides with pockets in the same plane or on
the top cover. Arcing horns or lightning arrestors shall be provided on HV
bushings.
5.10.6. Brazing of all inter connections; jumpers from winding to bushing shall have
cross section larger than the winding conductor. All the Brazers shall be
qualified as per ASME, Section-IX.
5.10.7. The bushings shall be of reputed make supplied by those manufacturers
who are having manufacturing and testing facilities for manufacture of
insulators.
5.10.8. The terminal arrangement shall not require a separate oil chamber not
connected to oil in the main tank.
5.10.9. The LV bushings & micro-processor based MCCB with time current
characteristics in compliance with IS:6600 (if provided) shall be housed
within the metallic enclosure with sealing arrangement so as to avoid any
possibility of tapping of supply from the bushing terminal. The enclosure
shall be made with sheet metal of thickness not less than 2mm and powder
coated. Enclosure shall have provision for pad locking arrangements.
5.11. Terminal connectors: The HV bushing stems shall be provided with suitable
terminal connectors so as to connect the jumper without disturbing the bushing
stem. Connectors shall be with eye bolts so as to receive 55 mm2 conductor for
HV. Terminal connectors should must be type tested as per IS : 5561.
5.12. Terminal markings
High voltage and Low voltage phase windings shall be marked both in the
terminal boards inside the tank and on the outside with capital letter IU, IV, IW and
low voltage winding for the same phase marked by corresponding small letter 2u,
2v, 2w. The neutral point terminal shall be indicated by the letter 2n.Neutral
terminal to be brought out and connected to local grounding terminal by an
Earthing strip.
5.13. FITTINGS:
The following standard fittings shall be provided.
5.13.1. Rating and terminal marking plates non-detachable
5.13.2. Ear thing terminal with lugs -2Nos.
______________________________________________________________________
Page 14 of 26
14
5.13.3. Lifting lugs for main tank & top cover.
5.13.4. Terminal connectors on the HV & for LV bushings-Lugs, glands
(being covered in the box)
5.13.5. Thermometer pocket with cap -1 No.
5.13.6. Air release device
5.13.7. HV bushings -3 Nos.
5.13.8. LV bushings - 4 Nos.
5.13.9. Pulling lugs – 4 Nos.
5.13.10. Stiffener angle 40x40x5 mm and vertical strip of 50x5 mm flat
5.13.11. Radiators – No. & length may be mentioned (as per heat dissipation
calculations)
5.13.12. Arcing horns or 9 KV 5 KVA lighting arrestors on HT side -3 Nos.
5.13.13. Prismatic Oil level gauge.
5.13.14. Drain cum sampling valve
5.13.15. Oil filling hole having p. 1- ¼“thread with plug and drain valve on the
conservator
5.13.16. Silica gel breather
5.13.17. Base channel 75x40 mm.
5.13.18. Pressure relief device.
5.13.19. The supplier shall be responsible to replace, free of cost, with no
transportation or insurance cost to the Purchaser, up to destination, the whole or
any part of the material which in normal and proper use proves the defective in
quality or workmanship, subject to the condition that the defect is noticed within 78
months from the date of receipt of material in stores or 72 months from the date of
commissioning whichever period may expire earlier. The consignee or any other
officer of Nigam actually using the material will give prompt notice of each such
defect to the supplier. The replacement shall be effected by the supplier within a
reasonable time, but not, in any case, exceeding 45 days. The supplier shall, also,
arrange to remove the defective within a reasonable period, but not exceeding 45
days from the date of issue of notice in respect thereof, failing which, the purchaser
reserve the right to dispose of defective material in any manner considered fit by
him (Purchaser), at the sole risk and cost of the supplier. Any sale proceeds of the
defective material after meeting the expenses incurred on its custody, disposal
handling etc., shall however be credited to the supplier’s account and set off
against any outstanding dues of the purchaser against the supplier. The warranty
for 72/78 months shall be one time.
5.14. FASTENERS:
All bolts, studs, screw threads, pipe threads, bolt heads and nuts shall
comply with the appropriate Indian Standards for metric threads, or the technical
equivalent.
______________________________________________________________________
Page 15 of 26
15
Bolts or studs shall not be less than 6 mm in diameter except when used for
small wiring terminals.
All nuts and pins shall be adequately locked. Wherever possible bolts
shall be fitted in such a manner that in the event of failure of locking resulting in the
nuts working loose and falling off, the bolt will remain in position.
All ferrous bolts, nuts and washers placed in outdoor positions shall
be treated to prevent corrosion, by hot dip galvanizing, except high tensile steel
bolts and spring washers which shall be electro-galvanised / plated. Appropriate
precautions shall be taken to prevent electrolytic action between dissimilar metals.
Each bolt or stud shall project at least one thread but not more than three
threads through the nut, except when otherwise approved for terminal board studs
or relay stems. If bolts nuts are placed so that they are inaccessible by means of
ordinary spanners, special spanners shall be provided.
The length of the screwed portion of the bolts shall be such that no screw
thread may form part of a shear plane between members.
Taper washers shall be provided where necessary.
Protective washers of suitable material shall be provided front and back or
the securing screws.
2 No., anti-theft fasteners of steel on two diagonally opposite corners of the
tank shall be provided. All nuts & pins shall be adequately locked.
5.15. MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT :
The under base of all transformers shall be provided with two 75X40 mm
channels 460 mm long with holes to make them suitable for fixing on a platform or
plinth
5.16. OVERLOAD CAPACITY
The transformers shall be suitable for loading as per IS: 6600/ 1972
6. TESTS :
a) All the equipment offered shall be fully type tested by the bidder or his collaborator
as per the relevant standards including the additional type tests mentioned at
clause 6.2. The type test must have been conduced on a transformer of same
design. The Bidder shall furnish four sets of type test reports along with the offer.
Offers without type test reports will be treated as Non-responsive.
The type test certificates should not be more than three years old on the date of bid
opening.
b) Special tests other than type and routine tests, as agreed between
purchaser and Bidder shall also be carried out as per the relevant standards.
c) The requirements of site tests are also given in this clause.
6.1. ROUTINE TESTS:
6.1.1. Ratio, polarity and phase sequence.
6.1.2. No Load current and losses at service voltage and formal frequency.
______________________________________________________________________
Page 16 of 26
16
6.1.3. Load losses at rated current and normal frequency.
6.1.4. Impedance Voltage test.
6.1.5. Resistance of windings at each tap, cold (at or near the test bed temp.)
6.1.6. Insulation resistance.
6.1.7. Induced over voltage withstand test.
6.1.8. Separate source voltage withstand test.
6.1.9. Neutral current measurement.
6.1.10. Oil samples (one sample per lot) to comply with IS 1866.
6.1.11. Measurement of 50% load & 100% load losses and magnetizing current at
rated frequency and at 90%, 100% and 110% voltage.
6.1.12. Flux balance test.
6.2. TYPE TESTS TO BE CONDUCTED ON ONE UNIT:
In addition to the Tests mentioned in para 6.1 following Tests shall be conducted.
6.2.1. Temperature rise test for determining the maximum temperature rise after
continuous full load run. The ambient temperature and time of test should
be stated in the test certificate.
6.2.2. Impulse voltage test: As per Clause No. 13 (With chopped wave) of IS -
2026 part-III latest version. BIL for 11KV shall be 95 KV Peak instead of 75
KV.
6.2.3. Air Pressure Test: As per CI. - 22.5 of IS- 1180/part-I/1989.
6.2.4. Short Circuit withstand test: Thermal and dynamic ability.
6.2.5. Magnetic Balance Test
6.2.6 The prototype transformer on which type test got conducted shall be
supplied to UHBVN/ DHBVN duly sealed after completion of type testing in
the beginning itself before commencement of supply. The bidder shall
furnish an affidavit that all his balance transformers shall meet with
prototype in all respects (internal & external). The Nigam can randomly
select any transformer & verify the internal / external details with the
prototype sample at any time during warranty period.
Type test certificates for the tests carried out on prototype of same
specifications shall be submitted along with the bid.
The purchase may select any transformer from the offered lot for inspection
during subsequent lots for carrying out temperature rise test from any Govt.
approved lab. Further the purchaser may select the transformer for type tests
randomly. The type test report(s) submitted by the bidder/ supplier from any NABL
accredited laboratory shall be acceptable for participation of the bidder in the
procurement/ empanelment process. In case NABL accredited laboratory happens
to be that of manufacturer itself added precaution shall be taken to get type test
and other tests witnessed in the laboratory by Nigam representative at the time of
acceptance of material.
______________________________________________________________________
Page 17 of 26
17
6.3. TESTS AT SITE: The purchaser reserves the right to conduct all tests on
Transformer after arrival at site and the manufacturer shall guarantee test
certificate figures under actual service conditions.
6.4. ACCEPTANCE TESTS: The transformers shall be subjected to the following
routine/acceptance test in presence of purchaser’s representative at the place of
manufacture before dispatch without any extra charges. The testing shall be
carried out in accordance with IS: 1180 and IS: 2026 with latest amendments.
6.4.1. Checking of weights, dimensions, fitting and accessories, tank sheet
thickness, oil quality, material, finish and workmanship as per GTP/QA Plan
and contract drawings.
6.4.2. Physical verifications of core coil assembly and measurement of flux density
of one unit of each rating, in every inspection with reference to short circuit
test report.
6.4.3. All tests as specified in clause 6.1
6.4.4. One transformer per lot shall be tested at NABL accredited independent
laboratory for performance measurement at free of cost.
6.5. TOLERANCES: Unless otherwise specified herein the test value of
transformers supplied would be within the tolerance permitted in the relevant
standards. No positive tolerance is allowed on guaranteed 50% Load and 100%
Load losses.
7. INSPECTION:
All tests and inspection shall be made at the place of manufacturer
and unless other wise especially agreed upon the manufacturer and the purchaser
at the time of purchase. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector representing
the purchaser all reasonable facilities, without charge to satisfy him that the
material is being furnished in accordance with specification.
The bidder shall give 15 days (for local supplies) and 30 days (in
case of foreign bidders) advance information to enable the purchaser to depute his
representative for witnessing acceptance routine tests.
The manufacturer shall provide all services to establish and maintain
quality of workman ship in his works and that of his sub-contractors to ensure the
mechanical/electrical performance of components, compliance with drawings,
identification and acceptability of all materials, parts and equipment as per Nigam
intends to purchase only High Quality material. For this purpose stringent testing of
the material can be done. Inspection can be got done from third party Inspection
agency or from Nigam’s own officers. Nigam reserves the right of 100% testing of
the transformers. The details of source of material shall be supplied duly filled as
per Annexure-III.
______________________________________________________________________
Page 18 of 26
18
8. QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN:
8.1. The Bidder shall furnish following information along with his bid. Information
shall be separately given for individual type of material offered.
8.1.1. Statement giving list of important raw materials, names of sub-supplies for
the raw materials, list of standards according to which the raw materials are
tested. List of tests normally carried out on raw materials in the presence of
Bidder’s representative, copies of test certificates.
8.1.2. Information and copies of test certificates as in (1) above in respect of
bought out accessories.
8.1.3. List of manufacturing facilities available.
8.1.4. Level of automation achieved and list of areas where manual processing
exists.
8.1.5. List of areas in manufacturing process, where stage inspections are
normally carried out for quality control and details of such test and inspection.
8.1.6. List of testing equipment available with the bidder for final testing of
equipment along with valid calibration reports shall be furnished with the bid.
Manufacturer shall posses 0.1 class instruments for measurement of losses.
8.1.7. Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) with hold points for purchases inspection as
per Annexure.
8.2. The successful Bidder shall within 30 days of placement of order submit
following information regarding list of new materials as well as bought out
accessories and the names of sub-suppliers selected from those furnished
along with offer.
9. DOCUMENTATION:
The Bidder shall furnish along with the bid the dimensional drawings of the
stems offered indicating all the fittings.
9.1. Dimension’s tolerances
9.2. Weight of individual components and total weight.
10. PACKING & FORWARDING:
10.1. The packing shall be done as per the manufacturer’s standard practice.
However, it should be ensured that the packing is such that, the material
would not get damaged during by Rail/ Road/ Sea.
10.2. The marking on each package shall be as per the relevant IS.
11. MANDATORY SPARES:
Mandatory spares shall be supplied as per the purchaser’s requirement.
12. COMPLETELY SELF PROTECTED (CSP) FEATURES
The transformers shall have the following CSP features:
12.1. Internal HV fuse on the HT side of transformer:
Specification for the HV fuse: Expulsion/any other suitable type of
fuse placed in series with the primary winding. The fuse is mounted normally inside
______________________________________________________________________
Page 19 of 26
19
of the primary bushing for the three phases and it is connected to the high voltage
winding through a terminal block. This has to protect that part of the electrical
distribution system, which is ahead of the distribution transformers from faults,
which occur inside the distribution transformers i.e. either on the windings or some
other part of the transformers. It shall be ensured that the fuse does not blow for
faults on the secondary side (LT side) of the transformer i.e. the blowing
characteristics of the fuse and LT breaker shall be so coordinated such that the
fuse shall not blow for any faults on the secondary side of the transformer beyond
LT breakers and those faults shall be cleared by the LT breaker only.
12.1.1. Internally mounted oil immersed LT breaker on the LV side of the
transformer:
12.1.1.1. 3 Pole LT circuit breaker: All LT faults after the breaker shall be clear
by this breaker. As such it shall be designed for perfect coordination with the
HT fuse link. The bidder shall furnish the time/current characteristics of LT
circuit breaker of 11 KV fuses for various current multiples.
The two characteristics shall be drawn on the same sheet to indicate coordination
between the circuit breaker and fuse. The Bidder shall carry out coordination test as
indicated above and this forms one of the tests as for acceptance test.
The breaker shall be coordinated thermally with the transformer design to follow
closely the variations of coil acceptance test.
The breaker shall be coordinated thermally with the transformer design to follow
closely the variations of coil temperature due to fluctuating load and ambient
temperatures.
This is to be accomplished by connecting the breaker in series between the
secondary windings and the secondary bushings. The breaker shall be located in the
same oil as the core and coil assembly so that the bimetal are sensitive to the temperature
of oil as well as the load current
The circuit breaker shall also be closed and opened manually standing on ground.
The current carrying parts of breakers shall be copper plus a set of copper tungsten
current interrupting contacts.
The cross section of the current carrying parts of the breakers shall withstand the
full load current at a current density not more than 2.5 A/Sq.mm (for additional mechanical
strength the area should be more).
2.1.1.2. Unity P.F. &
12.1.1.3. 0.8 P.F.
12.1.1.4. 125% load
12.1.1.5. 100% load
12.1.1.6. 75% load
12.1.1.7. 50% load
12.1.1.8. 25% load
12.1.1.9. Regulation at
______________________________________________________________________
Page 20 of 26
20
The bidder may offer microprocessor based MCCB with line current characteristics
confirming to IS:156600 of appropriate rating & good quality from reputed manufacturer in
the metal-box of the distribution transformer instead of internal LV breaker.
NOTE: - The breaker-trip setting shall be done considering loading of 130% loading for 6
hours duration at an average ambient temperature of 400 C for internal breaker as well
as MCCB (if provided).
14.0 Transformer & Metallic box Sealing facility
The transformer should have facility to seal the transformers Top
Plate & its body and also the Metal box, housing the LV bushing and MCCB (if provided)
along with the transformer. The metal box shall have pad-lock arrangement & complete
protection from dirt, rain-water & other pollutants & shall comply to IP:53 protection or
better.
15.0 RATING AND TERMINAL MARKING PLATES:
There shall be rating plates on the transformer containing the information specified
in clause 15.2 of IS: 2026-1977 (part-i). 50% & 100% load losses of the transformer
should also be mentioned on the rating plate. The following additional information must
also be punched on the plate and imposed two opposite sides of the body of T/F.
i) Purchase Order No & Date.
ii) Date of inspection.
iii) Make
v) Guarantee period
4-Star rating label in accordance with colour design, logo etc., shall be provided on the transformer as per the design / recommendations of Bureau of Efficiency (BEE). 16.0 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS The guaranteed technical particulars of the transformer shall be given by
the tenderer (Annexure-I) along with the tender. Tenders without GTPS shall be out rightly
rejected
17.0 CHALLENGE CLAUSE The material offered / received after the inspection by the authorized
inspecting Officer may again be subjected to the test for losses or any other parameters
from any testing house / in house technique of the Nigam having requisite capabilities and
facilities. The results if found deviating / unacceptable or in non-compliance with approved
GTP’s, the lot shall be rejected and bidder shall arrange to supply the within thirty (30)
days of such detection at his cost including to & fro transportation. In addition to this a
penalty @ 10% of cost of the rejected lost of material shall be imposed
General Manager/P&D Cum-Member Secretary CSC UHBVN Panchkula.
______________________________________________________________________
Page 21 of 26
21
ANNEXURE-1
GUARANTEED & OTHER PARTICULARS FOR DISTRIBUTION
TRANSFORMERS
(To be furnished by the Manufacturer)
SI.N Description 25 KVA 63 KVA
100KVA
1. Make & Manufacturer
2. Place of Manufacture
3. Voltage in KVA 11000/433 V 11000/433 V 11000/433 V
4. Rating in KVA 25 KVA 63 KVA 100 KVA
5. Core Material used and Grade
a) Flux density
b) Over fluxing without
saturation (Curve to be furnished
by the Manufacturer in support
of his claim)
6. Maximum temperature rise of
a) Windings by resistance method
b) Oil by Thermometer
7. Magnetizing (No load) Current at
a) Normal Voltage
b) Maximum Voltage
8. Core loss in watts
a) Normal Voltage
b) Maximum Voltage
9. Resistance of Windings at 20 deg. C
(with 5% tolerance)
a) HV Winding (ohms)
b) LV Winding (ohms)
10. Full load losses (watts) at 75 deg. c
11. Total Losses at 100% load at 75 deg. c
12. Total Losses at 50% load at 75 deg. c
13. Current density used for
a) HV Winding
b) LV Winding
14. Clearances
a) Core & LV
b) LV & HV
c) HV Phase to Phase
______________________________________________________________________
Page 22 of 26
22
d) End insulation clearance to Earth
e) Any point of winding to tank
15. Efficiency at 75 deg. C.
a) Unity P.F. &
b) 0.8 P.F
1) 125 % load
2) 100 % laod
3) 75 % load
4) 50 % load
5) 25 % load
16. Regulation at
a) Unity P.F.
b) 0.8 P.F. at 75 deg. C
17. % Impedance at 75 deg. C
18. Flash Test
HV 28 KV/ 50 HZ for 1 minute
LV 3 KV/ 50 HZ for 1 minute
19. Over potential Test Double Voltage &
20. Double frequency for 1 minute
21. Impulse test
22. Weight content of
a) Core Lamination (min.)
b) Windings (min.)
c) Tank & Fittings (Thickness of side walls & thickness of top/bottom plate of DT) d) Oil
e) Oil qty (min.)
f) Total Weight
23. Oil Data
1. Qty for first filling (mm)
2. Grade of oil used
3. Maker’s name
4. BDV at the time of filling
24. Transformer:
1) Overall length X breadth X height
2) Tank length X breadth X height
3) Thickness of plates for
a) Side plate (min.) b) Top & Bottom plate (min.) 25. Radiation:
1) Heat dissipation by tank walls exclusive & bottom 2) Heat dissipation by cooling tube
______________________________________________________________________
Page 23 of 26
23
3) Dia. & thickness of cooling tube 4) Whether calculation sheet for selecting cooling
area to ensure that the transformer is capable
of giving continuous rated output without exceeding
temperature rise is enclosed.
26. Inter layer insulation provided in design for
1) Top & bottom layer
2) In between all layer
3) Details of end insulation
4) Whether wedges are provide at 50 % turns of the HV coil
27. Insulation materials provided
a) For Conductors (1) HV (2) LV
b) For Core
28. Material and Size of the wire used
1) HV
a) SWG/mm
b) Dia
2) LV
a) Strip size.
b) No. of Conductors in parallel.
c) Total area of cross section (sq. mm.)
29. Is the name plate gives all particulars as required in Tender
30. MCCB (if provided) as per Nigam latest technical specification.
31. Whether BEE recommended 4-star Label Plate fixed on the DT
32. Particulars of Bushings HV/ LV
i) Maker’s name
ii) Type IS-3347/IS- 1180
iii) Rating as per I.S.
iv) Dry power frequency voltage withstand test
v) Wet power frequency voltage withstand test
Note: The following shall be specifically confirmed 1. Whether the offer conforms to the limits of impedance mentioned in the specification 2. Whether the offer conforms to the limits of temperature rise mentioned in the specification. 3. Whether the losses of the transformers offered are within the limits specified 4. Whether the transformers offered is already type for the design and test reports enclosed.
______________________________________________________________________
Page 24 of 26
24
ANNEXURE-II
ADDITIONAL DETAILS
SI. No. Description
1. Core Grade
2. Core diameter ( mm)
3. Gross Core area (cm)
4. Net Core area (cm)
5. Flux density (Tesla)
6. Wt. of Core (kg.)
7. Loss per kg. of Core at the
Specified Flux density (Watts)
8. Core window height
9. Center to center distance of the core (mm)
10. No. of LV. Turns
11. No. of HV turns
12. Size of LV Conductor bare/ covered (mm)
13. Size of HV conductor bare/ covered (mm)
14. No. of parallels
15. Current density of LV winding amps/sq.mm.
16. Current density of HV winding amps/ sq.mm
17. Wt. of the LV winding for Transformer kg.
18. Wt. of the HV winding for Transformer kg.
19. No. of LV Coils/phase
20. No. of HV coils/phase
21. Height of LV Windings mm
22. Height of HV Windings mm
23. ID/OD of LV Winding mm
24. ID/OD of HV winding mm
25. Size of the duct in LV winding mm
26. Size of the duct in HV winding mm
27. Size of the duct between HV & LV mm
28. HV winding to LV winding clearance mm
29. HV winding to tank clearance mm
30. Calculated impedance %
31. HV to earth creepage distance mm
32. LV to earth creepage distance mm
______________________________________________________________________
Page 25 of 26
25
ANNEXURE-3
SOURCE OF MATERIALS/PLACES OF MANUFACTURE TESTING AND
INSPECTION
SI. No. Item Source of Material Place of Place of testing and Manufacture
inspection
1. Laminations
2. Aluminium Conductor
3. Insulated winding wires
4. Oil
5. Press Boards
6. Kraft Paper
7. MS Plated / Angles/ Channels
8. Gaskets
9. Bushing HV/ LV
10. Paints
______________________________________________________________________
Page 26 of 26
26
ACRONYMS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--
Reference Abbreviations Name and Asset
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--
IEC International Electro Technical
Commission Bureau Central de la
Commission Electro Technique
International, Rue de verembe
Geneva, Switzerland.
ISO International Organization for
Standardization.
Danish Board of Standardization
Aurchoegyej-12
DK-2900, Heerpup
DENMARK
ISS Indian Standard Bureau of
Indian Standards
Nanak Bhawan
9, Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg,
NEW DELHI-110002, INDIA
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--
UHBVN & DHBVN CSC SPECS
UTTAR & DAKSHIN HARYANA BIJLI VITRAN NIGAM
Specification No. CSC-IV/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
11/0.433 KV 6.3, 10, 16, 20 COPPER WOUND CSP TYPE
& 40 KVA
ALUMINIUM WOUND CSP TYPE,
(WITH COMPLETELY SELF PROTECTED)
DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
General Manager/P&D, General Manager/P&D, DHBVN, Hisar UHBVN/DHBVN, Panchkula
Issue of the Month: APRIL.2009
C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Desktop\28-01-10\PDC\CSC -IV.doc Page 1 of 27
UHBVN & DHBVN CSC SPECS
C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Desktop\28-01-10\PDC\CSC -IV.doc Page 2 of 27
TECHNICAL SPECIFICTIONS FOR 11/0.433 KV 6.3, 10, 16 & 20 KVA COPPER WOUND & 40 KVA ALUMINIUM WOUND, WITH COMPLETELY SELF PROTECTED DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS 1. SCOPE
This specification covers the engineering, design, manufacture and
testing, stage inspection, testing before supply & delivery of 6.3, 10, 16 &
20 KVA Copper wound & 40 KVA Aluminium wound distribution
transformers, with CSP features required for outdoor sub-stations in
earthed neutral, electric distribution with Normal / System Voltage of 11/12
KV.
The offered material shall be complete with all components necessary for
their effective & trouble free operation. Such components shall be deemed
to be within scope of bidder’s supply irrespective of whether these are
specifically brought out in the specifications.
2. STANDARDS.
The transformer shall conform in all respects to IS-1180:2026 as amended
from time to time except where specified otherwise. The fittings and
accessories shall also comply generally with the requirement of the latest
edition of the respective IS.
3. SERVICE CONDITIONS:-
The Distribution Transformers & other equipment/material to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory operation under the following climatic Conditions as per IS-2026 (Part-I) latest revision i) Location At various locations
in the state of Haryana
ii) Max ambient temperature (deg.c) - 60
iii) Min ambient air temperature (deg. c) -5
iv) Max average daily ambient temperature (deg. c)
40
v) Max. yearly weighed average ambient temperature (deg. C)
32
vi) Max. altitude above mean sea level (Meters)
1000
vii) Minimum Relative Humidity (%age ) 26
viii) Max. Relative Humidity (%age) 95
ix) Avg. no of Rainy days/ year 120
x) Avg. annual rainfall 900mm
xi) Maximum wind pressure 195 Kg./mm Sq.
The equipment shall be for use in moderately hot and humid tropical
climate, conducive to rust and fungus growth.
4. TYPE AND RATING
The transformers shall have core type construction and oil immersed,
naturally air cooled and shall be suitable for outdoor service as step down
transformers. The rating and electrical characteristics of the transformers
shall be as follows:-
UHBVN & DHBVN CSC SPECS
C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Desktop\28-01-10\PDC\CSC -IV.doc Page 3 of 27
1) Continuous Capacity 6.3, 10, 16, 20 & 40 KVA
2) Rated HT Voltage 11 KV
3) Rated LT Voltage 433-250 Volts
4) Frequency 50 Hz + 5%
6) Connection (HT) Delta
7) Connection (LT) Star
8) Vector Group Dyn-11
9) Type of Cooling ONAN
5. TEMPERATURE RISE
Each transformer shall be capable of operating continuously at its normal
rating without exceeding following temperature rises with the above
service conditions given in clause 3 :-
i) 35oC in oil by thermometer. ii) 40oC in winding by resistance. iii) Hot Spot temperature not to exceed 95oC when calculated over an
annual weighted average temperature of 35o C as per IS: 2026 (Part-II Clause 4.9.4)
The limit of temperature rise mentioned above will have to be satisfied by
the manufacturer by carrying the Heat Run test by feeding losses
calculated at 100o C corresponding to the rated current.
6. LOSSES AND IMPEDANCE VALUES: 6.1 The losses at 50% & 100% load shall not exceed the value given in the
following table: - KVA
Rating Max. losses at 50% load in
Watts at 75oC Max. losses at 100% load in Watts at 75oC
6.3 53 245
10 98 300
16 135 440
20 157 535
40 200 920
The losses are maximum allowable and there would not be any plus
tolerance. No weightage in prices for offers with lower losses shall be
given for these sizes of transformers.
6.2 IMPEDANCE The percentage impedance at 75oC shall be up to 4.5% subject to
tolerance as per IS: 2026-1977.
6.3 (a) FLUX DENSITY Flux density at normal voltage shall not be more than 1.60 Tesla. (b) OVER FLUX Over flux in the transformer core shall be limited to 12.5% to ensure that in
the event of over voltage to the extent of 12.5%, the core does not get saturated.
(c) NO LOAD CURRENT No load current at 100% voltage and 50 Hz shall not be more than 2% of
the full load current and shall be subject to tolerance as per ISS. No. load current at V/F=112.5% of normal V/F shall not exceed 4%. The supplier shall furnish necessary design data in support of this stipulation.
UHBVN & DHBVN CSC SPECS
C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Desktop\28-01-10\PDC\CSC -IV.doc Page 4 of 27
7. PROTECTION AGAINST TRANSIENTS
In order to ensure that the transformers will withstand
lightening/disturbances, the impulse withstand strength of transformers
windings shall not be less 75 KV peak (1.2/50 micro second positive
wave).
8. INSULATION RESISTANCE OF WINDINGS: The minimum insulation resistance values in Mega Ohms between
winding and earth when the transformer is filled with oil should be:
Insulation Resistance in Mega Ohms between winding to earth.
20oc 30oC 40oC 50oC 60oC
11000 Volts (HV) 800 400 200 100 50 433 Volts (LV) 400 200 100 50 25 Insulations Resistance in Mega Ohms between HV & LV windings:- HV & LV 1600 800 400 200 100 9. TEST VOLTAGE: Transformers shall be capable of withstanding the
power frequency and impulse test voltage prescribed below:-
Nominal system voltage
Highest system voltage
Impulse Test Voltage
Power frequency voltage
11 KV (rms) 12 KV (rms) 75 KV (peak) 28 KV (rms)
10. OVERLOAD CAPACITY: The safe overload capacity of the transformer and duration of over load for
satisfactory operation at site under maximum temperature conditions shall
be clearly stated in the tender. The temperature limits under the specified
over load capacity should also be stated.
11. PARALLEL OPERATION: The transformers shall be capable of operating satisfactorily in parallel
with one another under all conditions of load whether balanced or not, and
under varying power factor.
12. TANK The main tank of the transformers shall be made of good quality steel
having a minimum thickness of sides of the tanks 3.15 mm and a
minimum thickness of 5.0 mm for top and bottom plates. The tank shall
be capable of withstanding a pressure up to 0.8 kg/cm2 and (-) 0.7 kg/cm2
for 30 minutes and 10 minutes respectfully as prescribed in clause 27.2 (i)
of this specification. The word “UHBVN/DHBVN PROPERTY” shall be
engraved on the top cover plate and side of the tank body.
The following information (in addition to be provided in rating and
diagram plate) shall be punched on two opposite sides of the body of T/F.
a) Property of UHBVN/DHBVN b) P.O No & date. c) Date & year of manufacture. d) Make
UHBVN & DHBVN CSC SPECS
C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Desktop\28-01-10\PDC\CSC -IV.doc Page 5 of 27
Satisfactory lifting lugs shall be properly secured to the top of the tank or
to the tank sides. The design of the tank and lugs (size 8 mm MS Plate)
shall be as such as to permit the complete transformers filled with oil being
lifted by means of the lugs, without risk of any damage.
13. PRESSURE RELEASE DEVICE
The transformer shall be equipped with a self-sealing pressure release
device, designed to operate at a maximum pressure of 8 psi (0.564 kg/
cm2). The PRD shall be provided in the low-voltage terminating portion of
the tank above top oil level. Inlet port shall be ¼ inch or longer NPT.
Releasing pressure shall be 0.3 kg/cm2.
14. TERMINALS AND BUSHINGS: a) The high and low voltage terminals shall be outdoor porcelain bushings
type for bare Aluminium connection. The bushing rod shall be of brass
and shall conform to ISS-3447 (Part-III). LT rods shall be manufactured
through drawing and HT rods shall be duly forged and in case casting
shall be accepted. Each, terminal including the neutral shall be distinctly
marked and colored for phase voltage on both the primary and secondary
sides in accordance with the diagram of connections supplied with the
transformers. The system of marking shall be in accordance with the
requirements of IS: 1180 amended to date.
b) The HV bushings shall be as per IS: 2099 with latest version and IS:
3347. The LV bushings shall be as per IS: 7721 (with latest amendment(s)
if any).
c) All porcelain used in the bushing shall be homogeneous free from other
flaws affecting its mechanical strength or dielectric quality. These should
be well vitrified, tough and impervious to moisture. A minimum phase to
phase external clearance of 75 mm for LV bushings and 255 mm for HV
bushings shall be obtained with bushings mounted on the transformers.
d) The external terminal clearances shall be maintained after fixing
Bimetallic clamps/thimbles.
Where HT/LT bushings are fitted on the side of the tank, the same shall be
fitted on a conical/rectangular pocket in the tank body and not on the
pipe/flange.
UHBVN & DHBVN CSC SPECS
C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Desktop\28-01-10\PDC\CSC -IV.doc Page 6 of 27
15. SEALING GASKETS: All sealing washers/gasket shall be made of oil and heat resistant
Nitrile/neoprene rubber/synthetic rubber bonded cork type RC-70C
Gaskets. Gaskets made of natural rubbers or cork sheet are not
permissible.
16. COOLING: All the transformers shall be capable of giving a continuous output without
exceeding the specified temperature rise.
17. TRANSFORMER OIL:
The transformer oil used shall comply with the requirements of the
specification as per Annexure-B enclosed in addition to the provision in
the IS: 335-1993 (Latest). Oil sample will also be taken out from fresh
stock of T/F oil to be tested as per latest IS: 335-1993.
18. INSULATION MATERIAL:-
18..1. Material:-Electrical grade insulation Kraft papers and press Boards of
standard should be used. For the use standard material the names of
following firms have been approved.
Sr. No. Name of insulating material
Name of the firms
1 Press board a. Senapathy whitely
b. Raman Board
2 Craft paper a. Ballarpur
b. Padamjee
c. Triveni
3 Press pahn paper Senapathy whitely
4 Gaskets a. New cork
b. Talbros
18.2 All spacers, axial wedges / runners used in windings shall be made of pre-
compressed pressboard-solid, conforming to type B 3.1 of IEC 641-3-2. In
case of cross-over coil winding of HV all spacers shall be properly sheared
and dovetail punched to ensure proper locking. All axial wedges/ runners
shall be properly milled to dovetail shape so that they pass through the
designed spacers freely. Insulation shearing, cutting, milling and
punching operations shall be carried out in such out in such a way, that
there should not be any burr and dimensional variations.
19. RATING AND TERMINAL MARKING PLATES: There shall be rating
plates on the transformer containing the information specified in clause
15.2 of IS: 2026-1977 (part-i). The 50% & 100% load losses of the
transformer should also be mentioned on the rating plate. The following
additional information must also be punched on the plate and imposed two
opposite sides of the body of T/F.
i) Purchase Order No & Date.
ii) Date of inspection.
UHBVN & DHBVN CSC SPECS
C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Desktop\28-01-10\PDC\CSC -IV.doc Page 7 of 27
iii) Property of UHBVN/DHBVN
iv) Make.
20. CORE: Core of the transformers could be of CRGO material or Amorphous
material. (a) CRGO Material:
The Core lamination shall be held rigidly by a steel frame work, which
shall clamp them together to prevent any vibration. The top and bottom
yoke clamping channels shall be tied together with at least 4 Nos tie rods
of minimum 12 mm dia, duly insulated. Only medium weight channels as
per ISS: 808 are to be used. Each core lamination of each yoke as well
as each limb shall be one piece and no joint shall be allowed in the same.
The core shall be provided with lifting lugs suitable for lifting the complete
core and coil assembly of the transformer without transmitting the stresses
to the laminations.
The transformer shall be suitable for over fluxing due to combine effect of
system voltage and frequency up to 12.5% without injurious heating at full
load condition and shall not get saturated.
The laminations shall be made of best quality non-ageing silicon steel cut
from annealed steel plates. These laminations shall be as thin as possible
consistent with mechanically strong constructions. Each lamination shall
be coated with a hot oil proof insulating material on both sides. The
laminations should be free from rust colour spots. The core shall be built
up with lamination of new prime, non ageing low loss, high permeability
CRGO silicon steel. The core material should be HI-B not below. M-IH,
Grade or better or equivalent. The core coils shall have the original
sealing of CGRO manufacturer(s) intact and supplier shall produce the
relevant documents indicating the particulars authenticating that the core
coils of Prime CRGO. M-III or better steel should be actually used at the
time of stage inspection.
Lamination core should be cut at 45o to avoid excessive losses at the
joints. The core material shall be processed by slitting only. Only one
grade and one thickness of core shall be accepted and no mixing of
different grade/thickness of lamination shall be allowed.
UHBVN/DHBVN reserves the right to ask for the original
documents relating to purchase of core to check the genuineness of the
core used for manufacture of UHBVN/DHBVN transformers for which
instructions/guidelines shall be issued after issuance of POs if required.
For the bolts used for clamping the core shall be so insulated that
there is no possibility of contact between edges and the core bolts. The
bolts shall be tested at 2500 volts to earth. To prevent any possibility of
movement of core assembly in transit, the following provisions shall be
made:
i) 4 no. core guides shall be provided at the bottom of the tank.
UHBVN & DHBVN CSC SPECS
C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Desktop\28-01-10\PDC\CSC -IV.doc Page 8 of 27
Alternatively, bottom foot channels of core and core channels shall be
extended to serve this purpose.
ii) The core shall be securely fastened to sides of tank with minimum 4
fixing bolts.
(b) AMORPHOUS METAL:
i) The core shall be high quality Amorphous ribbons having very low loss
formed into wound cores of rectangular shape, bolted together to the
frames firmly to prevent vibration or noise. The complete design of core
must ensure permanency of the core loss with continuous working of the
transformers. The value of the flux density allowed in the design shall be
clearly stated in the offer. Curve showing the properties of the metal shall
be attached with the offer.
ii) Core clamping for amorphous metal transformers:
1. Core clamping shall be with top and bottom U-shaped core clamps
made of sheet steel clamped, HT steel rods for efficient clamping.
2. MS Core clamps shall be painted with varnish or oil resistant paint.
3. MS rods shall be used as tie rods.
4. Suitable provision shall be made in the bottom core clamp/bottom plate
of the transformer to arrest movement of the active part.
iii) The transformers core shall be suitable for over fluxing (due to combined
effect of voltage and frequency) upto 12.5% without injurious heating at
full load conditions and shall not get saturated. The Bidder shall furnish
necessary design data in support of this situation.
iv) No load current shall not exceed 2% of full load current and will be
measured by energizing the transformer at 433 volts, 50c/s on the
secondary. Increase of 433 V voltage by 12.5% shall not increase the no
Load Current disproportionately high. Test for magnetic balance by
connecting the LV phase by phase to the rated phase voltage and
measurement of an, bn, cn, Voltage will be carried out.
NOTE: I) “Equal weightage shall be given to the transformers with Amorphous
Metal Core and CRGO core”.
II) In case of variable prices, the price variation in respect of
amorphous metal core shall be to any extent on negative side
as per IEEMA indices applicable for CRGO core but there will
be no price variation allowed for amorphous core on the
positive side.
21. WINDING AND INSULATIONS:
The conductor used for winding shall consist of high conductivity,
non-oxidizing copper /Alluminium. The primary windings shall be
connected in delta and the secondary winding in star (Vector symbol Dyn-
II), so as to produce a positive displacement of 30o from the primary to the
secondary vector of the same phase. The neutral of secondary winding
UHBVN & DHBVN CSC SPECS
C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Desktop\28-01-10\PDC\CSC -IV.doc Page 9 of 27
shall be brought out to a separate insulated terminal. HV windings shall
consist of maximum 2 coils per limb. All delta leads from HT coils as well
as HT line leads should be taken out through SE Copper wires of sufficient
X- sectional area to impart desired Mechanical strength. The current
density in these leads should however not exceed 0.8A / mm2. All the
above leads should be taken out through bakelite tubes HV winding
should be super enameled (SE) of medium coverage as per IS: 4800
(part-II). LV winding may be of DPC or SE of medium coverage as per IS:
4800 (Part –II).
The coils shall be circular in shape and their construction shall be
such that there is no possibility of distortion under any likely conditions of
service. The high and low voltage windings shall be concentric, with the
low tension windings nearest the transformers core and high tension
windings outside. The two windings shall be so placed that they remain
electro magnetically balanced under all conditions of service. The axial
length of the coils must be kept down to a minimum so as to strengthen
the winding against axial stresses under short circuit conditions.
In oil immersed winding, an adequate provision shall be made for
the circulation of oil, so that a very low temperature gradient between
copper and oil is assured and any danger of excessive local heating is
eliminated.
The coils shall be wound to form a continuous coil or a number of
discs and the individual discs separated to provide a distinct oil space
between them. The inner coil shall be adequately insulated from the core.
The insulating cylinders shall have high electrical and mechanical
strength. No strip conductor would on edge shall have a width exceeding
six times its thickness.
All HV and LV coils ends shall be provided with crimped lugs.
Starting and finishing leads to HT coils should be feruled, crimped and
covered with insulating sleeve. These leads should also be clamped
tightly with the body of winding with the help of cotton tape during
manufacture of these coils. The star point on the LV side shall preferably
be properly sleeved and crimped. However, the manufacturer may make
the star point by fixing a neutral bus bar of Copper with the help of bolts,
nuts and spring washers etc. All fixations/joints should be such that there
is no scope for loose contact, local heating, breakage of conductor,
loosening due to vibrations. All the delta leads should be clamped tightly
on to the special frame/bracket making pie connections. This
frame/bracket could be made of bakelite flats having min size of 25X6
mm. The leads leading to the HV bushings terminals then be clamped to
the horizontal support base of ‘pie’ frame so that vibration during short
circuit are not passed on to windings.
UHBVN & DHBVN CSC SPECS
C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Desktop\28-01-10\PDC\CSC -IV.doc Page 10 of 27
Copper strip/foil used for earthing the core should be tinned. The
tinned foil should be properly connected to the channel with bolts and nuts
after removing the paint from the channel underneath the copper foil.
Current density both in LT and HT windings shall not exceed 2.8
Amp./ mm2. THE CONDUCTOR SIZE FOR HT & LT SHALL
ACCORDINGLY BE CHOSEN FROM THE RELEVANT IS
SPECIFICATION AND SHALL BE OF STANDARD SIZE AS PER IS
ONLY.
All transformers shall be designed and constructed to withstand without
damage, thermal & dynamic effects of an external short circuit. The
manufacturer/supplier shall furnish the relevant design data & calculations
in support of having fulfilled this requirement as stipulated under clause-9
of IS: 2026 (Part-I).
Two layers of electrical grade insulation Kraft paper of 2 mil (min)
thickness shall be used as inter layer insulation of HV & LV winding. Axial
ducts for free flow of oil shall be provided with the help of axial wedges
numbering at least 6 Nos. Dovetailed spacers shall be used between coils
of HV winding. Angle shaped or plain end rings made from pre-
compressed press board barriers shall be provided in between HV
windings.
Guides on all the four sides shall be provided to prevent shifting of the
active part and thereby accidentally touching the tank.
Electrical grade insulating Kraft paper used shall be of Triveni, Ballarpur
make, press board made from natural wood pulp, Electrical grade type D
conforming to IS; 1576-1992 shall be used and will be Senapathy Whitely
or better quality make and Gaskets of Talbros, Nucork make.
22. Following minimum internal clearances shall be maintained for the CRGO
core or in accordance with relevant IS:
a) Between HV & LV 10 mm b) Between HV winding and tank wall i) Non-bushing side 30mm ii) Bushing side 40mm iii)Between sections of HV winding 11mm iv) Between HV winding 10mm with bakelite
press board barriers. v) Between HV winding and yoke at ends 25mm with end
rings. vi) Between LV winding and yoke at ends 10mm vii) Between yoke & inside of tank top cover 100mm vii) Between yoke & tank bottom 40mm viii) Between LV winding and core 3mm
c) Clearance (Electricals)
Voltage Medium Clearance phase to phase
Clearance phase to earth
433 Air 75mm 55mm 11000 Air 255mm 205mm
UHBVN & DHBVN CSC SPECS
C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Desktop\28-01-10\PDC\CSC -IV.doc Page 11 of 27
23. LOCK NUTS: Bolts & nuts shall be provided with lock washer or lock nuts. Split pins
shall be used for the purpose of lock nuts.
24. SILICAGEL BREATHER: The silicagel breather device shall be provided and shall have capacity to
contain 250 gm Silicagel.
25. SURFACE PREPARATION & PAINTING.
25.9.1. General
25.9.1.1. All paints shall be applied in accordance with the paint manufacturer’s
recommendations. Particular attention shall be paid to the following:
25.9.1.1.1. Proper storage to avoid exposure as well as extremes of temperature.
25.9.1.1.2. Surface preparation prior to painting.
25.9.1.1.3. Mixing and thinning.
25.9.1.1.4. Application of paints and the recommended limit of time intervals
between coats.
25.9.1.1.5. Shelf life for storage.
25.9.1.2. All paints when applied in a normal full coat, shall be free from runs,
sags, wrinkles, patchiness, brush marks or other defects.
25.9.1.3. All primers shall be well marked into the surface, particularly in areas
where painting is evident, and the first priming coat shall be applied as soon as
possible after cleaning. The paint shall be applied by airless spray according to
manufacture’s recommendations. However, whenever airless spray is not
possible, conventional spray be used with prior approval of purchaser.
25.9.1.4. The supplier shall prior to painting nameplates, lettering gauges sight
glasses, light fittings and similar such items.
25.9.2. Cleaning and Surface preparation
25.9.2.1. After all machining, forming and welding shall been
completed, all steel work surfaces shall be
thoroughly cleaned of rust, scale, welding slag or
spatter and other contamination prior to any
painting.
25.9.2.2. Steel surfaces shall prepared by Short blast
cleaning or Chemical by Seven Tank process including
Phosphating to the appropriate quality.
25.9.2.3. The pressure and volume of the compressed air
supply for blast cleaning shall meet the work
requirement and shall be sufficiently free from all
water contamination to ensure that the cleaning
process is not impaired.
25.9.2.4. Chipping, scraping and steel wire brushing using
manual or power driven tools cannot remove firmly
adherent mill-scale shall only be used where blast
cleaning is impractical. Manufacture to explain such
areas in his technical offer clearly.
UHBVN & DHBVN CSC SPECS
C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Desktop\28-01-10\PDC\CSC -IV.doc Page 12 of 27
25.9.3. Protective Coating:
25.9.3.1. As soon as all items have been cleaned and within
four hours of the subsequent drying. They shall be given
suitable anti-corrosion protection.
25.9.4. Paint Material.
Followings are the types of paint that may be suitably used
for the items to be painted at shop and supply of matching
paint to site:
25.9.4.1. Heat resistant paint (Hot oil Proof) for inside surface.
25.9.4.2. For external surfaces one coat of Thermo Setting powder paint
or 1 coats of Zinc chromate primer followed by 2 coats of Synthetic
Enamel /Polyurethane base paint. These paints can be either air-drying or
stoving.
25.9.4.3. The colour of the finishing coats shall be dark admiral gray
conforming to No. 632 of ISS-5 of 1961
25.9.5. Painting procedure
25.9.5.1. All painting shall be carried out in conformity with
both Specification and with the paint manufacture’s
recommendation. All paints in anyone particular system,
whether shop or site applied, shall originate from one paint
manufacture.
25.9.5.2. Particular attention shall be paid to the
manufacturer’s instructions on storage, mixing, thinning and
pot life. The paint shall only be applied in the manner detailed
by the manufacture’s e.g. brush, roller, conventional or airless
spray and shall be applied under the manufacture’s
recommended condition Minimum and maximum time intervals
between coast shall be closely followed.
25.9.5.3. All prepared steel surfaces should be primed before
visible re-rusting occurs or within 4 hours whichever is
sooner.
25.9.5.4. Chemical treated steel surface shall be primed as
soon as the surface is dry and while the surface is still
warm.
25.9.5.5. Where the quality of film is impaired by excess film
thickness (wrinkling, mud cracking or general
softness) the Supplier shall remove the unsatisfactory
paint coating and apply another. As a general rule,
dry film thickness should not exceed the specified
minimum dry film thickness by more than 25%. In all
instances where two or more coats of the same paint
are specified, such coating may or may not be of
contrasting colours.
UHBVN & DHBVN CSC SPECS
C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Desktop\28-01-10\PDC\CSC -IV.doc Page 13 of 27
25.9.5.6. Paint applied to items that are not be painted shall be
removed at Supplier’s expense, leaving the surface
clean, unstained and undamaged.
25.9.6. Damaged Paintwork
25.9.6.1. Any damage occurring to any part of a painting
scheme shall be made good to the same standard of
corrosion protection and appearance as that originally
employed.
25.9.7. Any damage paint work shall be made good as follows:
25.9.7.1. The damaged area, together with an area extending
25 mm around its boundary, shall be cleaned down to
bare metal.
25.9.7.2. A priming coat shall be immediately applied, followed
by a full paint finish equal to that originally applied and
extending 50 mm around the perimeter of the original damage.
25.9.7.3. The repainted surface shall present a smooth
surface. This shall be obtained by carefully
chamfering the paint edges before and after priming.
25.9.8. Dry Film Thickness
25.9.8.1. To the maximum extent practicable the coats shall
be applied as a continuous film of uniform thickness
and free of pores. Overspray, skips, runs, sags and
drips should be avoided. The different coats may or
may not be of the same colour.
25.9.8.2. Each coat of paint shall be allowed to harden before
the next is applied as per manufacturer’s
recommendation.
25.9.8.3. Particular attention must be paid to full film
thickness at edges.
25.9.8.4. The requirements for the dry film thickness (DFT) of
paint and the materials to be used shall be as given below.
Sr. No.
Paint Type Area to be painted
No. of coats Total Dry film thickness (mm)
1 Thermo setting paint Inside
Inside outside
01 01
20 microns 60 microns
2 Liquid paint a) Zinc chromate (primer) b) Synthetic Enamel/ Poly Urethene (Finish coat) c) Hot oil paint/ Varnish
Outside Outside inside
01 02 01
30 microns 25 microns each 35/ 10 microns
.
UHBVN & DHBVN CSC SPECS
C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Desktop\28-01-10\PDC\CSC -IV.doc Page 14 of 27
26. RAW MATERIAL
The raw material used in the manufacture of transformers shall be brand
new and of the best quality available in the market.
27. TEST AND INSPECTION
All tests shall be carried out in accordance with clause 16 of IS : 2026
(Part-I) amended to date or any other applicable standard for
transformers.
27.1. ROUTINE TESTS
All transformers shall be subject to the following routine tests at the
manufacturer’s works in accordance with IS: 2026 and 1180 (Part-I):-
a) Measurement of winding resistance.
b) Ratio, polarity and phase relationship.
c) Measurement of impedance voltage/short circuit impedance.
d) Maximum Load losses at 50% load & 100% load at 75o C
e) No load current. f) Insulation resistance g) Induced over voltage withstand. h) Separate source voltage withstand. i) Peel off test for paint. j) Oil leakage test with pressure of 0.8 KG/CM2 above atmospheric
pressure for 10 minutes. The losses shall be measured by three-watt meter method & three volt
meter/Ammeters shall be used to measure voltage/Current.
27.2 TYPE TESTS
The supplier shall supply copies of following type test certificates carried
out at a Govt., recognized Testing House/Laboratory
27.2.1 (i) AIR PRESSURE TEST: The tank shall be fixed with a dummy cover
with all fittings including bushing in position and shall be subjected to the
following pressure created inside the tank.
a) 0.8 kg/cm2 above the atmospheric pressure for 30 minutes.
b) A vacuum corresponding to (-) 0.7 kg/cm2 for 10 minutes. Permanent
deflection of flat plate, after pressure has been released, shall not
exceed the value given below:-
Length of plate Deflection
Upto 750 mm 5mm
751 to 1250mm 6mm
The oil leakage test shall be carried out on 10% of transformers in each
lot. The firm shall ensure to get this test conducted strictly as per relevant
ISS.
(ii) TEMPERATURE RISE TEST: shall be carried out on one unit from
each lot offered for inspection to ensure that it meets with the requirement
specified under Clause-5 of this specification. The tenderers shall submit
calculations for temperature rise along with the tender.
UHBVN & DHBVN CSC SPECS
C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Desktop\28-01-10\PDC\CSC -IV.doc Page 15 of 27
(iv) MAGNETIC BALANCE TEST: shall be conducted by connecting the B
phase (central) of LV to rated voltage and measurement of LV side (Un,
Vn, Wn) voltages, Value shall be within a tolerance of (+/-) 2% (middle full
& sides half).
Magnetic Balance test (Type Test) should be conducted on one
sample from each lot for all ratings of transformers.
27.2.2 Impulse Voltage Test; The test on all the three limbs of HT side as per clause-12 of ISS: 2026-
1977 shall be got conducted in the presence of Nigam’s representative
from some recognized/Govt. Test House. The dispatches shall only be
allowed after successful conductance of this test, on one transformer.
27.2.3 SHORT CIRCUIT TEST: The test shall be carried out in accordance with the details specified in IS:
2026-1977 from some recognized/ Govt. Test House.
Charges for routine tests and type tests including impulse voltage
withstand test and short circuit test will be included in the quoted prices.
The purchaser also reserves the right to get any number of additional
Units type tested. However, the cost shall be paid and as such the test
charges for these tests should be quoted separately. No supplies will be
allowed to be dispatched without inspection by the purchaser/its
representative and without carrying out the impulse and short circuit tests
satisfactorily.
27.2.4 . Note: - If sample fail in any of the type tests viz. short circuit tests or
impulse tests, the whole lot shall be considered rejected. The firm
shall offer fresh lot for inspection and get the type tests carried out
again at its own cost.
27.3 TRANSFORMER OIL:
The transformer oil shall be purchased by the contractor directly from the
transformer oil manufacturers whose products have been given ISI
certificate mark. The firm shall ensure to get the tests conducted strictly
as per relevant ISS.
i) Net quantity of oil (up to 30o C mark) excluding the oil soaked in
core-coil assembly shall be given in G.T.P.
ii) Approximate quantity of oil soaked in core-coil assembly may
however be given separately.
UHBVN & DHBVN CSC SPECS
C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Desktop\28-01-10\PDC\CSC -IV.doc Page 16 of 27
27.4 PHYSICAL CHECK OF VARIOUS DIMENSIONS (INTERNAL AND
EXTERNAL) WEIGHT CLEARANCE ETC.
One number transformer from each lot shall be opened for checking of
core weight, size and weight of HT & LT conductor, quantity of oil and
various clearance etc.
27.5 INSPECTION:
STAGE INSPECTION: Stage inspection may be carried out by the
inspecting officers of the Nigam or its nominated agency during the course
of manufacture. The core shall be processed by slitting only which shall
be carried out at the supplier’s works or can be got carried out on job
order basis from other source. The core coils offered for stage inspection
shall have the original sealing of CRGO manufacturer intact. Loose coils
without the original seal of manufacturer shall not be accepted.
FINAL INSPECTION:
The inspection shall be carried out by Nigam’s representative or any
outside inspection agency to be nominated by the Nigam. All tests and
inspection shall be made at the place of manufacturer unless otherwise
specifically agreed upon by the manufacturer and purchaser at the time of
purchase. The manufacturer shall provide all reasonable facilities to the
inspectors representing the purchaser, without charges to satisfy that the
material is being manufactured in accordance with the specification.
The Nigam shall inspect, examine and test equipment/material
through its official (s) and/or through an outside agency nominated by
UHBVN/DHBVN at the Manufacturer’s/supplier’s works during or after the
manufacture of goods prior to dispatch on receipt of a clear notice of
minimum three weeks in advance to be reckoned from the date of receipt
of call by purchaser. The supplier/contractor shall provide all facilities as
may be required to carry out the tests in accordance with approved
standards free of cost. The sampling of T/Fs to be offered for inspection
shall be in accordance with the latest provisions of the relevant IS of latest
edition for carrying out the various tests at firms works.
It shall be the responsibility of the manufacturer to provide during
inspection, all testing instruments duly calibrated from a Govt. Test
House/Govt. approved test house within last 12 months. Before using an
instrument, the Nigam’s representative shall ensure that the seal of the
test house is intact and at none of the calibrated points the instrument has
error more than the prescribed limits of error.
Manufacturers shall maintain a complete record of the Routine tests
carried out on the transformer and shall produce the same whenever
desired by the purchaser.
27.5.1 The purchaser has the right to have the tests carried out at his own cost
by an independent agency whenever there is any dispute regarding the
UHBVN & DHBVN CSC SPECS
C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Desktop\28-01-10\PDC\CSC -IV.doc Page 17 of 27
quality of supply. If the transformer, fails in the test, the cost shall be
borne by the supplier and if passes, the cost shall be borne by the Nigam.
27.5.2 UHBVN/DHBVN shall get all the transformers of the complete lot tested
out at Nigam’s Stores after receiving the same in the store. In case any
T/f fails in tests, the same shall be replaced by the supplier at his own cost
within shortest possible time not exceeding fifteen days.
27.5.3 Fake Inspection calls
In case the supplier makes a fake inspection call i.e., the material is not
found ready by the Inspecting Officer deputed by the Nigam for inspection,
the supplier shall be liable to pay a fixed penalty of Rs. 20, 000/- for each
such fake call made by him.
28 PACKING:
The transformers shall be delivered suitably packed. Although the method
of packing is left to the discretion of manufacturer but it should be robust
enough for rough handling that is occasioned during transportation by
Nigam.
All accessories shall be dispatched in boxes or cases. They shall be of
tin, securely bound with wire and shall have all descriptive marking
stamped thereon.
The transportation arrangements of the transformers from the place
of manufacture to the destination are also required to be such that the
transformers are properly transported to the UHBVN/DHBVN stores. It will
be preferable to depute one suitable technical hand to get the
transformers checked in Stores before the same are taken on books and
attend to those transformers which are found leaking which have
developed some other defect during transportation.
29 CONTRACT DRAWINGS: Complete set of transformer drawing should be
submitted alongwith the tender. Four blue prints of the general outline and
assembly drawing for the transformer shall be submitted to this office within
two weeks of placement of order. The drawing should give dimensions,
weight, accessories, plan, front and side elevation. The dimensions, weights
mentioned in the above drawing should be same as guaranteed in the tender/
offer.
No negative tolerance will be allowed on dimensions/weight.
30. DEVIATIONS: - No deviation in technical particulars as per specifications
shall be accepted and the offers of such bidders who do not met with
UHBVN/DHBVN specifications are liable to be ignored.
31. GUARNTEED TECHNICAL PASRTICULARS
The guaranteed technical particulars of the transformer shall be given by
the tender (Annexure-A) along with the tender. Tenders without GTPS
shall be out rightly rejected
UHBVN & DHBVN CSC SPECS
C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Desktop\28-01-10\PDC\CSC -IV.doc Page 18 of 27
33. WARRANTY:
The supplier/ Contractor shall be responsible to replace free of cost with
no transportation and insurance expenses to the purchaser up to the
destination of material equipment, the whole or any part of material which
under normal and proper use and maintenance, proves defective in
material or workmanship within 78 months from the date of receipt in
Nigam’s Stores or 72 months from the date of installation, whichever is
earlier. Such replacement shall be effected by the Supplier/Contractor,
within a reasonable time not exceeding 1 month of the intimation to
defects. However, in case the supplier fails to effect replacement within
stipulated period they shall be liable to pay a penalty @18% of the cost of
the DTs for the remaining period of warranty of the same.
34. FASETENERS
All bolts, studs, screw threads pipe threads, bolt heads and nuts shall
comply with the appropriate Indian Standards for metric threads or the
technical equivalent.
Bolts or studs shall not be less than 6 mm in diameter except when used
for small wiring terminals. 2 Nos. anti theft fasteners of steel on two
diagonally opposite corners of the tank shall be provided. All nuts and
pins shall be adequately locked.
Wherever possible, bolts shall be fitted in such a manner that in the event
of failure of locking resulting in the nuts working loose and falling off, the
bolt will remain in position.
All ferrous bolts, nuts and washers placed in outdoor positions shall be
treated to prevent corrosion, by hot dip galvanizing, except high tensile
steel bolts and spring washers which shall be electro galvanized/plated.
Appropriate precautions shall be taken to prevent electrolytic action
between dissimilar metals.
Each bolt or stud shall project at least one thread but not more than three
threads through the nut except when otherwise approved for terminal
board studs or relay stems. If bolts nuts are placed so that they are
inaccessible by means of ordinary spanners, special spanners shall be
provided.
The length of the screwed portion of the bolts shall be such that no screw
thread may form part of a shear plane between members.
Taper washers shall be provided where necessary.
Protective washers of suitable material shall be provided front and back or
the securing screws.
35. Completely Self Protected (CSP) Features additional
The transformers shall have CSP (completely self protected) features. The
transformer along with all fittings such as metering cubicle should be
suitable for installation and operate as per H-pole drawing (enclosed as
Annexure-A)
UHBVN & DHBVN CSC SPECS
C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Desktop\28-01-10\PDC\CSC -IV.doc Page 19 of 27
The transformers shall have the following CSP features:
i) Internal HV Fuse on the HT side of transformer:
Specification for the HV fuse: Expulsion/any other suitable type of
fuse shall be placed in series with the primary winding. The fuse shall be
mounted normally inside of the primary bushing for the three phases and
connected to the high voltage winding through a terminal block. This has
to protect that part of the electrical distribution system which is ahead of
the distribution transformers from faults which occur inside the distribution
transformers i.e. either on the windings or some other part of the
transformers. It shall be ensured that the fuse does not blow for faults on
the secondary side (LT side) of the transformer i.e. the blowing
characteristics of the fuse and LT breaker shall be so coordinated such
that the fuse shall not blow for any faults on the secondary side of the
transformer beyond LT breakers and those faults shall be cleared by the
LT breaker only.
(ii) Internally mounted oil immersed LT breaker on the LV side of the transformer.
3 Pole LT Circuit breaker:
All LT faults after the breaker shall be clear by this breaker. As such it
shall be designed for perfect coordination with HT fuse link. The Bidder
shall furnish the time/current characteristics of LT circuit breaker and 11
KV fuses for various current multiples.
The two characteristics shall be drawn on the same sheet to indicate
coordination between the circuit breaker and fuse. The Bidder shall carry
out coordination test as indicated above and this forms one of the tests as
for acceptance test.
The breaker shall be coordinated thermally with the transformer design to
follow closely the variations of coil temperature due to fluctuating load and
ambient temperatures. The breaker trip setting shall be kept considering
continuous loading of 130% for 6-hours duration at an average ambient
temperature of 40 o C.
This is to be accomplished by connecting the breaker in series between
the secondary windings and the secondary bushings. The breaker shall
be located in the same oil as the core and coil assembly so that the bi-
metal are sensitive to the temperature of oil as well as the load current.
The Circuit breaker shall also be closed and opened manually standing on
ground. The current carrying parts of breakers shall be copper plus a set
of copper tungsten current interrupting contacts.
The Cross section of the current carrying parts of the breakers shall
withstand the full load current at a current density not more than 2.5
A/Sq.mm (for additional mechanical strength the area should be more).
iii) The supplier can also offer the transformer with MCCB (Specifications
attached) mounted on it instead of in-built breaker.
UHBVN & DHBVN CSC SPECS
C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Desktop\28-01-10\PDC\CSC -IV.doc Page 20 of 27
36. Earthing Connections
Two earthing connections shall be provided with connection facilities withs
25 x 6 mm GI strip. The bolts shall be located on the lower side of the
transformer and shall be of M12 size. The earthing should be suitable to
carry the full fault current. Further, there should be separate earthing for
the STAR point on LT side as well as on the body of the transformer.
37. FITTINGS: Each transformer shall be provided with all the required
fittings as per Annexure-D.
38. PENALTY FOR NON PERFORMANCE:
38.1. Purchaser reserves the right to reject any transformer during the test at supplier’s works, if it is found that actual measured losses are more than the values quoted by the bidder
38.2. Purchaser reserves the right to reject any transformer during the test at supplier’s works, if the temperature rise exceeds the guaranteed values. 38.3. Purchaser reserves the right to reject any transformer during the test at
supplier’s works, if the impedance values differ from the guaranteed values including tolerance.
38.4. Purchaser also reserves the right to retain the rejected transformer and take it into service until the Bidder replaces it with a new transformer at no extra cost. The delivery as per contract will be counted when the new transformer as per specification is provided by the manufacture.
39. PROTOTYPE TRANSFORMER
The prototype transformer on which type test got conducted shall be supplied to UHBVN/ DHBVN duly sealed after completion of type testing in the beginning itself before commencement of supply. The bidder shall furnish an affidavit that all his balance transformers shall meet with prototype in all respects ( internal & external ). The Nigam can randomly select any transformer & verify the internal / external details with the prototype sample at any time during warranty period. Type test certificates for the tests carried out on prototype of same specifications shall be submitted along with the bid. The purchase may select any transformer from the offered lot for inspection during subsequent lots for carrying out temperature rise test from any Govt. approved lab. Further the purchaser may select the transformer for type tests randomly. 40. CHALLENGE CLAUSE: -
"The material offered/received after the inspection by the authorized inspecting officer may again be subjected to the test for losses or any other parameter from any Testing House/in-house technique of the Nigam & the results if found deviating un-acceptable or not complying to approved GTP's the bidder shall arrange to supply the replacement within thirty (30) days of such detection at his cost including to & fro transportation." In addition to this penalty @10% of cost of the inspected lot of material shall be imposed.
Director/Technical-I UHBVN, Panchkula
Director/Project, DHBVN, Hisar
CE/PD&C UHBVN, Panchkula
CE/P&D DHBVN, Hisar
FA&CAO/MM UHBVN, Panchkula
FA&CAO/MM DHBVN, Hisar
SE/P&D UHBVN, Panchkula
SE/P&D DHBVN, Hisar
UHBVN & DHBVN CSC SPECS
C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Desktop\28-01-10\PDC\CSC -IV.doc Page 21 of 27
ANNEXURE ‘A’
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 6.3, 10, 16, 20 KVA COPPER WOUND & 40 KVA Aluminium wound CSP TYPE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS.
1. Normal continuous output under site conditions in KVA.
2. Continuous output as a percentage of Indian Standard Specifications rating.
3. Over-load capacity for 2 hours under site conditions after
running continuously at full load.
4. With annual weighted ambient temp of 35oC, maximum temperature rise of:
a) Oil by thermometer in _________ oC. b) Winding by resistance in __________oC. c) Maximum hot spot in temperature in ___oC (by calculation). 5. CORE PARTICULARS a) Thickness of laminations: b) Name of Supplier: c) Curve supplied by the manufactures of the core plate,
material (Loss/Kg.) d) Core dia in mm: e) Core weight in Kg. f) Core frame size. g) No. of steps” h) Type and Grade of Core Material i) Maximum flux density at: i) Normal voltage (in tesla). ii) 12.5% over voltage (in tesla) 6. WINDING PARTICULARS a) Copper /Al., weight of HT coils (in Kg.) i) Bare. ii) Covered. b Copper/Al., weight of LT coils ( in Kg.) i) Bare. ii) Covered. c) Size of Conductor (in sq.mm) as per ISS i) HT II) LT d) Total number of turns per phase: i) HT II) LT e) Current density in Amp./Sq.mm (Max.) i) HT II) LT
7. i) No load current at 100% voltage and 50 Hz in Amps. ii) No load current 112.5% of normal voltage & frequency. 8. Maximum losses guaranteed.
i) Maximum loses at 50% load in watt at 75oC ii) Maximum losses at 100% load in watt at 75oC. 9. Winding Resistance at 75oC (ohm/phase).
a) HV:
b) LV:
UHBVN & DHBVN CSC SPECS
C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Desktop\28-01-10\PDC\CSC -IV.doc Page 22 of 27
10. Efficiency at 75oC at unity P.F. and 0.8 P.F.
At unity P.F. At 0.8 P.F. i) Full load ii) ¾ load iii) ½ load iv) ¼ load
11. Load at which maximum efficiency occurs: 12. Reactance at full load: 13. Impedance at full load at 75oC
14. Regulations:
a) Full load at unit power factor. b) Full load 0.8 power factor lagging.
15. Minimum inter clearance a) Between HV & LV b) Between HV winding & tank wall. i) Non-bushing side ii) Bushing side.
c) Between section of HV winding d) Between HV winding e) Between HV winding & yoke ( at ends) f) Between LV winding & yoke (at ends) g) Between yoke and inside of tank top cover h) Between yoke & tank bottom i) Between LV winding & Core
16. Internal Insulation a) Turn insulation High voltage. b) Turn insulation low voltage. c) Insulation core to low voltage: d) Interlayer insulation of HV & LV Coils: e) type of insulation used for HV & LV windings. f) (Angle shaped/plain end rings made from pre-compressed
board shall be used between the end coils and the core)
17. Dry flash over voltage at 50 cycles of HT & LT bushings in KV. 18. Wet flashover voltage at 50 cycles of HT Bushings.
19. Impulse flash over voltage with 1.2/50 positive wave of HT
bushings in KV. a) One minute dry withstand power frequency voltage in KV. b) One minute withstand power frequency voltage. c) Puncture voltage of HT bushings at Power frequency in KV.
20 Impulse withstand voltage of T/fs windings. a) with 1.2/50 positive wave KV: b) with 1.2/50 Negative wave KV: 21. Spark over length of HT bushings (i.e. string length MM). 22. HT pressure test (separate sources of HT windings 50 cycles for
one minute. 23. Quantity of oil in transformers. 24. Weight of complete T/fs with oil: 25. Tank thickness sides
UHBVN & DHBVN CSC SPECS
C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Desktop\28-01-10\PDC\CSC -IV.doc Page 23 of 27
26. Tank thickness of top and bottom: 27. Weight of tanks fittings and accessories. 28. Approx. dimensions (Lx B x H) in mm: i) Overall ii) Inside of tank iii) Max. depth of HT coils (in cms) iv) Radial width of oil duct between LT & HT v) Standard reference of bushings vi) Type of transformer, shell or core
vii) Standard reference of transformers viii) Vector group of connections ix) Current density of HT delta wire
Note: Above approved GTPs shall be applicable up to Type Tests/First Lot. For subsequent supplies, all parameters as per First Lot shall be maintained. But in no case any parameter less than GTPs shall be accepted in First Lot. In case any type tests are waived off, then all technical parameters & dimensions shall be as per type tested Transformers and no negative variation shall be accepted. .
UHBVN & DHBVN CSC SPECS
C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Desktop\28-01-10\PDC\CSC -IV.doc Page 24 of 27
ANNEXURE ‘B’ GUARANTEED CHARACTERISTICS OF NEW TRANSFORMER OIL IN DRUMS/TANKERS AND IN TRANSFORMERS A. OIL IN DRUMS/TANKERS S.No. Characteristics Requirement 1. Appearance Oil shall be clear & transparent &
free from suspended matter or sediments.
2. Density at 29.5oC (Max.) 0.89 g/cm2
3. Kinematics viscosity at 27oC (Min.) 27CST 4. Interfacial tension at 27oC (min.) 0.04 N/M 5. Flash point (Min.) 140oC 6. Pour point (Max.) -6oC 7. Neutralization value
a) Total acidity (Max.) b) In organic acidity
0.03 mg KOH/gm Nil
8. Corrosive sulphur Non-corrosive 9. Electric strength (Break down voltage) Min.
a) New untreated oil: If the above value is not obtained the oil shall be treated.
b) After treatment.
a) 30 KV (rms) b) 60 KV (rms)
10. Dielectric dissipation factor (Tan-delta) at 90oC 0.002 (Max.) 11. Water content )Max.) 50 ppm 12. Specific resistance (resistivity)
a) At 90oC (Min.) b) At 27oC (Min.)
a) 35x1012 ohm-cm b) 900 x1012 ohm-cm
13. Oxidation stability a)Neutralization value after oxidation (max.) b)Total sludge after oxidation (Max.)
0.40 mg KOH/gm 0.10% by weight
14. Ageing characteristics after accelerated ageing (open breaker method with copper catalyst) a) Specific resistance (Resistivity) i) At 27oC Min.) ii) At 90oC (Min.) b) Dielectric dissipation factor (Tan delta) at 90oC c) Total acidity (Max.) d) Total sludge value percent by weight
2.5 x 1012 ohm-cm 0.2 x 1012 ohm-cm 0.2 Max. 0.05 mg KOH/gm 0.05 Max.
15. Presence of oxidation inhibitor Absent B. CHARACTERSTICS OF OIL IN THE TRANSFORMERS The important characteristics of the transformer oil after it is filled in the transformer (within 3 months of filling) shall be as follows:- Sr No
Characteristics Permissible limit satisfactory for use
1. Electric Strength (Breakdown voltage KV) Prior to energisation
50 KV minimum
2. Water content (PPM) 25 PPM (max.) 3. Specific Resistance (Resistivity)
ohm-cm at 90oC 2X1012 ohm-Cm (Min)
4. Dielectric dissipation factor tan delta) at 90oC
0.01 (Max)
5. Neutralization value (Total acidity)
0.055 mg. KOH/gm (Max)
6. Sediment and/or perceptible sludge
Absent
7. Flash point 140oC (Min) 8. Interfacial tension at 27oC 0.030 N/m(Min).
UHBVN & DHBVN CSC SPECS
C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Desktop\28-01-10\PDC\CSC -IV.doc Page 25 of 27
ANNEXURE ‘C’ SOURCE OF MATERIAL INSPECTION ETC. S. No
Item Source of Material
Place of manufacture
Place of testing and inspection
1. Copper 2. Aluminium 3. Core laminations 4. Transformer Oil 5. ERW Tubes. 6. Steel Sheets 7. Bushings 8. a) Porcelain HV
b) Epoxy LV
9. Insulating Cylinders 10. Insulating Paper. 11. Corrugated Cylinders. PLACE: SIGNATURE OF TENDER DATE: NAME:
DESIGNATION
UHBVN & DHBVN CSC SPECS
C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Desktop\28-01-10\PDC\CSC -IV.doc Page 26 of 27
ANNEXURE ‘D’ FITTINGS AND ACESSORIES FOR 6.3, 10, 16, 20 & 40 KVA TRANSFORMERS
(i) 3 no. 11 KV porcelain bushings with brass studs fitted with single gap arcing horns along with bi metallic connectors/thimbles.
(ii) 4 no. 0.433 KV porcelain bushings with brass studs (neutral to be made available on LV side) / thimbles.
(iii) Drain cum sampling valve made of steel welded to tank as per drawing.
(iv) One set of lifting lugs. (v) Rating & diagram plate of brass containing details
as provided in IS:2026 and also “Property of UHBVN/DHBVN” shall be engraved in bold letters.
vi) 4-Star rating label in accordance with colour design, logo etc., shall be provided on the transformer, as per the design / recommendations of Bureau of efficiency (BEE Note: Actual Losses at 50% & 100% Load should also be marked.
vii) Two earthing terminals, one on either side of the base. (Details as per clause 36)
viii) Air release valve arrangement. ix) ERW elliptical tube radiators of minimum thickness of
18 SWG. x) Oil level gauge indicating three positions of oil marked
as under:- Minimum (-) 0.5o C 30o C Maximum 95oc
xi) Thermometer pocket to be suitably plugged with a threaded cap.
xii) Base Channel. xiii) UHBVN/DHBVN logo shall be embossed on the side
of the tank. .NOTES
i) The bushing rods, bushings cap washers & bushings nuts etc, should be made of brass.
ii) The threading on the nuts and bushings rods should be of one uniform specification.
iii) All MS fittings & fasteners etc. may preferably be elctro-galvanzied.
iv) The special tools for operating the valves shall be supplied with the transformer.
iv) To ensure that transformer is not opened by UHBVN/DHBVN field staff during warranty period, 6 No. suitable clamps shall be welded with top cover & tank body as well as drain wall flange after the transformer has been inspected and sealed by UHBVN/DHBVN inspecting officer. However, the arrangement shall be got approved by the supplier from UHBVN/DHBVN before commencement of supplies.
v) TEST REQUIREMENTS FOR CONNECTORS
Technical features HT LT 1. Rated normal current rating 50 Amps. 200 Amps. 2. Short time current rating (Amps for
1Sec) 3000 3000
3 Tensile Strength 110 kg 110 kg 4. Resistance test: The resistance of 1.25 meter of conductor including
the connector shall not exceed the resistance of 1.25 meter of identical conductor without connector by more than 10%.
4. Temperature rise test: The steady state temperature rise of connector above the reference ambient temperature of 40oC when carrying rated current, shall not exceed 45oC.
UHBVN & DHBVN CSC SPECS
C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Desktop\28-01-10\PDC\CSC -IV.doc Page 27 of 27
VI)
TYPE TESTS ACCEPTANCE TESTS ROUTINE TESTS a) Tensile test a) Tensile test a) Visual examination b) Resistance test b) Resistance test b) Dimensional check c) Temperature rise test
c) Temperature rise test
d) Short time d) Dimensional check e) Dimensional check
NOTE:
1. Permissible tolerance shall be (+) 5% on the dimensions indicated. 2. The minimum clearance between phase to phase shall be 25mm and
phase to earth 20mm when the connectors are fixed in position on the terminal block of MOCB on the HT side.
3. All the above tests shall be carried out in accordance with IS: 5561, latest version.
4. Supplier of the transformer/connector shall provide necessary testing facilities at his works for the acceptance tests.
Page 1 of 21
Specification No. CSC-47/R-I /DH/UH/P&D/2010-2011
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR WHOLE CURRENT A.C. SINGLE PHASE TWO WIRE STATIC ENERGY METER
OF
ACCURACY CLASS 1.0(10-60A)
WITH COMMUNICATION FACILITY General Manager/P&D, General Manager/P&D, DHBVN, Hisar UHBVN, Panchkula
Issue of the Month:
Page 2 of 21
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR WHOLE CURRENT A.C.SINGLE PHASE TWO WIRE STATIC ENERGY METER OF ACCURACY CLASS 1.0 (10-60A) WITH COMMUNICATION FACILITY
1. SCOPE
The specification covers the design, manufacturing, testing, supply of AC whole current 1 phase 2 wire static watt hour meter for measurement of active energy (kWh) with initial and sustained accuracy of class 1.0 for solidly earthed system having power factor in the range of zero to unity(Lagging/Leading).
2. APPLICABLE STANDARDS Unless otherwise especially modified and to the extent so modified from these specification, the meter shall comply with the latest version of IS-13779, IEC-62053-21:2003 and CBIP Technical report 88/1998(latest amendments). The Manufacturer should have ISO 9000 or above certification.
3. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS The Static Energy Meter shall be suitable for satisfactorily working under the following climatic conditions: -
1. Max. ambient air temperature 600C
2. Min. ambient air temperature (-)50C
3. Average Daily Max. ambient temperature 400C
4. Max. yearly weighted average ambient temperature 320C
5. Max. altitude above mean sea level 1000 m
6. Minimum Relative Humidity (%age) 26
7. Max. Relative Humidity (%age) 95
8. Avg. No. of Rainy days/year 120
9. Avg. annual rainfall 900 mm
10. Maximum wind pressure 195 kg/m2 The meter shall be suitably designed and treated for normal life and satisfactory operation under the hot and hazardous tropical climate conditions and shall be dust and vermin proof. All the parts and surface, which are subject to corrosion, shall either be made of such material or shall be provided with such protective finish which provides suitable protection to them from any injurious effect of excessive humidity.
4. RATINGS:
The rating of kWh meter should be as follows:- Voltage Rating 240 V AC Current Rating (Basic Current) 10A Maximum Continuous Current 600% of Basic Current Starting current 0.2% of Basic Current at unity power factor Current Rating 10-60 A Class of Accuracy 1.0( No drift in tolerance of accuracy for 10 years)
Frequency 50 Hz +/-5% Power loss As per ISS-13779 Resistance to surge voltage >6 kV peak As per ISS-13779
Page 3 of 21
1.2/50Micro sec. IEC-62053-21:2003/CBIP-88 Test voltage of 50Hz for 1 Min. 2 kV rms Clock time accuracy +/- 5 ppm at 25°C Temperature rise As per ISS-13779 Power consumption by meter As per ISS-13779
5. SUPPLY SYSTEM:
Supply Voltage 240V AC Voltage variation range -40% to +20% Frequency 50Hz +/- 5% Power Factor +1 to -1
6. QUANTITY TO BE MEASURED / MONITORED
The display order shall be:- 6.1 Default Display (Continuously on auto scroll). 6.1.1 Cumulative Active Energy kWh along with legend.
6.1.2 Current calendar month MD in kW with legend. These parameters should be displayed on the LCD continuously for a period of
15 seconds on Auto scroll. In case of power failure, the meter should display above parameters i.e. 6.1.1 & 6.1.2 with push button.
6.2 On Demand Display(with push button)
6.2.1 Internal diagnostics
6.2.2 Cumulative kWh 6.2.3 Date
6.2.4 Real Time 6.2.5 Voltage in V 6.2.6 Current I 6.2.7 Inst. Power kW 6.2.8 Current calendar month MD in kW 6.2.9 Last calendar month cumulative kWh 6.2.10 Last calendar month MD in kW
6.2.11 Last calendar month MD in kW occurrence Date 6.2.12 Last calendar month MD in kW occurrence Time 6.2.13 Meter Serial Number
The meter’s display should return to default display mode (continues auto scroll) if push button is not operated for more than 10 seconds.
7 Auto Display
The meter shall have LED/LCD backlit type electronic display with minimum six digits with
additional provision for legend. The decimal digit shall be clearly distinguished from integral digit. The registered parameters i.e. the data stored in meter shall not be lost/ affected in the event of power failure. The display shall also not be effected by electric and magnetic disturbances. The meter shall have non volatile memory (NVM) which does not need battery back up. The NVM shall have minimum retention period 10 years. The minimum character dimensions shall be 8.5mmx5mm. Impulse Counter & Stepper Motor shall not be provided in the meter.
Default MD integration period will be 30 min, however, it should have facility to
change to 15 min at site with proper security feature.
Page 4 of 21
7.1 Meter shall store MD integration period along with date and time at the end of every integration period, new MD shall be previous MD and store, whichever is higher and the same shall be displayed.
7.2 MD shall be reset automatically at the defined date (or period) or through CMRI
manually as when required. The re-setting shall be automatic at the end of every month i.e. 24 hours of last day of month. Six last M.D. values shall be stored in the memory also with auto reset count in numbers. In addition to this the cumulative kWh shall also be stored in the memory at same time at the end of every month. The meter should be capable of storing last 6 month data with an option to retrieve the same.
7.3 For single phase meters MD can be monthly Auto reset or transaction through CMRI.
7.4 BILLING DATA
7.4.1 Meter serial number, Date and time, kWh, MD in kW, History of kWh & MD for last 6 months along with TOD readings.
7.4.2 All the above parameters (namely kWh, MD in kW) are meter readings. 7.4.3 All these data shall be accessible for reading, recording and spot billing by
downloading through optical port on MRI or Laptop computers. 8 STARTING CURRENT: The starting current of the meter shall be 0.2% lb at unity power factor.
9 RUNNING AT NO LOAD
The meter should comply with the requirements of IEC 1036/IS-13779 and CBIP Technical Report 88/1998 (Latest amendment)
10 ACCURACY & LIMITS OF ERRORS:
The error of meters shall not exceed the permissible limits per standard IS 13779 (latest version) and CBIP Technical Report 88/1998 (with latest amendment) for a period of at least 10 years from the date of supply. In case any drift is notified which is beyond the permissible limits, the bidder shall re-calibrate the meter for correct accuracy and if re- calibration is not possible, the meter shall be replaced by a new meter without any extra cost.
11 TEST OUTPUT DEVICE:
The meter shall have a test output device in the form of a pulse indicator accessible from the front and capable of being monitored by suitable testing equipment.
12 TESTS 12.1 TYPE TESTS & TEST CERTIFICATES
Meters shall be fully type tested as per IS: 13779 (latest version). The type
test certificates shall be submitted along with the offer. Offer without Type Test Report shall be liable for rejection. The Type test certificates shall not be more than 3 years old. Test certificates of appropriate range shall be accepted.
The type certificates shall be from institutions as per Appendix ‘G’ of CBIP Technical
report 88 (amended)
Page 5 of 21
12.2 ROUTINE TESTS
The Acceptance and Routine tests shall be carried out as per latest version of IS-13779.
12.3 EFFECT OF MAGNETIC FILED OF EXTERNAL ORIGIN.
The meter shall be provided with adequate magnetic shielding so that any external magnetic field (AC electro-magnets/DC magnet) as per the value specify in CBIP technical report-88 (with latest amendment) application on the meter shall not effect the proper functioning and recoding of energy as per error limits prescribed by CBIP. However, the test certificates of the designed meter for AC abnormal magnetic field & DC abnormal magnetic field as per clause 5.6.2 of CBIP -88 report (with latest version). The required test certificate for the design rating of meter from the NABL accredited laboratory shall be submitted by the bidders along with the bid.
12.4 D.C IMMUNITY TEST
The meter should comply with the requirements of IEC 1036/IS-13779 and CBIP Technical Report 88/1998 (Latest amendment)
12.5 INFLUENCE QUANTITIES
The meter shall work satisfactorily with guaranteed accuracy as per limit of IS 13779 and CBIP Technical Report 88/1988 (with latest amendments) under presence of the following quantities:
12.5.1 External Magnetic field 0.5 Tesla. 12.5.2 Electro Magnetic Field. 12.5.3 Radio Frequency interference. 12.5.4 Vibration. 12.5.5 Harmonic wave form. 12.5.6 Voltage fluctuation. 12.5.7 Electromagnetic high frequency field.
12.6 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
The meter shall conform to provisions as per IS-13779 and IEC-62053-21:2003 and CBIP Technical Report 88/1998 (Latest Amendments) and should be protected against radiated interference from either magnetic or radio frequency sources. The meter shall also withstand DC immunity test so as to ensure that the meter does not saturate on passage of direct current.
12.7 METER POWER SUPPLY
The meter should withstand the maximum system voltage i.e 288 volts continuously. In case of failure of power supply, the meter should display the measured quantities minimum for 24 hours. This event will be logged in the history as power failure (Indicating time, date & duration).
13. CONSTRUCTION 13.1 METER CASE & COVER
The meter case & cover will be ultrasonically welded with provision of two No. polycarbonate seals, one on either side, so that Meter’s internal parts are accessible only after breaking seals and ultrasonic welding of case/cover of the meter and it should become unserviceable. The meter base can be opaque and meter cover will be Transparent or translucent with transparent window.
Page 6 of 21
13.1.1 The supplier should indicate hardness, melting temperature and tensile yield
strength of the material and necessary test certificates of the same shall be furnished. The meter case and transparent cover should be sturdy enough to prevent damage during transportation and installation.
13.1.2 The meter chamber shall conform to the degree of protection IP 51 of IS: 12063/ IEC: 529 for protection against ingress of dust and moisture.
13.1.3 The polycarbonate plastic housing used may be provided with a key hole on the
top for fixing which should not be accessible to the consumer after terminal cover is sealed.
The polycarbonate plastic used shall conform to IS: 11731 besides meeting the test requirement of heat reflection test as per ISO-75, Glow wire test as per IS: 11000 (par t 2/SEC-I) 1984 OR IEC PUB, 60695-2-12, Bal l pressure test as per IEC-60695-2-12 and Flammabi l i ty Test as per IS 11731 (Part -2) 1986. Plastic grade for Meter case should be LEXAN 500R and for meter cover should be LAXAN 143R/940A. Even Bayer make polymer may be accepted.
13.2 TERMINAL BLOCK & COVER
The terminals may be grouped in a terminal block having adequate insulating properties and mechanical strength. The terminal block shall be made from best quality non-hygroscopic, flame retardant material (capable of passing the flammability tests given in IS-11731) with nickel-plated brass for connecting terminals. The clamping screw should be provided inside the terminal cover and should have metallic sleeve molded within the block to avoid damage during tightening of the screws.
The terminals in the terminal block shall be of adequate length in order to have proper grip of conductor with the help of two screws through assembly of a plate so as to make cage type arrangement. The screws shall have thread size not less than M4 and head having 4 -6 mm diameter. The screw shall not have pointed ends at the end of threads. All terminals and connecting screws and washers should be of tinned/nickel plated brass material.
The internal diameter of terminal hole shall be min. 8.5 mm and should comfortable accommodate the 25 mm2 cable conductors. Normally the cable used in such meters is 6 mm2 & 10 mm2 however at some places 25 mm2 can be used. The holes in the insulating material shall be of sufficient size to accommodate the insulation of conductor also.
The terminal cover shall be polycarbonate plastic with minimum thickness 2 .0mm mm and the terminal cover shall be of extended type completely covering the terminal block and fixing holes except for the provision of conductor entry at the bottom for incoming and outgoing leads. The terminal cover shall be so provided that it remains permanently connected with meter base. The supplier shall suitably design the cover, so that it opens and closes like a hinged door and the ends of hinged pins shall be flattened so that it does not come out. Provision for
Page 7 of 21
Minimum one number utility seal(s) as the terminal cover shall be made. Supply voltage circuit is to be connected solidly from inside. Plastic grade for Meter terminals should be LEXAN 500R and for meter terminal cover should be LAXAN 143R/940A. Even Bayer make polymer may be accepted
13.3 DESIGN
Voltage circuit, sealing arrangement, terminal block, terminal cover and nameplate etc. shall be in accordance with IS-13779 (latest version). The meter shall be compact and reliable in design, easy to transport and immune to vibration and shock involved in transportation and handling. The construction of the meter shall ensure consistent performance under all conditions especially during dust storm/heavy rains/very hot weather. The insulating material used in the meter should be non-hygroscopic, non- aging and of tested quality. The meter should be sealed in such a way that the internal parts of the meter are inaccessible.
Further meter shall withstand an insulation test of 4 kV and impulse test at 8 kV & the terminal block and meter case shall have safety against spread of fire. They shall not get ignited by thermal overload of live parts in contact with them as per the relevant IS-13779.
13.4 CIRCUITARY:
The meter shall have an operational indication device such as blinking LED given type indication. The following indications are mandatory: 13.4.1 Meter Calibration (LED). 13.4.2 Phase available indication (LCD). 13.4.3 Load Earthling (LED/ LCD). 13.4.4 Current reversal (LCD).
The operation indicator should be accessible from the front .The mounting of components on the PCB (Printed Circuit Board) shall preferably be SMT (Surface Mounted Technology) type. The Electronic Components used in the meter shall be of high quality and there shall be no drift in the accuracy of the meter at least up to 10 years. The circuitry in the meter shall be compatible with 2x8 bit (or better) processor and the meter shall be based on digital measuring and sampling technique.
13.5 CURRENT & PRESSURE COILS
13.5.1 Current Circuit As per IS- 13779
13.5.2 Potential Circuit As per IS-13779. i.e Voltage Circuit
13.6 FIXING ARRANGEMENT
Every meter shall have three fixing holes one at the top and two at the bottom. The top hole shall be provided with a special clip at the back of the mater so that holding screw is not accessible to the consumer after the fixing of the meters. The lower fixing screws shall be provided under the sealed terminal cover. The requisite fixing screws shall be supplied with each meter.
Page 8 of 21
13.7 SEALING:
Minimum 2 No. holes shall be provided for proper fixing of meter cover with 2 No. polycarbonate numbered seals, of good quality, on opposite side (one by the meter manufacturer and the other by the Utility/ Nigam on both opposite side.) So that meter internal parts are accessible only after breaking the seals, ultrasonic welding of case/cover of the meter.
13.8 ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS
The meter shall be from high accuracy and reliable Surface Mount Technology (SMT) components. The supplier should submit the details of source/agencies from whom purchase of various components of meters used by them, has been done, to the authorized representative/ team deputed by Nigam for its verification. The make of components used in the meter should be used as listed below.
Sr. No.
Component Function
Requirement Makes and Origin
1. Measurement or computing chips
The Measurement or computing chips in the meter should be with the Surface mount type along with ASICs.
USA: Anolog Devices, Cyrus Logic,Atmel,Phillips, Texas Instruments. South Africa: SAMES Japan: Hitachi or Oki Free scale semiconductors, MMI ,Maxim
2. Memory Chip The memory chips should not be affected by the external parameters like sparking high voltage spikes or electrostatic discharges.
USA Atmel,National Semiconductors,Texas Instruments,Phillips,ST. Japan: Hitachi or Oki Microchip
Page 9 of 21
3. Display modules
a) The display modules should be well protected from the external UV radiations. b) The display visibility should be sufficient to read the Meter mounted at height at 0.5 meter as well as at the height of 0.2 meters (ref 3.2d for Viewing angle). c) The construction of the modules should be such that the displayed quantity should not disturbed with the life of display (PIN Type) d) It should be trans reflective HTN or STN type industrial grade with extended temperature
Honkong: Genda Singapore : Bonafied technologies. Korea: Advantek China: Success Japan: Hitachi, Sony Haijing
4. Communication modules
Communication modules should be compatible for the two RS 232 ports (one for optical port for communication with meter reading instruments & the other- forthe hardwire RS 232 port to communication with various modems for AMR)
USA: National Semiconductors, HP, Ontonica, ST Holland/Korea: Philips Japan: Hitachi Taiwan:Ligitek Germany: Siemens
5. Optical Port Optical Port should be used to transfer the meter data to meter reading instrument. The mechanical construction of the port should be such to facilitate the data transfer easily.
USA: National Semiconductors, HP, Holland/Korea: Philips Japan: Hitachi Taiwan:Ligitek Osram
Page 10 of 21
6. Power Supply The power supply should be with the capabilities as per the relevant standards. The power supply unit of the meter should not be affected. In case the maximum voltage of the system appears to the terminals due to faults or due to wrong connections.
SMPS type
7. Electronic Components
The active & passive components should be of the surface mount type & are to handled & soldered by the state of art assembly processes.
USA: National Semiconductors, Atmel, Philips, Texas Instruments, Texas, ST, Onsemi Japan: Hitachi, Oki, AVX or Ricoh Korea: Samsung
8. Mechanical Parts
a) The internal electrical component should be of electrolytic copper & should be protected from corrosion, rust etc.
b) The other mechanical components should be protected from rust, corrosion etc. by suitable plating /painting methods.
9. Battery Lithium with guaranteed life of 10 years.
Verta, Tedirun, Sanyo or National Renota
10. RTC & Micro controller
The accuracy of RTC shall be as per relevant IEC/IS standards
USA: Philips, Dallas, Atmel, Motorola, Microchip Japan: NEC or Oki Texas instruments
11. P.C.B. Glass Epoxy, fire resistant grade FR4, with minimum thickness 1.6mm
(BBT test is must)
No components of any other make other than mentioned above shall be accepted.
Page 11 of 21
13.9 SOFTWARE & COMMUNICATION COMPATIBILITY
13.9.1 The optical port shall be compatible to RS232. Communication modules should be RS 232 optical port (for communication with meter reading instruments & communication with various modems for AMR). The RS 232 port shall be capable to transfer the data locally i.e. through CMRI, Laptop etc. & transfer the data to the remote end through PSTN/Optical fiber/GPRS/GSM/CDMA/RF/any other technology to the main computer/Laptop by using Modem. Half-meter long cable, of suitable size, having facility at one end, for connecting to the optical port, other end shall be provided with RS – 232 Connector shall be provided, as spare cable, so that the optical port can be brought out the meter box. The meter shall have necessary facilities to transfer the data via the Communication port, the hand held data collection device (DCD) and to the computer at remote end to get complete details in alpha numeric form. The necessary software for this purpose shall be provided by the supplier.
13.9.2 The Supplier shall supply Software required for CMRI & for connectivity to
AMR modules. The supplier shall also provide training for the use of software. The software should be compatible to Microsoft Windows systems (Latest version). The software should have polling feature with optional selection of parameters to be down loaded for AMR application.
13.9.3 Necessary provision shall be made in the software for converting all
the parameters available for new and old meters if supplied earlier. Copy of operation manual shall be supplied.
13.9.4 The data transfer (from meter to CMRI /AMR equipment) rate should be minimum
1200/9600 bps.
13.9.5 The supplier shall provide meter reading protocols / API. 14. PACKING:
The meters shall be suitably packed for vertical/horizontal support to withstand handling during transport. The bidder shall be responsible for any damage during transit due to inadequate or improper packing. The meters shall preferably be supplied in thermocol packing of minimum 10 mm thickness/ Corrugated (CFS) box packing of min 3 mm thickness.
15. DESIGN LIFE The meter shall have a design life of at least 10 years.
16. QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN
The design life of the meter shall be minimum 10 years and to prove the design life, the firm shall have at least the following Quality Assurance Plan:
16.1 The factory shall be completely dust proof. 16.2 The testing rooms shall be temperature and humidity controlled as per relevant
standard.
16.3 The testing and calibrating equipment should be automatic and all test equipment shall have their valid calibration certificates.
16.4 Power supply used in testing equipment shall be distortion free with sinusoidal
Page 12 of 21
wave- forms and maintaining constant voltage current and frequency as per the relevant standards.
16.5 During the manufacturing of the meters the following checks shall be carried out: 16.5.1 Meter frame dimension tolerance shall be minimum. 16.5.2 The assembly of parts shall be done with the help of jigs and fixtures so that
human errors are eliminated. 16.5.3 The meters shall be batch tested on automatic, computerized test bench
and the results shall be printed directly without any human errors. 17. ANTI TAMPER FEATURES
The meter shall not be affected by any remote control device and shall continue recording energy under any one or combinations of the following condition. 17.1 The meter shall be capable of recording energy correctly even if input and output
terminals are interchanged. Also the meter shall record correctly even if phase and neutral are inter changed.
17.2 The meter shall register energy even if the load is not terminated back to the meter; instead current is drawn through a local earth under following conditions. 17.2.1 When phase and neutral are connected correctly. 17.2.2 When phase and neutral wires connected are interchanged at input terminals.
17.3 Also when only phase is available either in neutral or phase terminal and earth loading has been done. In such circumstances only minimum starting current of 1.5 Amp. should be drawn and in other conditions as per relevant ISS.
17.4 The meter shall be factory calibrated through software and no modification of calibration shall be possible at site by any means what-so-ever. Trim pot method for calibration shall not be acceptable. No mechanical or potentiometer like devices shall
be used for meter calibration that possibly can alter the meter accuracy either in case of change in climatic conditions or intentionally at site. Calibration Certificate/Routine test certificate should be supplied with the dispatch.
17.5 Meter shall record the energy accurately under the effect of radiation emitted by mobile phone. The test shall be carried out by bringing a mobile phone in the close proximity almost touching the meter of the meter for 10 minutes when there is an incoming call ( ringing or being received ) and shall be checked under the following conditions: 17.5.1 10% Ib and UPF 17.5.2 50% Ib and UPF 17.5.3 Ib and UPF 17.5.4 Ib and 0.8PF 17.5.5 125% Ib and UPF
17.6 The Meter shall immune to the external magnetic field upto 0.5 Tesla with permanent magnet of 75x75x35 mm and in case external magnetic field exceeding 0.5 Tesla(permanent magnet), the meter shall log the event of attempt of tampering by the external magnetic field, occurrences & restoration with date & time. The meter shall start record energy at maximum current Imax under such influence of abnormal magnetic field irrespective of actual load. The meter shall record as per actual load once the external abnormal magnetic field is removed.
17.7 Meter shall be immune of any abnormal frequency signal OR Meter shall log & display as tamper in the event abnormal frequency signal i.e. less than 47.5Hz OR more than 52.5 Hz is supplied to the meter.
17.8 Load survey-for all the billing parameters/anti tamper features shall be available for 75 days,
17.9 Minimum 100 numbers of events (occurrences & restoration with date & time of more than 10 minutes) shall be available in the meter memory on roll over facility. All the information shall be available in a standard simple format.
Page 13 of 21
17.10 Meter should register energy correctly within its class of accuracy at 240V and UPF even with neutral disconnected or neutral available through by putting variable resistance/capacitor/diode.
17.11The meter shall work satisfactorily under presence of various influencing conditions like External Magnetic Field, Electromagnetic Field, Radio Frequency Interference, Vibrations, harmonic Distortion, Voltage/ Frequency Fluctuations, and electromagnetic High Frequency Fields etc. The meter should be immune to electrostatic discharges (generated by High Voltage/Frequency Tamper device) of voltage up to 35 KV level (approx.) Meter should log the tamper event with date and time along with showing in display and start recording at Imax if ESD voltage level is more than 35 KV (approx.) To this effect a test certificate must submitted by the bidder from NABL accredited laboratory as per following criteria. The accuracy of the meter should not be affected with the application of abnormal voltage /frequency generating device ( having spark discharge of approximately 35Kv) in any of the following manner for a total period of 10 minutes: 17.11.1 On phase or neutral terminals 17.11.2 On any connecting wires of the meter. 17.11.3 Voltage discharge with 0-10mm spark gap 17.11.4 Spark on meter body 17.11.5 At any place in load circuit
The accuracy of meter should be checked before, during & after the application of said
devices.
17.12 Meter Body Opening:
The meter shall have provision for detection and logging of opening of meter cover. Meter must detect/log with date and time meter body opening tamper, body opening must also be logged in absence of power supply. Incase of meter body opening display of “C open’’ Must appear continuously even after the re-closing the cover so that at the time of meter reading it must come in notice. However cover open “date & time” should appear in push button mode.
18. NAME PLATE AND MARKING
18.1 Every meter shall have a name plate clearly visible and indelible and distinctly marked in accordance with IS 13779 (latest version). The following information should appear on an external plate attached to the meter cover:
18.1.1 Manufacturer’s name or trade mark and place of manufacture. 18.1.2 Designation of type. 18.1.3 Number of phases and number of wires for which the meter is suitable.
18.2 In addition to above, the following information shall be marked on a name plate
preferably placed with in the meter:
18.2.1 Sr. No. and year of manufacture 18.2.2 Principal unit in which the meter records.
Page 14 of 21
18.2.3 Reference voltage. 18.2.4 Basic current and rated maximum current. 18.2.5 Reference frequency in Hz. 18.2.6 Meter constant. 18.2.7 Class index. 18.2.8 Reference temperature. 18.2.9 The words properties of ‘DHBVN’ or ‘UHBVN’ depending upon the name
of Nigam to whom meters are supplied. 18.2.10 BIS Mark 19. TESTING AND MANUFACTURING FACILITIES
The bidder shall have at least the following testing facilities to ensure accurate calibration: 19.1 Insulation resistance measurement. 19.2 Running at no load. 19.3 Starting current test. 19.4 Limits of error. 19.5 Range of adjustment. 19.6 Power loss in voltage and current coil. 19.7 Repeatability of error. 19.8 Transportation test. 19.9 Low load run test. 19.10 Heating test. 19.11 Protection against water, dust and moisture. The meter shall confirm to the degree of
protection IP-51 against ingress of dust, moisture and vermin’s 19.12 Effect of Magnetic field of external origin as per clause 5.6.2. of CBIP Report-88
with latest amendments & provision of Nigam Technical Specification. 20. INSPECTION
20.1 All meters shall be duly tested and sealed by the firm at their premises prior to inspection.
20.2 The Nigam Inspecting Officer will inspect double the number of meters as per sampling plan of ISS 13779 (latest version). Max. size/ lot of 5,000 numbers shall be considered for acceptance test as per ISS 13779. Higher lot shall be considered as two or more lots. The inspecting agency can carry out any type test which felt necessary as acceptance test at firm’s works. After testing, these sample meters shall be additionally sealed by the inspecting officer and one copy of the inspection report will be handed over to the manufacturer. However, one sample of each successive lot (of 5000 meters) received in the stores will be subject to all tests as per specification from any NABL lab.
20.3 The supplier shall submit the details of source/ agencies from whom purchase of various components of meters used by them, has been done, to the authorized representative/ team deputed by Nigam for its verification.
20.4 The manufacturer shall be liable to pay penalty of Rs 20,000/- for each occasion at which the fake inspection call has been made. This penalty would be in addition to the expenses incurred by the Nigam in deputing the Inspecting Officer for carrying out such inspection.
In case the material offered for inspection fails in Ist inspection, the Nigam will have the right to levy a penalty at 0.1 % of the order value. In case the material offered for inspection fail during the 2nd inspection, the Nigam will have the right to increase the penalty to 0.25% of the order value. In case, the material offered fails during the 3rd and final inspection also, the firm will be liable for penal action
Page 15 of 21
including forfeiture of EMD, risk purchase, debarring/ blacklisting in future and no further opportunity for inspection would be provided to the supplier firm.
21 CHALLENGE CLAUSE:
The material offered/received after the inspection by the authorized Inspecting Officer may again be subjected to the test for losses or any other parameters from any testing house/in house technique of the Nigam having requisite capabilities and facilities. The results if found deviating/ unacceptable or non-complying to approved GTPs the lot shall be rejected and bidder shall arrange to supply the replacement within thirty (30) days of such detection at his cost including to & fro transportation. In addition to this penalty @10% of cost of the inspected lot of material shall be imposed.
22. GUARANTEE:
The meter shall have a designed life of at least 10 years and the supplier shall be responsible to replace, free of cost, with no transportation or insurance - cost to the Nigam, up to destination, the whole or any part of the material which, under normal and proper use, proves defective in quality or workmanship, subject to the condition that the defect is noticed within 78 months from the date of receipt of material by the consignee or 72 months from the date of installation, which ever period may expire earlier. The consignee or any other officer of the Nigam, actually using the material, will give prompt notice of each such defect to the supplier as well as the Purchasing authority and the Controller of Stores. The replacement shall be affected by the supplier within a reasonable time, but not, in any case, exceeding 45 days. The supplier shall also arrange to remove the defective supply within reasonable period but not exceeding 45 days from the date of issue of the notice in respect thereof. Upon the firm failing to do so, the damages / defects may be got rectified by the Nigam and the cost adjusted from the firm’s pending dues and/or security deposit against this or any other contract in force and the balance left be got deposited by the supplier. The Nigam may withhold the amount, equal to cost of defective material. These provisions shall, also equally apply to the replaced material. In case, the material is again found to be defective within warranty period, it shall, also, have to be replaced similarly. The purchaser shall recover an equivalent amount plus 15% supervision charges, if the defective material is not repaired / replaced with in the above specified period. The cumulative damage rate during warrantee period should not exceed:- (i) Upto one year -- 6% (ii) Upto two years -- 7% (iii) Upto three years -- 8% (iv) Upto four years -- 9% More than four years -- 10% If the supplier fails to adhere to the above requirement, the Nigam may take any penal action against the supplier upto and including blacklisting.
23. The bidder shall submit four samples in which one shall be ultrasonic welded and three shall be in normal condition i.e. without ultrasonic weld. Sample shall be accepted upto 10 days from date of opening of the technical bid. The samples are to be delivered in person to the XEN/MM DHBVN. Vendor shall have to submit predefined copies of all the software (meter reading software for CMRI, Base computer software for meter data analysis and technical details). The sample meter to be submitted with tender by the bidder will be without any identity of the firm i.e. without any logo & name printed on the meter to maintain secrecy.
Page 16 of 21
The sample meter shall be got tested by purchaser without any representative of firm/ manufacturer to verify compliance to all clauses of specification from NABL lab. The necessary fees shall have to be deposited by bidder/ supplier. The intimation in this regards will be conveyed to the supplier, for which the name of the person and the contract number may please be provided along with the offer. In event of failure of the sample during any of the tests the offer will be considered as “REJECTED” and consequently the fees paid for type tests will be forfeited. Further if the sample passes in type testing the necessary fees would be reimbursed to bidder/ supplier by DHBVN. However, the decision of the Nigam in this regard shall be final and binding on all the bidders.
24. ANNEXURES
The bidder shall submit the following Annexures (as per format) which are part and parcel of the specification: Annexure A Guaranteed and Technical particulars. Annexure B Deviation from specifications. Annexure C Deviations from specified standards.
Annexure D Deviations from specified test requirements. Annexure E Bidder’s experience.
Director/Project, UHBVN, Panchkula
Director/Project, DHBVN, Hisar
CGM/PD&C, UHBVN, Panchkula
CGM/P&D, DHBVN, Hisar.
FA & CAO/MM, UHBVN, Panchkula
FA & CAO/MM, DHBVN, Hisar
GM/P&D, UHBVN, Panchkula
GM/P&D, DHBVN, Hisar
Page 17 of 21
ANNEXURE-A GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR SINGLE PHASE STATIC METER
Sr. No. DESCRIPTION AS OFFERED BY FIRM 1. Maker’s Name 2. Type of meter
i) Basic current (A) ii) Maximum current
3. Standards to which the meter conform 4. Overload capacity 5. Dynamic range 6. Power supply variation
i) Specified operational range ii) Limit rage of operation iii) Frequency
7. Accuracy class 8. P.F. Range 9. Variation of voltage at which meter functions normally 10. Power consumption per phase
i) Voltage circuit ii) Current circuit
11. Minimum starting current of the meter (% Ib) 12. Impulse voltage 13. Display (No. of digits and character height) 14. Continuous display (Auto Display mode) 15. Operational indication-LED 16. a) Material for base/terminal block
b) Material for meter cover/terminal cover
17. a) Meter terminal block having sealable extended terminal cover. b) No of seals to be Provided. c) Connection diagram inside the terminal cover
18. Communication port. 19. REAL Time clock with back up battery
Life of battery
20. Non volatile memory retention time in absence of power. 21. MD reset 22. Self diagnostic feature 23. Load survey 24. Snap shot facility 25. No. of tamper events 26. Temper persistence time 27. Routine tests 28. Acceptance tests 29. Type tests 30. Testing facilities 31. BIS licence 32. ISO 9001/9002 33. Guarantee
Page 18 of 21
DEVIATIONS FROM SPECIFICATIONS ANNEXURE-B
Sr. No. Specification
Clause No. Requirement of Deviation
Proposed Specification
Reasons for Deviation
1. Name of firm 2. Name & signature of tenderer 3. Designation 4. Dated
Page 19 of 21
ANNEXURE-C
DEVIATIONS FROM SPECIFIED STANDARDS Sr. No. Particulars Stipulation of
Specified standard ………………. Standard Stipulation Ref.
Stipulation standard adopted By tenderer ……………… Standard stipulation
Ref.
Remarks
1. Name of firm 2. Name & signature of tenderer 3. Designation 4. Dated
Page 20 of 21
ANNEXURE-D
DEVIATIONS FROM SPECIFIED TEST REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED IN RELEVANT & PRESENT SPECIFICATION
……………………………………………………………………………………………… Sr. No.
Name of test Standard No. & Clause No.
Requirement of standard
Proposed Deviation
Reasons for Deviations
……………………………………………………………………………………………… 1. Type test 2. Acceptance test
1. Name of firm 2. Name & signature of tenderer 3. Designation 4. Dated
Page 21 of 21
ANNEXURE-E
BIDDER’S EXPERIENCE ……………………………………………………………………………………………… Sr. P.O. with To whom Description Qty. Status of RemarksNo. date Supplied of material P.O. ………………………………………………………………………………………………
1. Name of firm 2. Name & signature of
tenderer 3. Designation 4. Date
Page 22 of 21
Page 1 of 23
Specification No. CSC- 48-R-1/DH/UH/P&D/2010-2011
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
WHOLE CURRENT A.C. THREE PHASE FOUR WIRES L.T.
STATIC ENERGY METER
OF
ACCURACY CLASS 1.0(10-60A)
WITH COMMUNICATION FACILITY
General Manager/P&D, General Manager/P&D, UHBVN, Panchkula DHBVN, Hisar
Issue of the Month:
Page 2 of 23
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR WHOLE CURRENT A.C. THREE PHASE FOUR WIRES STATIC ENERGY METER OF ACCURACY CLASS 1.0(10-60A) WITH COMMUNICATION FACILITY
1. SCOPE
The specification covers the design, manufacturing, testing, supply of AC whole current 3 phase 4 wire static watt hour meter for measurement of active energy (kWh) with initial and sustained accuracy of class 1.0 for solidly earthed system with balanced and unbalanced loads having power factor in the range of zero to unity(Lagging/Leading).
2. APPLICABLE STANDARDS
Unless otherwise especially modified and to the extent so modified from these specification, the meter shall comply with the latest version of IS-13779, IEC-62053-21:2003 and CBI&P Technical report 88/1998(latest amendments). The Manufacturer should have ISO 9000 or above certification .
3. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
The Static Energy Meter shall be suitable for satisfactorily working under the following climatic conditions: -
1. Max. ambient air temperature 600C
2. Min. ambient air temperature (-)50C
3. Average Daily Max. ambient temperature 400C
4. Max. yearly weighted average ambient temperature
320C
5. Max. altitude above mean sea level 1000 m
6. Minimum Relative Humidity (%age) 26
7. Max. Relative Humidity (%age) 95
8. Avg. No. of Rainy days/year 120
9. Avg. annual rainfall 900 mm
10. Maximum wind pressure 195 kg/m2
The meter shall be suitably designed and treated for normal life and satisfactory operation under the hot and hazardous tropical climate conditions and shall be dust and vermin proof. All the parts and surface, which are subject to corrosion, shall either be made of such material or shall be provided
Page 3 of 23
with such protective finish which provides suitable protection to them from any injurious effect of excessive humidity.
4. RATINGS
The rating of kWh meter should be as follows:-
Supply voltage 3x240V AC (Phase to Neutral),415V AC (Between phases)
Current range(basic)Ib 10 A Max. current 600% of Basic Current =10amp. Current rating 10-60A Class of accuracy 1.0(No drift in tolerance of accuracy for 10 years) Starting current 0.2% of Basic Current at unity power factor Power factor range 0 to 1 (Lagging & Leading) Power loss As per ISS-13779 Resistance to surge voltage >6kV peak As per ISS-13779 1.2/50Micro sec. IEC-62053-21:2003/CBIP-88
Test voltage of 50Hz for 1 Min. 2kV rms Clock time accuracy +/- 5 ppm at 25°C Temperature rise As per ISS-13779 Power consumption by meter As per ISS-13779
5 SUPPLY SYSTEM
Supply Voltage 3x240V AC (Phase to Neutral), 415V AC (Between phases) Voltage variation range -40% to +20% Frequency 50Hz +/- 5% Power Factor +1 to -1
6 QUANTITY TO BE MEASURED / MONITORED
The display order shall be:-
6.1 Default Display (Continuously on auto scroll).
6.1.1 Cumulative Active Energy kWh along with legend. 6.1.2 Current calendar MD in kW along with legend.
6.1.3 Cumulative Max Demand along with legend. 6.1.4 No of reset count along with legend.
These parameters should be displayed on the LCD continuously for a period of 15 seconds on Auto scroll. In case of power failure, the meter should display above parameters i.e. 6.1.1 to 6.1.4 with push button.
6.2 On Demand Display(with push button)
6.2.1 Internal diagnostics 6.2.2 cumulative kWh 6.2.3 Date 6.2.4 Real Time
Page 4 of 23
6.2.5 Current calendar month MD in kW 6.2.6 Voltage phase wise
6.2.7 Current phase wise 6.2.8 Inst. Power 6.2.9 Cumulative Max Demand 6.2.10 MDI reset count 6.2.12 Last calendar month MD in kW
6.2.13 Last calendar month MD in kW occurrence Date 6.2.14 Last calendar month MD in kW occurrence Time 6.2.15 Meter Serial Number
The meter’s display should return to default display mode (continues auto scroll) if push button is not operated for more than 10 seconds.
7 Auto Display
The meter shall have LED/LCD backlit type electronic display with minimum six digits with additional provision for legend. The decimal digit shall be clearly distinguished from integral digit. The registered parameters i.e. the data stored in meter shall not be lost/ effected in the event of power failure. The display shall also not be effected by electric and magnetic disturbances. The meter shall have non volatile memory (NVM) which does not need battery back up. The NVM shall have minimum retention period 10 years. The minimum character dimension sha l l be 10mmx5mm. Impulse Counter & Stepper Motor shall not be provided in the meter.
Default MD integration period will be 30 min, however, it should have facility to change to 15 min at site with proper security feature.
7.1 Meter shall store MD integration period alongwith date and time at the end of every integration period new MD shall be previous MD and store, whichever is higher and the same shall be displayed.
7.2 MD shall be reset automatically at the defined date (or period) or through CMRI
manually as when required. The re-setting shall be automatic at the end of every month i.e. 24 hours of last day of month. Twelve last M.D. values shall be stored in the memory also with auto reset count in numbers and reset count show on the display. In addition to this the cumulative kWh should also be stored in the memory at 0-00 hrs. at the end of every month and show on the display . The meter should be capable of storing last 12 month data with an option to retrieve the same.
7.3 Manual MD resetting should be possible. Use of scalable push button or any other
method is optional. 7.4 BILLING DATA
Page 5 of 23
7.4.1 Meter serial number, Date and time, kWh, MD in kW, History of kWh & MD for
last 6 months along with TOD readings. 7.4.2 All the above parameters (namely kWh, MD in kW) are meter readings.
7.4.3 All these data shall be accessible for reading, recording and spot billing by downloading through optical port on MRI or Laptop computers at site.
8 STARTING CURRENT:
The starting current of the meter shall be 0.2% lb at unity power factor.
9 RUNNING AT NO LOAD:
The meter should comply with the requirements of IEC 1036/IS-13779 and CBIP Technical Report 88/1998 (Latest amendment).
10 ACCURACY & LIMITS OF ERRORS:
The error of meters shall not exceed the permissible limits per standard IS 13779 (latest version) and CBIP Technical Report 88/1998 (with latest amendment) for a period of at least 10 years from the date of supply. In case any drift is notified which is beyond the permissible limits, the bidder shall re-calibrate the mete for correct accuracy and if re-calibration is not possible, the meter shall be replaced by a new meter without any extra cost.
11 TEST OUTPUT DEVICE :
The meter shall have a test output device in the form of a pulse indicator accessible from the front and capable of being monitored by suitable testing equipment.
12 TESTS:
12.1 TYPE TESTS & TEST CERTIFICATES:
Meters shall be fully type tested as per IS: 13779 (latest version). The type test certificates shall be submitted along with the offer. Offer without Type Test Report shall be liable for rejection. The Type test certificates shall not be more than
3 years old. Test certificates of appropriate range shall be accepted. The type certificates shall be from institutions as per Appendix ‘G’ of CBIP Technical report 88 (amended).
12.2 ROUTINE TESTS
The Acceptance and Routine tests shall be carried out as per latest version of IS- 13779.
12.3 EFFECT OF MAGNETIC FILED OF EXTERNAL ORIGIN.
The meter shall be provided with adequate magnetic shielding so that any external magnetic field (AC electro-magnets/DC magnet) as per the value specify
Page 6 of 23
in CBIP technical report-88 (with latest amendment) application on the meter shall not effect the proper functioning and recoding of energy as per error limits prescribed by CBIP. However, the test certificates of the designed meter for AC abnormal magnetic field & DC abnormal magnetic field as per clause 5.6.2 of CBIP -88 report (with latest version). The required test certificate for the design rating of meter from NABL accredited laboratory shall be submitted by the bidders along with the bid.
12.4 D.C IMMUNITY TEST
The meter should comply with the requirements of IEC 1036/IS-13779 and CBIP Technical Report 88/1998 (Latest amendment).
12.5 INFLUENCE QUANTITIES
The meter shall work satisfactorily with guaranteed accuracy as per limit of IS 13779 and CBIP Technical Report 88/1988 (with latest amendments) under presence of the following quantities:
12.5.1 External Magnetic field 0.5 Tesla. 12.5.2 Electro Magnetic Field. 12.5.3 Radio Frequency interference. 12.5.4 Vibration. 12.5.5 Harmonic wave form. 12.5.6 Voltage fluctuation. 12.5.7 Electromagnetic high frequency field. 12.6 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
The meter shall conform to provision as per IS-13779 and IEC-62053-21:2003 and CBIP Technical Report 88/1998 (Latest Amendments) and should be protected against radiated interference from either magnetic or radio frequency sources. The meter shall also withstand DC immunity test so as to ensure that the meter does not saturate on passage of direct current.
12.7 METER POWER SUPPLY
The meter should withstand the maximum system voltage i.e. 498 volts continuously. In case of failure of power supply, the meter should display the measured quantities minimum for 24 hours. This event will be logged in the history as power failure (Indicating time, date & duration).
13 CONSTRUCTION
13.1 METER CASE & COVER
The meter case & cover will be ultrasonically welded with two No. polycarbonate seals, one each on either side, so that Meter’s internal parts are only accessible after breaking seals, ultrasonic welding case/cover of the meter and it should become unserviceable. The meter base can be opaque and meter cover will be
Page 7 of 23
Transparent or translucent with transparent window.
13.1.1 The supplier should indicate hardness, melting temperature and tensile yield strength of the material and necessary test certificates of the same shall be furnished. The meter case and transparent cover should be sturdy enough to prevent damage during transportation and installation.
13.1.2 The meter chamber shall conform to the degree of protection IP 51 of IS: 12063/ IEC:
529 for protection against ingress of dust and moisture.
13.1.3 The polycarbonate plastic housing used may be provided with a key hole on the top for fixing which should not be accessible to the consumer after terminal cover is sealed.
The polycarbonate plastic used shall conform to ISS: 11731 besides meeting the test requirement of heat reflection test as per ISO-75 and Glow wire test as per IS: 11000 (part 2/SEC-I) 1984 OR IEC PUB, 60695-2-12, Ball pressure test as per IEC-60695-2-12 and Flammability Test as per IS 11731 (Part-2) 1986. Plastic grade for Meter case should be LEXAN 500R and for meter cover should be LAXAN 143R/940A. Even Bayer make polymer may be accepted.
13.2 TERMINAL BLOCK & COVER
The terminals may be grouped in a terminal block having adequate insulating properties and mechanical strength. The terminal block shall be made from best quality non-hygroscopic, flame retardant material (capable of passing the flammability tests given in IS-11731) with nickel-plated brass for connecting terminals. The clamping screw should be provided inside the terminal cover and should have metallic sleeve molded within the block to avoid damage during tightening of the screws. The terminals in the terminal block shall be of adequate length in order to have proper grip of conductor with the help of two screws through assembly of a plate so as to make cage type arrangement. The screws shall have thread size not less than M4 and head having 4 -6 mm diameter. The screw shall not have pointed ends at the end of threads. All terminals and connecting screws and washers should be of tinned/nickel plated brass material. The internal diameter of terminal hole shall be min. 8.5 mm and should comfortable accommodate the 25 mm2 cable conductors. Normally the cable used in such meters is 6 mm2 & 10 mm2 however at some places 25 mm2 can be used. The holes in the insulating material shall be of sufficient size to accommodate the insulation of conductor also. The terminal cover shall be polycarbonate plastic with minimum thickness 2.0mm mm and the terminal cover shall be of extended type completely covering the terminal block and fixing holes except for the provision of conductor entry at the bottom for incoming and outgoing leads. The terminal cover shall be so
Page 8 of 23
provided that it remains permanently connected with meter base. The supplier shall suitably design the cover, so that it opens and closes like a hinged door and the ends of hinged pins shall be flattened so that it does not come out. Provision for Minimum one number utility seal(s) as the terminal cover shall be made. Supply voltage circuit is to be connected solidly from inside. Plastic grade for Meter terminals should be LEXAN 500R and for meter terminal cover should be LAXAN 143R/940A. Even Bayer make polymer may be accepted
13.3 DESIGN
Voltage circuit, sealing arrangement, terminal block, terminal cover and nameplate etc. shall be in accordance with IS-13779 (latest version).The meter shall be compact and reliable in design, easy to transport and immune to vibration and stock involved in transportation and handling. The construction of the meter shall ensure consistent performance under all conditions especially during dust storm/heavy rains/very hot weather. The insulating material used in the meter should be non-hygroscopic, non-aging and of tested quality. The meter should be sealed in such a way that the internal parts of the meter are inaccessible. Further meter shall withstand an insulation test of 4 kV and impulse test at 8kV & the terminal block and meter case shall have safety against spread of fire. They shall not get ignited by thermal overload of live parts in contact with them as per the relevant IS-13779
13.4 CIRCUITARY:
The meter shall have an operational indication device such as blinking LED given type indication. The following indications are mandatory: 13.4.1 Meter Calibration (LED). 13.4.2 Phase available indication (LCD). 13.4.3 Load Earthling (LED/ LCD). 13.4.4 Current reversal (LCD).
The operation indicator should be accessible from the front. The mounting of components on the PCB (Printed Circuit Board) shall preferably be SMT (Surface Mounted Technology) type. The Electronic Components used in the meter shall be of high quality and there shall be no drift in the accuracy of the meter at least upto10 years. The circuitry in the meter shall be compatible with 2x8 bit (or better) processor and the meter shall be based on digital measuring and sampling technique.
13.5 CURRENT & PRESSURE COILS
Page 9 of 23
13.5.1 Current Circuit As per IS- 13779
13.5.2 Potential Circuit As per IS-13779. i.e Voltage Circuit
13.6 FIXING ARRANGEMENT
Every meter shall have three fixing holes one at the top and two at the bottom. The top hole shall be provided with a special clip at the back of the mater so that holding screw is not accessible to the consumer after the fixing of the meters. The lower fixing screws shall be provided under the sealed terminal cover. The requisite fixing screws shall be supplied with each meter.
13.7 SEALING:
Minimum 2 No. holes shall be provided for proper fixing of meter cover with 2 No. polycarbonate numbered seals, of good quality, on opposite side (one by the meter manufacturer and the other by the Utility/ Nigam on both opposite side.) So that meter internal parts are accessible only after breaking the seals, ultrasonic welding of case/cover of the meter.
13.8 ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS
The meter shall be from high accuracy and reliable surface mount Technology (SMT) components. The supplier should submit the details of source/agencies from whom purchase of various components of meters used by them, has been done, to the authorized representative/ team deputed by Nigam for its verification. The make of components used in the meter should be used as listed below. Sr. No.
Component Function
Requirement Makes and Origin
1. Measurement or computing chips
The Measurement or computing chips in the meter should be with the Surface mount type along with ASICs.
USA: Anolog Devices, Cyrus Logic,Atmel,Phillips, Texas Instruments. South Africa: SAMES Japan: Hitachi or Oki Free scale semiconductors, MMI ,Maxim 2. Memory Chip The memory chips
should not be affected by the external parameters like sparking high voltage spikes or electrostatic discharges.
USA Atmel,National Semiconductors,Texas Instruments,Phillips,ST. Japan: Hitachi or Oki Microchip
Page 10 of 23
3. Display modules
a) The display modules should be well protected from the external UV radiations. b) The display visibility should be sufficient to read the Meter mounted at height at 0.5 meter as well as at the height of 0.2 meters (ref 3.2d for Viewing angle). c) The construction of the modules should be such that the displayed quantity should not disturbed with the life of display (PIN Type) d) It should be trans reflective HTN or STN type industrial grade with extended temperature
Honkong: Genda Singapore : Bonafied technologies. Korea: Advantek China: Success Japan: Hitachi, Sony Haijing
4. Communication modules
Communication modules should be compatible for the two RS 232 ports (one for optical port for communication with meter reading instruments & the other- forthe hardwire RS 232 port to communication with various modems for AMR)
USA: National Semiconductors, HP, Ontonica, ST Holland/Korea: Philips Japan: Hitachi Taiwan:Ligitek Germany: Siemens
5. Optical Port Optical Port should be used to transfer the meter data to meter reading instrument. The mechanical construction of the port should be such to facilitate the data transfer easily.
USA: National Semiconductors, HP, Holland/Korea: Philips Japan: Hitachi Taiwan:Ligitek Osram
Page 11 of 23
6. Power Supply The power supply should be with the capabilities as per the relevant standards. The power supply unit of the meter should not be affected. In case the maximum voltage of the system appears to the terminals due to faults or due to wrong connections.
SMPS type
7. Electronic Components
The active & passive components should be of the surface mount type & are to handled & soldered by the state of art assembly processes.
USA: National Semiconductors, Atmel, Philips, Texas Instruments, Texas, ST, Onsemi Japan: Hitachi, Oki, AVX or Ricoh Korea: Samsung
8. Mechanical Parts
a) The internal Electrical component should be of electrolytic copper & should be protected from corrosion, rust etc.
b) The other mechanical components should be protected from rust, corrosion etc. by suitable plating /painting methods.
9. Battery Lithium with guaranteed life of 10 years.
Verta,Tedirun, Sanyo or National Renota
10. RTC & Micro controller
The accuracy of RTC shall be as per relevant IEC/IS standards
USA: Philips, Dallas, Atmel, Motorola, Microchip Japan: NEC or Oki Texas instruments
11. P.C.B. Glass Epoxy, fire resistant grade FR4, with minimum thickness 1.6mm
(BBT test is must)
Page 12 of 23
No components of any other make other than mentioned above shall be accepted.
13.9 SOFTWARE & COMMUNICATION COMPATIBILITY
13.9.1 The optical port shall be compatible to RS232. Communication modules should be RS 232 optical port (for communication with meter reading instruments & communication with various modems for AMR). The RS 232 port shall be capable to transfer the data locally i.e. through CMRI, Laptop etc. & transfer the data to the remote end through PSTN/Optical fiber/GPRS/GSM/CDMA/RF/any other technology to the main computer/Laptop by using Modem. half-meter long cable, of suitable size, having facility at one end, for connecting to the optical port, other end shall be provided with RS – 232 Connector shall be provided, as spare cable, so that the optical port can be brought out the meter box. The meter shall have necessary facilities to transfer the data via the Communication port, the hand held data collection device (DCD) and to the computer at remote end to get complete details in alpha numeric form. The necessary software for this purpose shall be provided by the supplier.
13.9.2 The Supplier shall supply Software required for CMRI & for connectivity to
AMR modules. The supplier shall also provide training for the use of software. The software should be compatible to Microsoft Windows systems
(Latest version). The software should have polling feature with optional selection of parameters to be down loaded for AMR application.
13.8.3 Necessary provision shall be made in the software for converting all
the parameters available for new and old meters if supplied earlier. Copy of operation manual shall be supplied.
13.9.4 The data transfer (from meter to CMRI /AMR equipment) rate should be minimum
1200/9600 bps, 13.9.5 The supplier shall provide meter reading protocols / API. 14 PACKING
The meters shall be suitably packed for vertical/horizontal support to withstand handling during transport. The bidder shall be responsible for any damage during transit due to inadequate or improper packing.The meters shall preferably be supplied in thermocol packing of minimum 10 mm thickness/ Corrugated (CFS) box packing of min 3 mm thickness.
15 DESIGN LIFE
The meter shall have a design life of at least 10 years.
16 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN
The design life of the meter shall be minimum 10 years and to prove the design life, the firm shall have at least the following Quality Assurance Plan:
Page 13 of 23
16.1 The factory shall be completely dust proof. 16.2 The testing rooms shall be temperature and humidity controlled as per relevant
standard. 16.3 The testing and calibrating equipment should be automatic and all test equipment
shall have their valid calibration certificates. 16.4 Power supply used in testing equipment shall be distortion free with
sinusoidal wave-forms and maintaining constant voltage current and frequency as per the relevant standards.
16.5 During the manufacturing of the meters the following checks shall be carried out: 16.5.1 Meter frame dimension tolerance shall be minimum. 16.5.2 The assembly of parts shall be done with the help of jigs and fixtures so
that human errors are eliminated. 16.5.3 The meters shall be batch tested on automatic, computerized test bench
and the results shall be printed directly without any human errors.
17 ANTI TAMPER FEATURES
The meter shall not be affected by any remote control device and shall continue recording energy under any one or combinations of the following condition.
17.1 The meter shall record correctly irrespective of phase sequence and even in case of current reversal and missing potential or Meter should record as per prevailing electric connection.
17.2 The meter shall continue record energy; 17.2.1 In the event neutral to the meter is disconnected from both ends of the
meter and any phase is shorted to the neutral and supply is used with earth from any phase, meter functioning should not at all be effected on all phases individually when all 3 phases remained connected at their respective places.
17.2.2 Meter must function accurately, on all the phases individually when single phase load is used with earth and neutral to the meter is disconnected at the neutral point of the meter remaining phases are connected at respective places.
17.3 The meter shall be factory calibrated. 17.4 In the meters original software, there shall be no possibility of tampering
including viruses. 17.5 Meter shall record the energy accurately under the effect of radiation emitted
by mobile phone. The test shall be carried out by bringing a mobile phone in the close proximity (almost touching the meter) of the meter for 10 minutes when there is an incoming call ( ringing or being received ) and shall be checked under the following condition: 17.5.1 10% Ib and UPF
17.5.2 50% Ib and UPF 17.5.3 Ib and UPF 17.5.4 Ib and 0.8 PF 17.5.5 125% Ib and UPF
Page 14 of 23
17.6 The Meter shall immune to the external magnetic field upto 0.5 Tesla with permanent magnet of 75x75x35 mm and in case external magnetic field exceeding 0.5 Tesla (permanent magnet), the meter shall log the event of attempt of tampering by the external magnetic field, occurrences & restoration with date & time. The meter shall start record energy at maximum current IMAX under such influence of abnormal magnetic field irrespective of actual load. The meter shall record as per actual load once the external abnormal magnetic field is removed.
17.7 Meter shall log & display tampers of
17.7.1 Potential Missing 17.7.2 Current circuit reversal 17.7.3 Current circuit short 17.7.4 Injecting AC/DC high frequency/Current signal in neutral.
17.8 Meter shall be immune of any abnormal frequency signal OR Meter shall log & display at tamper in the event abnormal frequency signal i.e. less than 47.5Hz OR more than 52.5 Hz is supplied to the meter.
17.9 Load Survey-Load survey for all the billing parameters/Anti Tamper Features should be available for 120 days.
17.10 Minimum 200 number of events(occurrences & restoration with date & time of more than 10 minutes) shall be available in the meter memory on roll over facility. All the information shall be available in a standard simple format.
17.11 Meter should register energy correctly within its class of accuracy at 240V and UPF even with neutral disconnected or neutral available through by putting variable resistance/capacitor/diode. Meter should register energy correctly within class of accuracy at 240V UPF with neutral disconnected and neutral available through by putting variable resistance/capacitor/diode.
17.12 The meter shall work satisfactorily under presence of various influences
conditions like External Magnetic Field, Electromagnetic Field, Radio Frequency Interference, Vibrations, harmonic Distortion, Voltage/Frequency Fluctuations, and electromagnetic High Frequency Fields etc. The meter should be immune to electrostatic discharges (generated by High Voltage/Frequency Tamper device) of voltage up to 35 KV level (approx.) Meter should log the tamper event with date and time along with showing in display and start recording at Imax if ESD voltage level is more than 35 KV (approx.)
To this effect a test certificate must submitted by the bidder from NABL accredited laboratory as per following criteria: The accuracy of the meter should not be affected with the application of abnormal voltage /frequency generating device (having spark discharge of approximately 35kV) in any of the following manner for a total period of 10 minutes:
17.12.1 On phase or neutral terminals 17.12.2 On any connecting wires of the meter.
Page 15 of 23
17.12.3 Voltage discharge with 0-10mm spark gap 17.12.4 Spark on meter body 17.12.5 At any place in load circuit
The accuracy of meter should be checked before, during & after the application of said devices and the accuracy of meter should not be affected.
17.13 Meter Body Opening:
The meter shall have provision for detection and logging of opening of meter
cover. Meter must detect/log with date and time meter body opening tamper, body opening must also be logged in absence of power supply. Incase of meter body opening display of “C open’’ Must appear continuously even after the re- closing the cover so that at the time of meter reading it must come in notice. However cover open “date & time” should appear in push button mode.
18 NAME PLATE AND MARKING
18.1 Every meter shall have a name plate clearly visible and indelible and distinctly marked in accordance with IS 13779 (latest version). The following information should appear on an external plate attached to the meter cover: 18.1.1 Manufacturer’s name or trade mark and place of manufacture.
18.1.2 Designation of type. 18.1.3 Number of phases and number of wires for which the meter is suitable.
18.2 In addition to above, the following information shall be marked on a name plate preferably placed with in the meter: 18.2.1 Sr. No. and year of manufacture
18.2.2 Principal unit in which the meter records. 18.2.3 Reference voltage. 18.2.4 Basic current and rated maximum current. 18.2.5 Reference frequency in Hz. 18.2.6 Meter constant. 18.2.7 Class index. 18.2.8 Reference temperature. 18.2.9 The words properties of ‘DHBVN’ or ‘UHBVN’ depending upon the
name of Nigam to whom meters are supplied. 18.2.10 BIS Mark
19 TESTING AND MANUFACTURING FACILITIES
The bidder shall have at least the following testing facilities to ensure accurate calibration:
19.1 Insulation resistance measurement. 19.2 Running at no load. 19.3 Starting current test. 19.4 Limits of error. 19.5 Range of adjustment. 19.6 Power loss in voltage and current coil.
Page 16 of 23
19.7 Repeatability of error. 19.8 Transportation test. 19.9 Low load run test.
19.10 Heating test. 19.11 Protection against water, dust and moisture. The meter shall confirm to the degree
of protection IP-51 against ingress of dust, moisture and vermin’s 19.12 Effect of Magnetic field of external origin as per clause 5.6.2. of CBIP Report-88 with latest amendments & provision of Nigam Technical Specification.
20 INSPECTION 20.1 All meters shall be duly tested and sealed by the firm at their premises prior to
inspection. 20.2 The Nigam Inspecting Officer will inspect double the number of meters as per sampling plan of ISS
13779 (latest version). Max. size/ lot of 5,000 numbers shall be considered for acceptance test as per ISS 13779. Higher lot shall be considered as two or more lots. The inspecting agency can carry out any type test which felt necessary as acceptance test at firm’s works. After testing, these sample meters shall be additionally sealed by the inspecting officer and one copy of the inspection report will be handed over to the manufacturer. However, one sample of each successive lot (of 5000 meters) received in the stores will be subject to all tests as per specification from any NABL lab.
20.3 The supplier shall submit the details of source/ agencies from whom purchase of various components of meters used by them, has been done, to the authorized representative/ team deputed by Nigam for its verification.
20.4 The manufacturer shall be liable to pay penalty of Rs 20,000/- for each occasion at which the fake inspection call has been made. This penalty would be in addition to the expenses incurred by the Nigam in deputing the Inspecting Officer for carrying out such inspection.
In case the material offered for inspection fails in Ist inspection, the Nigam will have the right to levy a penalty at 0.1 % of the order value. In case the material offered for inspection fail during the 2nd inspection, the Nigam will have the right to increase the penalty to 0.25% of the order value. In case, the material offered fails during the 3rd and final inspection also, the firm will be liable for penal action including forfeiture of EMD, risk purchase, debarring/ blacklisting in future and no further opportunity for inspection would be provided to the supplier firm.
21 CHALLENGE CLAUSE:
The material offered/received after the inspection by the authorized Inspecting Officer may again be subjected to the test for losses or any other parameters from any testing house/in house technique of the Nigam having requisite capabilities and facilities. The results if found deviating/ unacceptable or non-complying to approved GTPs the lot shall be rejected and bidder shall arrange to supply the replacement within thirty (30) days of such detection at his cost including to & fro transportation. In addition to this penalty @10% of cost of the inspected lot of material shall be imposed.
Page 17 of 23
22. GUARANTEE:
The meter shall have a designed life of at least 10 years and the supplier shall be responsible to replace, free of cost, with no transportation or insurance - cost to the Nigam, up to destination, the whole or any part of the material which, under normal and proper use, proves defective in quality or workmanship, subject to the condition that the defect is noticed within 78 months from the date of receipt of material by the consignee or 72 months from the date of installation, which ever period may expire earlier. The consignee or any other officer of the Nigam, actually using the material, will give prompt notice of each such defect to the supplier as well as the Purchasing Authority and the Controller of Stores. The replacement shall be affected by the supplier within a reasonable time, but not, in any case, exceeding 45 days. The supplier shall also arrange to remove the defective supply within reasonable period but not exceeding 45 days from the date of issue of the notice in respect thereof. Upon the firm failing to do so, the damages / defects may be got rectified by the Nigam and the cost adjusted from the firm’s pending dues and/or security deposit against this or any other contract in force and the balance left be got deposited by the supplier. The Nigam may withhold the amount, equal to cost of defective material. These provisions shall, also equally apply to the replaced material. In case, the material is again found to be defective within warranty period, it shall, also, have to be replaced similarly. The purchaser shall recover an equivalent amount plus 15% supervision charges, if the defective material is not repaired / replaced with in the above specified period. The cumulative damage rate during warrantee period should not exceed:- (i) Upto one year -- 6% (ii) Upto two years -- 7% (iii) Upto three years -- 8% (iv) Upto four years -- 9% (v) More than four years -- 10% If the supplier fails to adhere to the above requirement, the Nigam may take any penal action against the supplier upto and including blacklisting.
23. The bidder shall submit four samples in which one shall be ultrasonic welded and three shall be in normal condition i.e. without ultrasonic weld. Sample shall be accepted upto 10 days from date of opening of the technical bid. The samples are to be delivered in person to the XEN/MM DHBVN. Vendor shall have to submit predefined copies of all the software (meter reading software for CMRI, Base computer software for meter data analysis and technical details). The sample meter to be submitted with tender by the bidder will be without any identity of the firm i.e. without any logo & name printed on the meter to maintain secrecy.
The sample meter shall be got tested by purchaser without any representative of firm/ manufacturer to verify compliance to all clauses of specification from NABL lab.
The necessary fees shall have to be deposited by bidder/ supplier. The intimation in this regards will be conveyed to the supplier, for which the name of the person and the contract number may please be provided along with the offer. In event of failure of the sample during any of the tests the offer will be considered as “REJECTED” and consequently the fees paid for type tests will be forfeited. Further if the sample passes in type testing the necessary fees would be reimbursed to bidder/ supplier by DHBVN. However, the decision of the Nigam in this regard shall be final and binding on all the bidders.
Page 18 of 23
24 ANNEXURES
The bidder shall submit the following Annexure (as per format) which are part and parcel of the specification: Annexure A Guaranteed and Technical particulars. Annexure B Deviation from specifications. Annexure C Deviations from specified standards. Annexure D Deviations from specified test requirements. Annexure E Bidder’s experience.
Director/Project, UHBVN, Panchkula
Director/Project,DHBVN, Hisar
CGM/PD&C, UHBVN, Panchkula
CGM/P&D, DHBVN, Hisar.
FA & CAO/MM, UHBVN, Panchkula
FA & CAO/MM, DHBVN, Hisar
GM/P&D, UHBVN, Panchkula
GM/P&D, DHBVN, Hisar
Page 19 of 23
ANNEXURE-A GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR THREE PHASE WHOLE CURRENT STATIC ENERGY METER
Sr. No. DESCRIPTION AS OFFERED BY FIRM 1. Maker’s Name 2. Type of meter
i) Basic current (A) ii) Maximum current
3. Standards to which the meter conform 4. Overload capacity 5. Dynamic range 6. Power supply variation
i) Specified operational range ii) Limit rage of operation iii) Frequency
7. Accuracy class 8. P.F. Range 9. Variation of voltage at which meter functions normally 10. Power consumption per phase
i) Voltage circuit ii) Current circuit
11. Minimum starting current of the meter (% Ib) 12. Impulse voltage 13. Display (No. of digits and character height) 14. Continuous display (Auto Display mode) 15. Operational indication-LED 16. a) Material for base/terminal block
b) Material for meter cover/terminal cover
17. a) Meter terminal block having sealable extended terminal cover. b) No of seals to be Provided. c) Connection diagram inside the terminal cover
18. Communication port. 19. REAL Time clock with back up battery
Life of battery
20. Non volatile memory retention time in absence of power. 21. MD reset 22. Self diagnostic feature 23. Load survey 24. Snap shot facility 25. No. of tamper events 26. Temper persistence time 27. Routine tests 28. Acceptance tests 29. Type tests 30. Testing facilities 31. BIS license 32. ISO 9001/9002 33. Guarantee
Page 20 of 23
DEVIATIONS FROM SPECIFICATIONS ANNEXURE-B
Sr. No. Specification
Clause No. Requirement of Deviation
Proposed Specification
Reasons for Deviation
1. Name of firm 2. Name & signature of tenderer 3. Designation 4. Dated
Page 21 of 23
ANNEXURE-C
DEVIATIONS FROM SPECIFIED STANDARDS Sr. No. Particulars Stipulation of
Specified standard ………………. Standard Stipulation Ref.
Stipulation standard adopted By tenderer ……………… Standard stipulation
Ref.
Remarks
1. Name of firm 2. Name & signature of tenderer 3. Designation 4. Dated
Page 22 of 23
ANNEXURE-D
DEVIATIONS FROM SPECIFIED TEST REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED IN RELEVANT & PRESENT SPECIFICATION
……………………………………………………………………………………………… Sr. No.
Name of test Standard No. & Clause No.
Requirement of standard
Proposed Deviation
Reasons for Deviations
……………………………………………………………………………………………… 1. Type test 2. Acceptance test
1. Name of firm 2. Name & signature of tenderer 3. Designation 4. Dated
Page 23 of 23
ANNEXURE-E
BIDDER’S EXPERIENCE ……………………………………………………………………………………………… Sr. P.O. with To whom Description Qty. Status of RemarksNo. date Supplied of material P.O. ………………………………………………………………………………………………
1. Name of firm 2. Name & signature of
tenderer 3. Designation 4. Date
UTTAR & DAKSHIN HARYANA BIJLI VITRAN NIGAM
Specification No. CSC- XXXXI/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010
Meter Cup Board (MCB) for outside usage for Three
Phase Energy Meters
Issue of the Month: Jan. 2010
Common Specifications Committee UHBVN & DHBVN
Page 1 of 9
Page 2 of 9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION IN RESPECT OF METER CUPBOARD (MCB) FOR THREE PHASE ENERGY METERS 1. SCOPE
This specification covers the design, manufacture, inspection, testing and
supply of MS sheet. Meter Cup Board (MCBs) for housing three phase energy
meters for electric connections of General category i.e. Domestic &
Commercial connections.
1.1 SERVICE CONDITIONS
The Metal Meter Boxes to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable
for satisfactory continuous operation under the following climatic conditions:
1. Max. ambient air temperature 600C
2. Min. ambient air temperature (-)50C
3. Average Max. Daily ambient temperature 400C
4. Max. yearly weighed average ambient temperature
320C
5. Max. altitude above mean sea level (Meters) 1000
6. Minimum Relative Humidity (%age) 26
7. Max. Relative Humidity (%age) 95
8. Avg. No. of Rainy days/year 120
9. Avg. annual rainfall 900 mm
10. Maximum wind pressure 195 Kg./m Sq.
2. CONSTRUCTIONAL AND TECHNICAL PARTICULARS :
2.1 The MCBs shall conform to drawing attached as per Annexure-I to II. It shall
be dust and vermin proof for housing single phase energy meters of any
make. The internal dimensions of MCB shall be 380mm x 300 mm x 160
mm ( i.e. height x width x depth).
2.2 The MCB shall be made from 20 SWG MS sheet by the following method:
Deep Drawn Method:
The base and cover of the MCB shall be individually in one piece without
any welding except for fixing of the accessories like hinges, clamps, handle
etc. which shall be spot welded. The cover of MCB shall be fixed on
two tamper proof inside hinges not visible from outside. The hinge pin
Page 3 of 9
diameter should be minimum 3mm; Hinges shall be made from min.
1.6mm MS sheet. The door of MCB shall open from right to left by minimum
90˚.The collar of the door (cover) in closed position shall rest on the collar
of the body (base) of MCB. The collar of the door shall overlap the collar of
the body of MCB by minimum 8mm. The collar of the body shall be provided
with good quality rubber gasket lining of min. 3mm thickness. Thickness of
rubber lining shall be such that it provides proper sealing between the
cover & base of MCB to avoid penetration of dust and ingress of water.
Rubber lining should be fixed with suitable adhesive so that the same does
not get removed by itself on opening of the door. Two No. sealing
screws with rubber washer shall be provided to seal & hold the door and
body of MCB. Head of sealing screws should have hole of 3mm. The fixing
arrangement of the sealing screws shall consist of 1.6mm thick strip (L-
shaped) welded from inner side of the body & another strip having L-shaped
end with 3 mm hole welded from inner side of door of the MCB. The length
of the extended portion of the strips shall be such that the sealing screws in
tightened position are at a distance of about 5 mm from end of the collar of
the cover. The sealing strips shall have additional hole of 5.5mm for riveting
the cover and base of MCB. All the holes shall be properly aligned.
2.3 All the steel sections used in fabrication shall be carefully leveled
and straightened before any works is done on them. No rough edges shall
be permitted anywhere through out the work. The material of MCB shall be
capable to withstand mechanical, electrical and thermal stresses as well as
the effects of humidity, which are likely to be encountered during its
service. All the spot welding work shall be done carefully so as to avoid
over heated spots, cavities, porosity burns and dents etc. The surface
should be properly cleaned before welding and slag removed after
welding.
2.4 A viewing window opening of the size 200x150 mm as indicated in the
drawing shall be provided about 50mm below top edge of MCB to
facilitate taking of meter readings. Viewing window shall be provided with
toughened glass of 5mm thickness. Glass shall have scratch proof
“DHBVN” logo on the right side top corner of the glass. This glass shall be
fixed from inside of the cover of MCB, with single piece drawn metal frame
Page 4 of 9
(Glass Holder) made of 20 SWG MS sheet fixed with min. four screws.
Glass holder shall have rectangular cuttings as per details shown in
Annexure-III. The size of toughened glass shall be 220mm x170 mm so as
to provide minimum overlap of 10mm. This glass has to be fitted with a
wrap around single piece rubber ring without joint having minimum depth
of 8mm made from good quality rubber so as to with stand weather effect. 2.5 A handle of minimum 75mm length and 10mm width and 20 SWG sheet
thickness should be provided for opening and closing of the cover at the
place as shown in the drawing.
2.6 The mounting arrangement of the meter shall be as shown in the Annexure-
II. It should be raised from the base of MCB body by 35mm
(minimum). The mounting arrangement shall have 3mm thick
adjustable slotted strip of Phenolic Laminated Sheet ( Bakelite) fixed with
screws on the mounting arrangement. Adjustable slotted flat shall be
provided with two MS screws (M4 x 35mm length) with nuts .And one
screw ( M4 x 12mm length)shall be provided at upper point with Phenolic
Laminated Strip for meter hanger.
2.7 Sealing arrangement as shown in drawing with a sealing screw of 5.0 mm
diameter shall be provided for sealing of MCB .Head and Body of sealing
screw shall have a hole suitable for sealing wire.
2.8 Four Nos. fixing holes of 6.5 mm diameter at the back surface of MCB
shall be provided to fix the MCB at flat wall or surface. For fixing of
MCB on flat wall, 4 Nos. 5mm diameter 40mm long pan head self taping
screws and washers shall be provided by the supplier with every MCB. 4
Nos. plastic fixing plugs of 50mm length suitable for self-tapping screws
shall also be provided. Alternately, for fixing of MCB on poles, suitable 4 nos.
zinc plated clamps shall be provided with each box. Clamps shall have
adjustable slotted arrangement for adjustment of variation in pole sizes.
Clamps shall be provided with 4 Nos. M6 bolts and nuts for fixing of MCB
with clamps. Suitable nuts, bolts and washers shall also be provided for
fixing of clamps on the poles, Clamps, nuts & bolts shall be properly zinc
plated.
2.9 2 Nos. holes with superior quality plastic / rubber cable glands of
internal diameter of 20mm each for incoming and outgoing cables shall be
provided at the bottom of the MCB. Glands shall be properly fixed on
Page 5 of 9
the box such that the same does not get removed from the box.
Glands shall be made such that internal diameter of glands provided for
cables should be closed with the film of not less than 1mm thickness.
Cable will go through the glands by piercing the film of the glands.
2.10 MCB shall be adequately protected against rust, dust water and
corrosion both from inside and outside. The MCB shall have smoke grey
shade on outside and white on inside. The MCB shall be powder coated.
Powder Coating: The surface of the MCB shall be properly pre-treated
and cleaned in 7 tank process(degreasing, water rinsing, de-rusting, water
rinsing, phosphating, water rinsing, passivation) and shall be applied with a
powder coating of suitable thickness on outer side and inside the box.
2.11 Earthing bolt of diameter 6 mm with nut and washer shall be provided in
the threads of L-shape clamp welded to main body on left side.
2.12 All the screws and washers shall be properly zinc plated. 2.13 The tolerance permissible on the overall dimensions and weight of the MCB
shall be (+/-) 2%. 2.14 Provision for fixing of Communication port (9-pin ‘D’ Connector) shall be
provided on the side wall of the box. A window of the size suitable for
Communication port shall be provided on the side wall such that
communication port is fixed from inside of the side wall in vertical direction
with two suitable screws and nuts. Window shall be located approximately
50mm from back side and 150mm from top side of the box. Communication
port shall be covered with a Sealing arrangement from outside of the box.
Sealing arrangement shall be fixed with two sealing screws of M4 threads to
cover the communication port. Head of sealing screw shall have hole of
2.5mm for sealing wire. Suitable rubber packing shall be provided between
the sealing arrangement and box wall in order to avoid any ingress of water.
Any access to communication port shall only be after the removal of sealing
arrangement.
2.15 Push button arrangement shall be provided on the reading window glass of
the MCB. Location of push button arrangement shall be approximately 75mm
vertically downwards from top of the box and 43mm off centre from the
centre line of the box towards sealing segment side of the box. Push button
Page 6 of 9
arrangement shall be suitable to press the push buttons of the meter 65mm
below the glass level.
3 DEGREE OF PROTECTION:
The MCB shall comply with the requirement of IP-53 & its latest version.
The MCB shall be fully type tested as per IP-53 & its latest version. All
the type tests shall be carried out from the Govt approved laboratory
which are accredited by the National Board of testing and calibration
laboratories (NABL) of Govt of India. The type test reports shall be
furnished along with the bid, failing which the tender shall not be
entertained and liable to be rejected. The type test report shall not be older
than 3 years on the date of opening of Tender part-I.
4 DRAWING/SAMPLES
One complete set of detailed dimensioned drawings of each offered item
shall be submitted along with tender. Enclosed drawings are only for
general arrangement purpose. One sample of MCB as per specifications
shall be submitted along with tender and any tender not accompanied with
the sample shall be rejected out rightly. The samples being furnished shall
be new.
5 MARKINGS:
DHBVN/ UHBVN insignia shall be embossed on the MCB. The word
‘DHBVN’/ ‘UHBVN’ shall be embossed on the Meter Cup Board. A notice
with wording that ‘ There should be no cable joints inside the cabinet’
should be printed in Red on the pocket of the meter cupboard. A notice in
Hindi with wording that DHBVN/UHBVN should also be got printed on the
cover of the meter cup Board.
6 INSPECTION:
The manufacturer shall give minimum 15 days advance notice about
readiness of material at his works. The material shall be inspected for
conformity with Nigam specification before the same is accepted and
dispatched. Nigam may also carry out stage inspection of the MCBs
before powder coating. For this the manufacturer shall intimate the
manufacturing schedule in advance.
The manufacturer shall be responsible to pay penalty of Rs
20,000/- for each occasion at which the fake inspection call has been made
Page 7 of 9
or the material is rejected during testing/inspection by the authorized
agency/representative of the Nigam. This penalty would be in addition to the
expenses incurred by the Nigam in deputing the Inspecting Officer,
carrying out such inspection.
7 PACKING :
The MCB shall be suitably packed in 3 ply corrugated boxes in order to
avoid damage in transit, handling, storage and further transportation from
store to field.
8. CHALLENGE CLAUSE:
The material offered/received after the inspection by the authorized Inspecting
Officer may again be subjected to the test for loses or any other parameters
from any testing house/in house technique of the Nigam and the results if
found deviating/unacceptable or non-complying to approved GTPs the bidder
shall arrange to supply the replacement within 30 days of such detection at
his cost including to & fro transportation. In addition , penalty @10% of cost
of the inspected lot of material shall be imposed.
Director/Technical-I, UHBNV, Panchkula
Director/Project,DHBVN, Hisar
CGM/PD&C, UHBVN, Panchkula
CGM/P&D, DHBVN, Hisar.
FA & CAO/MM, UHBNV, Panchkula
FA & CAO/MM, DHBVN, Hisar
GM/P&D, UHBNV, Panchkula
GM/P&D, DHBVN, Hisar
Page 8 of 9
Page 9 of 9
UTTAR & DAKSHIN HARYANA BIJLI VITRAN NIGAM
Specification No. CSC-XXXXII/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010
TECHNICAL SPECIFICAITON
FOR
Meter Cup Board (MCB) for outside usage
for Single Phase Energy Meters
Issue of month:
Common Specification Committee UHBVN & DHBVN.
Page 1 of 10
Page 2 of 10
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION IN RESPECT OF METER CUPBOARD (MCB) FOR SINGLE PHASE ENERGY METERS
1. SCOPE
This specification covers the design, manufacture, inspection, testing and supply of MS sheet. Meter Cup Board (MCBs) for housing single phase energy meters for electric connections of General category i.e. Domestic & Commercial connections.
1.1 SERVICE CONDITIONS
The Metal Meter Boxes to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory continuous operation under the following climatic conditions:
1. Max. ambient air temperature 600C
2. Min. ambient air temperature (-)50C
3. Average Max. Daily ambient temperature 400C
4. Max. yearly weighed average ambient temperature
320C
5. Max. altitude above mean sea level (Meters) 1000
6. Minimum Relative Humidity (%age) 26
7. Max. Relative Humidity (%age) 95
8. Avg. No. of Rainy days/year 120
9. Avg. annual rainfall 900 mm
10. Maximum wind pressure 195 Kg./m Sq.
2. CONSTRUCTIONAL AND TECHNICAL PARTICULARS: 2.1 The MCBs shall conform to drawing attached as per Annexure-I to IV. It shall
be dust and vermin proof for housing single phase energy meters of any
make. The internal dimensions of MCB shall be 300mm x 250mm x 160
mm (i.e. height x width x depth).
2.2 The MCB shall be made from 20 SWG MS sheet by the following method:
Deep Drawn Method:
The base and cover of the MCB shall be individually in one piece without
any welding except for fixing of the accessories like hinges, clamps, handle
etc. which shall be spot welded. The cover of MCB shall be fixed on two
tamper proof inside hinges not visible from outside. The hinge pin
diameter should be minimum 3mm; Hinges shall be made from min.
1.6mm MS sheet. The door of MCB shall open from right to left by
minimum 90˚.The collar of the door(cover) in closed position shall rest on
Page 3 of 10
the collar of the body (base) of MCB. The collar of the door shall overlap the
collar of the body of MCB by minimum 8mm. The collar of the body shall be
provided with good quality rubber gasket lining of min. 3mm thickness.
Thickness of rubber lining shall be such that it provides proper sealing
between the cover & base of MCB to avoid penetration of dust and ingress of
water. Rubber lining should be fixed with suitable adhesive so that the same
does not get removed by itself on opening of the door. Two No. sealing
screws with rubber washer shall be provided to seal & hold the door and
body of MCB. Head of sealing screws should have hole of 3mm. The fixing
arrangement of the sealing screws shall consist of 1.6mm thick strip (L-
shaped) welded from inner side of the body & another strip having L-shaped
end with 3 mm hole welded from inner side of door of the MCB. The length of
the extended portion of the strips shall be such that the sealing screws in
tightened position are at a distance of about 5 mm from end of the collar of
the cover. The sealing strips shall have additional hole of 5.5mm for riveting
the cover and base of MCB. All the holes shall be properly aligned.
2.3 All the steel sections used in fabrication shall be carefully leveled
and straightened before any works is done on them. No rough edges
shall be permitted anywhere through out the work. The material of MCB
shall be capable to withstand mechanical, electrical and thermal stresses as
well as the effects of humidity, which are likely to be encountered during its
service. All the spot welding work shall be done carefully so as to avoid
over heated spots, cavities, porosity burns and dents etc. The surface should
be properly cleaned before welding and slag removed after welding.
2.4 A viewing window opening of the size 100x90 mm as indicated in the
drawing shall be provided about 40mm below top edge of MCB to
facilitate taking of meter readings. Viewing window shall be provided with
toughened glass of 5mm thickness. Glass shall have scratch proof
“DHBVN/ UHBVN” logo on the right side top corner of the glass. This glass
shall be fixed from inside of the cover of MCB, with single piece drawn
metal frame (Glass Holder) made of 20 SWG MS sheet fixed with min. four
screws. Glass holder shall have rectangular cuttings as per details shown
in Annexure-III. The size of toughened glass shall be 120mm x110 mm so
as to provide minimum overlap of 10mm. This glass has to be fitted with a
Page 4 of 10
wrap around single piece rubber ring without joint having minimum depth of
8mm made from good quality rubber so as to with stand weather effect. 2.5 A handle of minimum 60mm length and 10mm width and 20 SWG
sheet thickness should be provided for opening and closing of the cover at
the place as shown in the drawing.
2.6 The mounting arrangement of the meter shall be as shown in the Annexure-
II. It should be raised from the base of MCB body by 35mm
(minimum). The mounting arrangement shall have 3mm thick
adjustable slotted strip of Phenolic Laminated Sheet ( Bakelite) fixed with
screws on the mounting arrangement. Adjustable slotted flat shall be
provided with two MS screws (M4 x 25mm length) with nuts .And one screw
( M4 x 12mm length)shall be provided at upper point with Phenolic Laminated
Strip for meter hanger.
2.7 Sealing arrangement as shown in drawing with a sealing screw of 5.0
mm diameter shall be provided for sealing of MCB .Head and Body of
sealing screw shall have a hole suitable for sealing wire.
2.8 Four Nos. fixing holes of 6.5 mm diameter at the back surface of MCB
shall be provided to fix the MCB at flat wall or surface. For fixing of MCB
on flat wall, 4 Nos. 5mm diameter 40mm long pan head self taping screws
and washers shall be provided by the supplier with every MCB. 4 Nos.
plastic fixing plugs of 50mm length suitable for self-tapping screws shall also
be provided. Alternately, for fixing of MCB on poles, suitable 4 No. zinc plated
clamps shall also be provided with each box. Clamps shall have adjustable
slotted arrangement for adjustment of variation in pole sizes. Clamps shall be
provided with 4 Nos. M6 bolts and nuts for fixing of MCB with clamps.
Suitable nuts, bolts and washers shall also be provided for fixing of clamps on
the poles, Clamps, nuts & bolts shall be properly galvanized..
2.9 2 Nos. holes with superior quality plastic / rubber cable glands of internal
diameter of 15mm each for incoming and outgoing cables shall be provided
at the bottom of the MCB. Glands shall be properly fixed on the box
such that the same does not get removed from the box. Glands shall be
Page 5 of 10
made such that internal diameter of glands provided for cables should be
closed with the film of not less than 1mm thickness. Cable will go through
the glands by piercing the film of the glands.
2.10 MCB shall be adequately protected against rust, dust water and corrosion
both from inside and outside. The MCB shall have smoke grey shade on
outside and white on inside. The MCB shall be powder coated.
Powder Coating: The surface of the MCB shall be properly pre-
treated and cleaned in 7 tank process (degreasing, water rinsing, de-rusting,
water rinsing, phosphating, water rinsing, passivation) and shall be applied
with a powder coating of suitable thickness on outer side and inside the box.
2.11 Earthing bolt of diameter 6 mm with nut and washer shall be provided in
the threads of L-shape clamp welded to main body on left side.
2.12 All the screws and washers shall be properly galvanized. 2.13 The tolerance permissible on the overall dimensions and weight of the MCB
shall be (+/-) 2%.
2.14 Provision for fixing of Communication port (9-pin ‘D’ Connector) shall be
provided on the front wall of the box. A window of the size suitable for
Communication port shall be provided on the right side wall of lower portion
such that communication port is fixed from inside of the front wall in vertical
direction with two suitable screws and nuts. Communication port Window shall
be located approximately 50 mm upward from bottom side and 50 mm from
right side of the box. Communication port shall be covered with a Sealing
arrangement from outside of the box. Sealing arrangement shall be fixed with
two sealing screws of M4 threads to cover the communication port. Head of
sealing screw shall have hole of 2.5mm for sealing wire. Suitable rubber
packing shall be provided between the sealing arrangement and box wall in
order to avoid any ingress of water. Any access to communication port shall
only be after the removal of sealing arrangement.
Page 6 of 10
2.15 Push button arrangement shall be provided on the reading window glass of the
MCB. Location of push button arrangement shall be approximately 70mm
vertically downwards from top of the box and 35mm off centre from the centre
line of the box towards sealing segment side of the box. Push button
arrangement shall be suitable to press the push buttons of the meter 65mm
below the glass level.
3. DEGREE OF PROTECTION:
The MCB (including arrangement of push fit type button and sealing
arrangement for optical port mentioned in Clause No. 2.15 & 2.16) shall
comply with the requirement of IP-53 & its latest version. The MCB shall be
fully type tested as per IP-53 & its latest version. All the type test shall be
carried out from the Govt. approved laboratory which are accredited by the
National Board of testing and calibration laboratories (NABL) of Govt. of India.
The type test report shall be furnished along with the bid, failing which the
tender shall not be entertained and liable to be rejected. The type test report
shall not be older than 3 years on the date of opening of Tender.
4. DRAWING/SAMPLES
One complete set of detailed dimensioned drawings of each offered item shall
be submitted along with tender. Enclosed drawings are only for general
arrangement purpose.
5. MARKING:
DHBVN/ UHBVN insignia as shown in Annexure-IV shall be embossed on
the MCB. The word ‘DHBVN’/ ‘UHBVN’ shall be embossed on the Meter Cup
Board. A notice with wording that ‘ There should be no cable joints
inside the cabinet’ should be printed in Red on the pocket of the
meter cup Board. A notice in Hindi with wording that should also be
got printed on the cover of the meter cup Board. 6. INSPECTION:
The manufacturer shall give minimum 20 days advance notice about
readiness of material at his works. The material shall be inspected for
conformity with DHBVN/UHBVN specification before the same is accepted
and dispatched. DHBVN/UHBVN may also carry out stage inspection of the
MCBs before powder coating. For this the manufacturer shall intimate the
manufacturing schedule in advance.
Page 7 of 10
The manufacturer shall be responsible to pay penalty of Rs 20,000/- for each
occasion at which the fake inspection call has been made or the material is
rejected during testing/inspection by the authorized agency/representative of
the Nigam. This penalty would be in addition to the expenses incurred by
the Nigam in deputing the Inspecting Officer, carrying out such inspection.
7. PACKING :
The MCB shall be suitably packed in 3 ply corrugated boxes in order to
avoid damage in transit, handling, storage and further transportation from
store to field.
8. CHALLENGE CLAUSE:
The material offered/received after the inspection by the authorized Inspecting
Officer may again be subjected to the test for loses or any other parameters
from any testing house/in house technique of the Nigam and the results if
found deviating/unacceptable or non-complying to approved GTPs the bidder
shall arrange to supply the replacement within 30 days of such detection at
his cost including to & fro transportation. In addition , penalty @10% of cost
of the inspected lot of material shall be imposed.
Director/Technical-I, UHBNV, Panchkula
Director/Project,DHBVN, Hisar
CGM/PD&C, UHBVN, Panchkula
CGM/P&D, DHBVN, Hisar.
FA & CAO/MM, UHBNV, Panchkula
FA & CAO/MM, DHBVN, Hisar
GM/P&D, UHBNV, Panchkula
GM/P&D, DHBVN, Hisar
Page 8 of 10
Page 9 of 10
Page 10 of 10
ANNEXURE-IV
D H B V N / U H B V N
DHBVN / UHBVN INSIGNIA TO BE
EMBOSSED ON THE DOOR OF MCB
UTTAR & DAKSHIN HARYANA BIJLI VITRAN NIGAM
Specification No. CSC- XXXI/DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR
FOUR CORE AND TWO CORE XLPE CABLES of Various SIZES 16mm2
Page 1 of 16
, 10mm2 & 6mm2
INSULATED & XLPE SHEATHED ARMORED LT
CABLES
Issue of the Month: Common Specifications Committee UHBVN & DHBVN
Page 2 of 16
TECHINCAL SPECIFICATION FOR FOUR CORE AND TWO CORE XLPE INSULATED & XLPE SHEATHED ARMORED CABLES. 1. SCOPE
This section provides for manufacture, testing before dispatch, supply
and delivery F.O.R. destination of Four Core & Twin Core size
16mm2, 10mm2 & 6mm2 XLPE insulated and XLPE Sheathed Armored
circular LT cables with aluminum conductor suitable for working voltage
up to & including 1100 Volts ISI Marked & Conforming to IS 7098
(Pt-I)/1988 with latest amendments.
2. STANDARDS Unless otherwise stipulated in this specification the following
standards with latest amendments shall be applicable.
2.1 IS: 7098(Pt-I)/1988 XLPE Insulated (Heavy Duty) Electric cable for Voltages up to and including 1100 Volts working
2.2 IS: 8130/1984 Conductors for insulated cables.
2.3 IS: 5831/1984
XLPE insulation and sheath of electric cables.
2.4 IS: 10810/1984
Method of test for cables.
2.5 IS: 3975/1979 Galvanized Steel Wire/Strips.
2.6 IS: 10418/1982 Drums for electric cables.
3. CLIMATINC CONDITIONS:
3.1. Max. ambient air temperature 600C
3.2. Min. ambient air temperature (-)50C
3.3. Average Daily max. ambient temperature 400C
3.4. Max. yearly weighted average ambient temperature
320C
3.5. Max. altitude above mean sea level (Meters) 1000
3.6. Minimum Relative Humidity (%age) 26
3.7. Max. Relative Humidity (%age) 95
3.8. Avg. No. of Rainy days/year 120
3.9. Avg. annual rainfall 900 mm
3.10. Maximum wind pressure 195 Kg./m Sq.
Note: Moderately hot & humid tropical climate conductive to rust & fungus
growth. The climatic conditions are also prone to wide variations in
ambient conditions. Smoke is also present in the atmosphere Heavy
lightning also occurs during June to October.
Page 3 of 16
4. GENERAL REQUIRMENT: 4.1 The ISI marked XLPE Insulated Armored cables shall conform to IS:
7098(Pt-I)/1988 with latest amendment and bear BIS certification mark.
The material used for construction of the cables shall be of best
quality complying with the requirement of IS: 7098(Pt-I)/1988 and
other relevant standards. The cables shall be suitable for
outdoor/indoor installation free in air and shall be capable of
withstanding the normal stresses associated with transportation,
erection, reeling and unreeling operations without getting deformed.
4.2 The cable shall be suitable for use where combination of ambient
temperature and temperature rise due to load results in a conductor
temperature not exceeding 90 degree C under normal operation and 250
degree C under short circuit condition.
4.3 The XLPE Insulated Armored LT Cable shall be ISI marked. The
tenderer (MANUFACTURER) must furnish valid ISI certificate along with
offer.
5. MATERIAL:
5.1 CONDUCTOR
The conductor shall be composed of aluminum wire complying with
IS: 8130/1984 with latest amendments.
5.2 INSULATION
Insulation shall be cross linked Polyethylene (XLPE) conforming to the
requirements Table-I of IS: 7098/1984 with latest amendments.
5.3 FILLERS
5.3.1 The central hole/void, if any, of the cable shall be invariably filled
with suitable filler material so that there is no gap in the center.
5.3.2 The filler shall be of vulcanized rubber, un-vulcanized rubber or
Thermoplastic material and shall be provided to fill the gaps between
cores.
5.3.3 The filler material shall be so chosen so as to be compatible with
temperature of the cable and shall have no deleterious effect on other
components of the cable. These shall not be harder than XLPE and PVC
used for insulation and outer sheath respectively.
5.4. ARMOURING
Armoring shall be of galvanized round steel wires for cable size 6 Sq.
Page 4 of 16
mm whereas Armoring shall be of galvanized steel strips for cable sizes
above 6 Sq. mm.
5.5 OUTER SHEATH
The outer sheath shall consist of type ST-2 XLPE Compound conforming
to the requirements of IS: 5831/1984.
6. CONSTRUCTION:
6.1 CONDUCTOR
The construction of the conductor shall be stranded for cable size 6 Sq.
mm and above, as per Clause No. 8.1 of IS:7098(Pt-I)/1988 &
relevant clause of IS:8130/1984.
A protective barrier may be applied between the conductor and
insulation. Such barriers when used shall be compatible with insulating
material and suitable for the operating temperature of the cable.
6.2 INSULATION :
The conductor (with protective barrier, wherever applied) shall be
provided with Cross-Linked Polyethylene (XLPE) insulation applied by
extrusion. The insulation shall be so applied that it fits closely on the
conductor and it shall be possible to remove it without damage to the
conductor. The thickness and tolerance on thickness of insulation shall
be as per clause No. 9.2 of IS: 7098 (Pt- I)/1988.
6.3 CORE IDENTIFICATION:
The core shall be identified by different coloring of XLPE insulation as
per Clause No. 10.1 of IS: 7098 (Pt-I)/ 1988.
6.4 LAYING UP OF CORES :
The cores shall be laid up together with the suitable right hand lay. The
interstices shall be filled with non-hygroscopic material.
6.5 INNER SHEATH (COMMON COVERING):
6.5.1 The laid up cores shall be provided with an inner sheath applied either
by extrusion or by wrapping. It shall be ensured that it is as circular as
possible. The thickness of inner sheath shall be as given in Table-5 of IS:
7098(Pt-I)/1988.
6.5.2 The inner sheath shall be so applied that it fits closely on the laid up
cores and it shall be possible to remove it without damage to the
insulation.
Page 5 of 16
6.6 ARMORING:
6.6.1 Application:
Armoring shall be applied over the inner sheath. The armor wires/strips
shall be applied as closely as possible.
The direction of lay of armor shall be left hand. A Binder Tape may be
provided on the armor.
6.6.2 Type of Armor & Dimension:
The armor shall consist of galvanized round steel wires for cable size 4
Sq. mm & 6 Sq. mm whereas it shall be galvanized steel strips for
cable size above 6 Sq. mm with the dimensions as specified in Table
- 6 of IS:7098(Pt-I)/1988.
6.6.3 Joints:
The joints in the armor wire / strips shall be made by brazing or welding
and the surface irregularities shall be removed. A joint in any wire /
strips shall be at least 300 mm from the nearest joint in any other armor /
wire in the completed cable.
6.7 OUTER SHEATH
6.7.1. The outer sheath shall be applied over the armouring.
6.7.2. The color of the outer sheath shall be black.
6.7.3. The minimum thickness of XLPE outer sheath shall not fall below the
thickness specified in Table -8 of IS: 7098 (Pt-I) /1988.
7. TESTS AND TEST CERTIFICATS:
7.1 The cable should meet the requirement of all tests including optional
tests as specified at Clause No. 15.4 of IS: 7098 (Pt. I) / 1988.
7.1.1 The following shall constitute routine tests:
7.1.1.1 Conductor resistance test.
7.1.1.2 High Voltage test.
7.1.2 The following shall constitute Acceptance Tests:
7.1.2.1 Tensile test (for Aluminum).
7.1.2.2 Wrapping test (for Aluminum).
7.1.2.3 Conductor resistance test.
7.1.2.4 Test for thickness of Insulation & Sheath.
7.1.2.5 Tensile strength & elongation at break of Insulation & sheath.
7.1.2.6 Insulation resistance (Volume Resistivity) test.
7.1.2.7 High Voltage test.
7.1.2.8 Hot Set Test for Insulation.
Page 6 of 16
7.1.2.9 Cold Bend Test for outer sheath.
7.1.2.10 Cold Impact Test for outer sheath.
7.1.3 The following shall constitute Type Tests:
7.1.3.1 Tests of Conductor
7.1.3.1.1 Tensile test (for aluminum)
7.1.3.1.2 Wrapping test (for aluminum)
7.1.3.1.3 Conductor resistance test.
7.1.3.2 Test for Armoring Wires/ Strips
7.1.3.3 Test for thickness of insulation and sheath
7.1.4 Physical tests for insulation:
7.1.4.1 Tensile strength and elongation at7.1.4.2 Ageing in air oven. 7.1.4.3 Hot Set test. 7.1.4.4 Shrinkage Test. 7.1.4.5 Water Absorption (Gravimetric).
7.1.5 Physical tests for Outer Sheath:
7.1.5.1 Tensile strength and elongation at break.
7.1.5.2 Ageing in air oven.
7.1.5.3 Loss of mass in air oven.
7.1.5.4 Shrinkage Test.
7.1.5.5 Hot Deformation Test.
7.1.5.6 Heat shock Test.
7.1.5.7 Thermal Stability.
7.1.6 Insulation resistance (Volume Resistivity Test)
7.1.7 High voltage test.
7.1.8 Flammability test.
7.2 The tenderer shall furnish latest complete type tests and optional test
certificates as specified in Clause No. 15.4 of IS: 7098(Pt-I)/1988 (not
older than three years as on the date of tender opening) for all sizes of
offered LT XLPE ARMORED CABLES from NABL accredited testing
laboratory with the tender offer otherwise their offer is likely to be ignored.
7.3 The tenderer must also clearly indicate various testing facilities available
at their works for testing the material as per relevant standards. In case
of otherwise, particulars of the place where such testing is proposed to
be conducted during the course of inspection, shall be indicated with
the offer.
Page 7 of 16
8 INSPECTION:
8.1 The inspection may be carried out by the purchaser at any stage of
manufacture. The successful tenderer shall grant free access to the
purchaser’s representatives at a reasonable time when the work is in
progress. Inspection and acceptance of any equipment / material under
this specification by the purchaser shall not relieve the supplier of
his obligation of furnishing equipment in accordance with the
specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if the
equipment/material is found to be defective.
8.2 The supplier shall keep the purchaser informed in advance about the
manufacturing program so that arrangement can be made for inspection.
8.3 The acceptance tests as per IS: 7098(Pt-I)/1988 shall also be conducted
by the manufacturer before dispatch in the presence of purchaser’s
Representative / Inspecting Officer as per relevant clause of “General
Conditions of Contract” along with verification of lengths & weight and
checking the manufacturing defects, if any of samples coils .The mass
of aluminum, XLPE, PVC & Filler in sample coils shall also be verified
by the Inspecting Officer(s).
Cold bend/ cold impact test (IS: 5831/ 1984) shall constitute the
optional tests and shall be conducted on each offered lot of the
cables of each size as per Clause No. 15.4 of IS: 7098(Pt- I)/1988.
8.4 TYPE TESTS:
The first lot offered shall not be less than 10% of ordered quantity of
each size of LT XLPE ARMORED CABLE.
One sample from the 1st Lot of LT XLPE ARMORED Cable of each
size as received in purchaser’s store shall be selected and sealed by
the inspecting officer nominated by purchaser’s for getting it type tested
at any NABL accredited testing laboratory. The charges incurred
towards type test of the material received in our stores shall be borne
by Supplier.
In case sample from first lot fails then:
8.4.1 Supplier shall have to replace the full quantity of the respective
inspected lot supplied to various stores and lying unused at stores.
8.4.2 For the quantity already utilized against the order in field a deduction
@ 15% (Fifteen Percent) of F.O.R. Destination prices of the material
supplied shall be made.
Page 8 of 16
8.4.3 Sample from next lot shall be selected again for type test. All test
charges incurred towards type test of the material for second time shall be
borne by the Supplier. In case sample again fails in the type test then
further supplies shall not be accepted.
8.5 The purchaser reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance
/routine tests of the bought out items.
8.6 At least 5% of total numbers of drums subject to minimum of 2 in each
lot put up for inspection shall be selected at random to ascertain the
length/workmanship of cable by the following method:
At the work of the manufacture, the cable shall be transferred from
one drum to another for checking any manufacturing defects in the
cable drum selected for conducting acceptance tests, at the same time
measuring its length with the help of pulley & cyclometer graduated
in presence of inspector. The difference in the measured length thus
obtained from the declared length by the supplier in the packing list
shall be applied to all the drums if the cable is found short during checking
the sample lot (s).
8.7 The supplier shall present the latest Calibration Certificate(s) of testing
instruments/equipments to be used for the testing of the material
covered in the Purchase Order to the authorized inspecting officer
/inspecting agency of the purchaser. The testing instruments / meters
/apparatus etc. should be got calibrated by the supplier from time to time
from an independent testing laboratory / house having valid
accreditation from National Accreditation Board for testing and
calibrating laboratories for the testing equipment or from original
manufacturers having trace ability to NABL /NPL. The calibration
certificate(s) should not in any case be older than one year at the time
of presenting the same to the inspecting officer / inspecting agency of
the purchaser. The testing instruments / equipment should be duly
sealed by the Calibrating Agency and mention thereof shallbe indicated in
the calibration certificate(s).
8.8 TEST CHECKING OF MATERIAL AT STORES:
8.8.1 SAMPLING:
8.8.1.1 One number out of each lot / sub-lot of 25 Nos. drums or pert
thereof for cables of size 50 Sq. mm. and above.
Page 9 of 16
8.8.2 TESTS:
The following tests shall be carried out:
8.8.2.1 Measurement of Resistance of conductor.
8.8.2.2 Tensile & Elongation test for insulation.
8.8.2.3 Thickness of Insulation.
8.8.3 CRITERIA FOR ACCEPTANCE:
8.8.3.1 If the measured conductor resistance of the sample(s) exceeds
beyond 2% as per the resistance specified in the contract, the
material shall be rejected and the same shall have to be replaced by
the supplier.
8.8.3.2 If the measured conductor resistance of the sample(s) exceeds
the value specified in the contract but does not exceed by more
than 2% of the resistance value specified in the contract, the
material pertaining to the relevant lot/ sub-lot to shall be accepted
with a deduction @ 1.5% of the cost of cable for increase in resistance
for every 1% or part thereof.
8.8.3.3 If the sample(s) fails in any other test, the material contained in the
pertinent lot/sub-lot shall be rejected and shall have to be replaced by
the supplier.
8.9 TEST CHARGES:
All test charges incurred towards test checking of the material received in
our stores shall be borne by the NIGAM.
8.10 The manufacturer shall be responsible to pay penalty of Rs 20,000/-
for each occasion at which the fake inspection call has been made or
the material is rejected during testing/inspection by the authorized
agency/representative of the Nigam. This penalty would be in addition
to the expenses incurred by the Nigam in deputing the Inspecting
Officer, carrying out such inspection.
9. IDENTIFACTION:
9.1 The manufacture shall be identified through-out the length of cables as
per Clause No. 17.1 of IS: 7098(Pt-1)/1988.
9.2 In order to distinguish these electric cables from telephone cables, the
word ELECTRIC shall be indicated, printed or embossed throughout the
length of the cable on outer sheath.
Page 10 of 16
9.3 The cable code shall be provided as per Clause No. 17.3 of IS: 7098 (Pt-
I)/1988.
9.4 The cable shall also be required to be embossed with the word Name of
Manufacture or trade name, Cable code, Voltage Grade, DHBVN, size of
cable, year of manufacture and ISI certification mark at every meter
length for which no extra charges shall be paid.
10 PACKING AND MARKING:
10.1 The cables shall be wound on non-returnable wooden drums
conforming to IS: 10418/1982 of suitable size and packed. The ends of
the cable shall be sealed by means of non-hygroscopic sealing material.
Only one cable length shall be supplied on a drum.
10.2 The cable shall carry the following information stenciled /painted on the
drum:
10.2.1 Manufacturer‘s name, Brand name or trade mark.
10.2.2 Type of cable and voltage grade.
10.2.3 Number of Cores.
10.2.4 Nominal Cross-sectional area of the conductor.
10.2.5 Cable Code.
10.2.6 Length of cable on the drum.
10.2.7 Approximate gross weight.
10.2.8 Year of manufacture.
10.2.9 BIS Certification marks.
10.2.10 Name of the Consignee and full destination.
10.2.11 Tender number/Purchase Order No.
10.2.12 The word SUITABLE FOR OUTDOOR USE & LOW TEMPERATURE
CONDITIONS.
11. STANDARD LENGTH:
11.1 The cables shall be supplied in the standard length of 500 Metre for,
4CX16 Sq mm2, and 1000 Metre for size 4CX10Sq. mm2, 2CX16Sq.
mm,2 2CX10 Sq. mm2, 4CX6 Sq. mm2 & 2C X 6 mm2.
11.2 A tolerance (+/-) 5 % shall be allowed in standard length.
11.3 Only one cable length shall be acceptable by non-standard length
measuring not less than 50% of standard length to complete the ordered
quantity in each size.
Page 11 of 16
12 QUANTITY:
The quantities as mentioned in the Schedule of requirement are
tentative & these may increase/decrease as per the requirement of the
Nigam.
13 QUANTITY TOLERANCE:
The quantity tolerance of (+/-)2% shall be allowed in each size for
completion of supply.
14. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:
The tenderer shall furnish guaranteed technical particulars in the relevant
schedule.( Annexure– I & II)
15. CONSTRUCTIONAL DRAWINGS:
The tenderer is required to furnish the detailed constructional drawing
of the cable clearly showing shape of core, type and size of fillers/
interstices along with centre filler etc. In absence of this the tender is
likely to be ignored.
16. Challenge Clause:-
The material offered/received after the inspection by the authorized
inspecting officer may again be subjected to the test for or any parameter
from any testing house/in-house technique of the Nigam & the results if
found deviating un-acceptable or not complying to approved GTPs the
bidder shall arrange to supply the replacement within thirty (30) days of
such detection at his cost including to & fro transportation. In addition ,
penalty @10% of cost of the inspected lot of material shall be imposed.
17. Warranty Period:-
The supplier shall be responsible to replace, free of cost, with no
transportation or insurance cost to the purchaser, up to destination, the
whole or any part to the material which in normal and proper use proves
the defective in quality or workmanship, subject to the condition that the
defect is noticed within 18 months from the date of receipt of material in
stores or 12 months from the date of commissioning whichever period
may expire earlier. The consignee or nay other officer of Nigam actually
using the material will give prompt notice of each such defect to the
supplier. The replacement shall be effected by the supplier within a
reasonable time, but not, in any case, exceeding 45 days/ The supplier
shall, also, arrange to remove the defective within a reasonable period,
Page 12 of 16
but not exceeding 45 days from the date of issue of notice in respect
thereof, failing which, the purchaser reserve the right to dispose of
defective material in any manner considered fit by him (purchaser), at the
sole risk and cost of the supplier. Any sale proceeds of the defective
material after meeting the expenses incurred on its custody, disposal
handling etc., shall however be credited to the supplier’s account and set
off against any outstanding dues of the purchaser against the supplier.
The warranty for 12/18 months shall be one time.
The specification no. CSC-XI/ DH/UH/P&D/2009-2010 be hereby
considered withdrawn.
Director/Technical-I, UHBNV, Panchkula
Director/Project,DHBVN, Hisar
CGM/PD&C, UHBVN, Panchkula
CGM/P&D, DHBVN, Hisar.
FA & CAO/MM, UHBNV, Panchkula
FA & CAO/MM, DHBVN, Hisar
GM/P&D, UHBNV, Panchkula
GM/P&D, DHBVN, Hisar
Page 13 of 16
ANNEXURE-III GUARANTEED TECHNICAL AND OTHER PARTICULARS FOR THE SUPPLY OF 4 CORE LT XLPE ARMOURED CABLES.
4 CORE XLPE ARMOURND CABLES IN S. No
PARTICULARS 4CX16 4CX10 4CX6
1 Manufacturer’s name and works address. 2 Standard specification to which the
material shall
3 VOLTAGE GRADE. 4 NO. OF CORES. 5 CONDUCTOR DETAILS:
Normal cross section area of : 1 Phase Conductor (Sq.mm)
A
2 Neutral Conductor (Sq.mm) No. and size of strands (in mm)of: 1 Phase Conductor (Sq.mm)
B
2 Neutral Conductor(Sq.mm) C SHAPE OF CONDUCTOR D Whether compacted or non compacted E Resistance at 27 0c
1 Phase Conductor ohm/km
2 Neutral Conductor ohm/km INSULATION 1 Type 2 Colour 3 Thickness A Phase Conductor (sq.mm)
1 Nominal (mm) 2 Minimum (mm)
B Neutral Conductor (Sq.mm) 1 Nominal (mm)
6
2 Minimum (mm)
7 Type of inner sheathing and colour 8 Whether Binder Tape provided 9 Armoring
A Type B Dimension (mm)
10 Outer Sheath A Material B Thickness
1 Nominal (mm) 2 Minimum (mm)
C Standard to which it Confirm A Type and size of filler used 11 B MIN. WT. OF FILLER IN KG./KM
12 MAX. OVERALL DIAMETER OF THE CABLE IN MM.
13 Nature of Packing. 14 DRUM
A TARE WEIGHT OF DRUM B WHETHER DRUM IS WHELL C STANDARD SPECIFICATION TO
WHICH
D DRUM DETAILS & DIMENSIONS
E Whether 2-Full Ply Flange Construction or 2-Full Ply plus 1 Segmental layer Flange Construction.
1 Drum size A Flange Diameter (d1) (mm) B Barrel Diameter (d2) (mm) C Centre hole Diameter (d3) (mm) D Overall with (L1) (mm)
F Travers (L2) (mm)
Page 14 of 16
G Thickness of Flange H Barrel End (Supporting disc or
1 Diameter (mm) 2 Thickness (mm)
I Stretchers (core carrier Planks ) 1 Number (Min) 2 Thickness x width (mm)
J Barrel Battens thickness (core K Barrel Middle Supports (Middle L Thickness of External Lagging. 2 DETAILS OF METAL
A Clamping Studs with 1 Numbers 2 Diameter (mm)
B Square or Round Washers 1 Numbers 2 Diameter (mm)
C M.S. Bushes 1 Numbers 2 Thickness of Sleeve (mm) 3 Dimension of Sleeve (mm 4 Number of Bolts
5 Diameters of Bolts D M.S. /C.I. Centre Plate
1 Numbers 2 Diameter of Bolts (mm) 3 Centre Plate Bolts.
A Numbers
B Diameter of Bolts (mm)
E Centre Hole Diameter (mm) F Minimum Weight in kg/km
1 Aluminum 2 XLPE
3 PVC G Standard Length of cable in
metre & its Tolerance
H Whether material bears BISCertification
I BIS License no. & validity. J Embossing.
K Any other particulars.
Page 15 of 16
ANNEXURE-III
GURANTEED TECHNICAL AND OTHER PRTICULARS FOR THE SUPPLY OF 2 CORE LT XLPE ARMOURED CABLES.
2CORE XLPE ARMOURND CABLES IN SQ MM
S. No
PARTICULARS 2Cx16 mm2 2Cx10 mm2 2Cx6 mm2
1 Manufacture’s name and works address 2 Standard specification to which the material shall confirm. 3 VOLTAGE GRADE 4 NO. OF CORES 5 CONDUCTOR DETAILS:
A Nominal cross section area of : 1 Phase Conductor (Sq.mm) 2 Neutral Conductor (Sq.mm)
B No. and size of strands (in mm)of: 1 Phase Conductor (sq.mm) 2 Neutral Conductor (Sq.mm)
C SHAPE OF CONDUCTOR D Whether compacted or non compacted E Resistance at 27 0C
1 Phase Conductor ohm/km
2 Neutral Conductor ohm/km
INSULATION A Type B Colour C Thickness
Phase Conductor (sq.mm) 1.1 Nominal (mm)
1
1.2 Minimum (mm) Neutral Conductor (sq.mm) 2.1 Nominal (mm)
6
2
2.2 Minimum (mm) 7 Type of inner sheathing and colour 8 Whether Binder Tape provided
Armoring A Type
9
B Dimension (mm) Outer Sheath A Material
Thickness 1 Nominal (mm)
B
2 Minimum (mm)
10
C Standard to which it Confirm A Type and size or filler used 11 B MIN. WT. OF FILLER IN KG./KM.
12 MAX. OVERALL DIAMETER OF THE CABLE IN MM.
13 Nature of Packing 14 DRUM
A TARE WEIGHT OF DRUM B WHETHER DRUM IS WHEEL MOUNTED.
C STANDARD SPECIFICATION TO WHICH DRUM
D DRUM DETAILS 8 DIMENSIONS
E Whether 2-Full Ply Flange Construction or 2-Full Ply plus 1 Segmental layer Flange Construction.
Drum size A Flange Diameter (d1) (mm) B Barrel Diameter (d2) (mm) C Centre hole Diameter (d3) (mm)
1
D Overall with (L1) (mm)
Page 16 of 16
E Travers (L2) (mm) F Thickness of Flange
Barrel End (Supporting disc or core segment ) 1 Diameter (mm)
G
2 Thickness (mm) Stretchers (core carrier Planks ) 1 Number (Min)
H
2 Thickness X width (mm) I Barrel Battens thickness (core filler Planks) J Barrel Middle Supports (Middle core discs )
K Thickness of External Lagging. (mm) 2 DETAILS OF METAL COMPONENTS :
Clamping Studs with Hexagonal Nuts 1 Numbers
A
2 Diameter (mm) Square or Round Washers 1 Numbers
B
2 Diameter (mm) M.S. Bushes 1 Numbers 2 Thickness of Sleeve (mm) 3 Dimension of Sleeve (mm) 4 Number of Bolts
C
5 Diameters of Bolts M.S. /C.I. Centre Plate 1 Numbers 2 Dimensions of Square /Triangular equal
sides
Centre Plate Bolts. 3.1 Numbers
D
3
3.2 Diameter of Bolts (mm) E Centre Hole Diameter (mm) F Minimum Weight in Kg. /Km
1 Aluminum 2 XLPE
3 PVC G Standard Length of cable in meters & its H Whether material bears BIS Certification I BIS License no. & validity J Embossing
K Any other particulars
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 34
SECTION VII-D
DRAWINGS
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 35
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 36
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 37
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 38
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 39
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 40
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 41
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 42
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 43
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 44
BID VOLUME-II SEC VII TED-150 45
Top Related